Browse site A to Z

Search results

Go To Advanced Search

Papers Trust Board - 11 November 2025

Description: Date Time Location Chair Agenda Trust Board – Open Session 11/11/2025 9:00 - 13:00 Conference Room, Heartbeat Education Centre Jenni Douglas-Todd 1 Chair’s Welcome, Apologies and Declarations of Interest 9:00 Note apologies for absence, and to hear any declarations of interest relating to any item on the Agenda. 2 Patient Story (item deferred) The patient story provides an opportunity for the Board to reflect on the experiences of patients and staff within the Trust and understand what the Trust could do better. 3 Minutes of Previous Meeting held on 9 September 2025 Approve the minutes of the previous meeting held on 9 September 2025 4 Matters Arising and Summary of Agreed Actions To discuss any matters arising from the minutes, and to agree on the status of any actions assigned at the previous meeting. 5 QUALITY, PERFORMANCE and FINANCE Quality includes: clinical effectiveness, patient safety, and patient experience 5.1 Briefing from the Chair of the Audit and Risk Committee 9:05 Keith Evans, Chair 5.2 Briefing from the Chair of the Finance, Investment & Cash Committee 9:10 David Liverseidge, Chair 5.3 Briefing from the Chair of the People and Organisational Development 9:15 Committee Jane Harwood, Chair 5.4 Briefing from the Chair of the Quality Committee 9:20 Tim Peachey, Chair 5.5 Chief Executive Officer's Report 9:25 Receive and note the report Sponsor: David French, Chief Executive Officer 5.6 Performance KPI Report for Month 6 10:00 Review and discuss the report Sponsor: Andy Hyett, Chief Operating Officer 5.7 Break 10:40 5.8 Finance Report for Month 6 10:55 Review and discuss the report Sponsor: Ian Howard, Chief Financial Officer 5.9 ICB System Report for Month 6 11:05 Receive and discuss the report Sponsor: Ian Howard, Chief Financial Officer 5.10 11:10 People Report for Month 6 Review and discuss the report Sponsor: Steve Harris, Chief People Officer 5.11 NHSE Audit and review of 'Developing Workforce Safeguards' including 11:20 UHS Self-Assessment Return Review and approve the self-assessment return Sponsor: Natasha Watts, Acting Chief Nursing Officer 5.12 11:30 Guardian of Safe Working Hours Quarterly Report and Update on 10-Point Plan Review and discuss the report and update Sponsor: Paul Grundy, Chief Medical Officer Attendee: Diana Hulbert, Guardian of Safe Working Hours and Emergency Department Consultant 5.13 Annual Clinical Outcomes Summary Report 11:45 Review and discuss the report Sponsor: Paul Grundy, Chief Medical Officer Attendees: Lucinda Hood, Head of Medical Directorate/Kate Pryde, Clinical Director for Improvement and Clinical Effectiveness 6 STRATEGY and BUSINESS PLANNING 6.1 Corporate Objectives 2025-26 Quarter 2 Review 11:55 Review and feedback on the corporate objectives Sponsor: David French, Chief Executive Officer Attendee: Martin de Sousa, Director of Strategy and Partnerships 6.2 Board Assurance Framework (BAF) Update 12:05 Review and discuss the update Sponsor: Natasha Watts, Acting Chief Nursing Officer Attendees: Craig Machell, Associate Director of Corporate Affairs and Company Secretary/Lauren Anderson, Corporate Governance and Risk Manager Page 2 7 CORPORATE GOVERNANCE, RISK and INTERNAL CONTROL 7.1 Feedback from the Council of Governors' (CoG) meeting 28 October 2025 12:15 (Oral) Sponsor: Jenni Douglas-Todd, Trust Chair 7.2 Register of Seals and Chair's Actions Report 12:25 Receive and ratify In compliance with the Trust Standing Orders, Financial Instructions, and the Scheme of Reservation and Delegation. Sponsor: Jenni Douglas-Todd, Trust Chair 7.3 Health and Safety Services Annual Report 2024-25 12:30 Receive and discuss Sponsor: Natasha Watts, Acting Chief Nursing Officer Attendees: Vickie Purdie, Head of Patient Safety/Scott Spencer, Health and Safety Adviser 8 Any other business 12:40 Raise any relevant or urgent matters that are not on the agenda 9 Note the date of the next meeting: 13 January 2026 10 Items circulated to the Board for reading 12:45 10.1 South Central Regional Research Delivery Network (SC RRDN) 2025-26 Q2 Performance Report Note the report Sponsor: Paul Grundy, Chief Medical Officer 11 Resolution regarding the Press, Public and Others Sponsor: Jenni Douglas-Todd, Trust Chair To agree, as permitted by the National Health Service Act 2006 (as amended), the Trust's Constitution and the Standing Orders of the Board of Directors, that representatives of the press, members of the public and others not invited to attend to the next part of the meeting be excluded due to the confidential nature of the business to be transacted. 12 Follow-up discussion with governors 12:45 Page 3 Agenda links to the Board Assurance Framework (BAF) 11 November 2025 – Open Session Overview of the BAF Risk 1a: Lack of capacity to appropriately respond to emergency demand, manage the increasing waiting lists for elective demand, and provide timely diagnostics, that results in avoidable harm to patients. 1b: Due to the current challenges, we fail to provide patients and their families / carers with a high-quality experience of care and positive patient outcomes. 1c: We do not effectively plan for and implement infection prevention and control measures that reduce the number of hospital-acquired infections and limit the number of nosocomial outbreaks of infection. 2a: We do not take full advantage of our position as a leading University teaching hospital with a growing, reputable, and innovative research and development portfolio, attracting the best staff and efficiently delivering the best possible treatments and care for our patients. 3a: We are unable to meet current and planned service requirements due to the unavailability of staff to fulfil key roles. 3b: We fail to develop a diverse, compassionate, and inclusive workforce, providing a more positive staff experience for all staff. 3c: We fail to create a sustainable and innovative education and development response to meet the current and future workforce needs identified in the Trust’s longer-term workforce plan. 4a: We do not implement effective models to deliver integrated and networked care, resulting in sub-optimal patient experience and outcomes, increased numbers of admissions and increases in patients’ length of stay. 5a: We are unable to deliver a financial breakeven position, resulting in: inability to move out of the NHS England Recovery Support Programme, NHS England imposing additional controls/undertakings, and a reducing cash balance impacting the Trust’s ability to invest in line with its capital plan, estates/digital strategies, and in transformation initiatives. 5b: We do not adequately maintain, improve and develop our estate to deliver our clinical services and increase capacity. 5c: Our digital technology or infrastructure fails to the extent that it impacts our ability to deliver care effectively and safely within the organisation, 5d: We fail to prioritise green initiatives to deliver a trajectory that will reduce our direct and indirect carbon footprint by 80% by 2028-2032 (compared with a 1990 baseline) and reach net zero direct carbon emissions by 2040 and net zero indirect carbon emissions by 2045. Agenda links to the BAF No Item Linked BAF risk(s) 5.6 Performance KPI Report for Month 6 5.8 Finance Report for Month 6 5.9 ICB System Report for Month 6 5.10 People Report for Month 6 5.11 Workforce Safeguards Self-Assessment 5.12 Guardian of Safe Working Hours Quarterly Report 5.13 Clinical Outcomes Summary Report 1a, 1b, 1c 5a 5a 3a, 3b, 3c 1a, 3a 3a, 3b 1a, 1b Appetite (Category) Minimal (Safety) Current risk rating 4x5 20 Cautious (Experience) Minimal (Safety) 4x4 16 4x4 16 Open (Technology & Innovation) 3x4 12 Open (workforce) Open (workforce) Open (workforce) 4x5 20 4x3 12 4x4 16 Cautious (Effectiveness) 3x3 9 Cautious (Finance) 5x5 25 Target risk rating 4 x 2 Apr 6 27 3 x 2 Apr 6 27 2 x 3 Apr 6 27 3 x 2 Mar 6 27 4 x 3 Mar 12 30 4 x 2 Mar 8 30 3 x 2 Mar 6 29 3 x 2 Dec 6 25 3 x 3 Apr 9 30 Cautious (Effectiveness) Open (Technology & Innovation) Open (Technology & Innovation) 4x5 20 3x4 12 2x4 8 4 x 2 Apr 8 30 3 x 2 Apr 6 27 2 x 2 Dec 4 27 Does this item facilitate movement towards or away from the intended target risk score and appetite? Towards Away Neither x x x x x x x Minutes Trust Board – Open Session Date 09/09/2025 Time 9:00 – 13:00 Location Conference Room, Heartbeat/Microsoft Teams Chair Jenni Douglas-Todd (JD-T) Present Diana Eccles, NED (DE) Keith Evans, Deputy Chair and NED (KE) Paul Grundy, Chief Medical Officer (PG) Steve Harris, Chief People Officer (SH) Jane Harwood, NED/Senior Independent Director (JH) Ian Howard, Chief Financial Officer (IH) Andy Hyett, Chief Operating Officer (AH) David Liverseidge, NED (DL) Alison Tattersall, NED (AT) In attendance Craig Machell, Associate Director of Corporate Affairs and Company Secretary (CM) Lauren Anderson, Corporate Governance and Risk Manager (LA) (item 6.1) Danielle Honey, Named Nurse for Safeguarding Children (DH) (item 5.14) Lucinda Hood, Head of Medical Directorate (LH) (item 5.15) Duncan Linning-Karp, Deputy Chief Operating Officer (DL-K) (item 5.6) Corinne Miller, Named Nurse for Safeguarding Adults (CMi) (item 5.14) Jenny Milner, Associate Director of Patient Experience (JM) (items 5.11-5.12) 1 member of the public (item 2) 30 members of staff (observing) 6 members of the public (observing) Apologies Gail Byrne, Chief Nursing Officer (GB) David French, Chief Executive Officer (DAF) Tim Peachey, NED (TP) 1. Chair’s Welcome, Apologies and Declarations of Interest The Chair welcomed attendees to the meeting. There were no interests to declare in the business to be transacted at the meeting. It was noted that apologies had been received from Gail Byrne, David French and Tim Peachey. The Chair provided an overview of meetings she had held and events that she had attended since the previous Board meeting. 2. Patient Story Aelwen Emmett, a volunteer at the Trust and former patient was invited to present her experience, focusing particularly on her work to improve the standard of food offered to patients. 3. Minutes of the Previous Meeting held on 15 July 2025 The draft minutes tabled to the meeting were agreed to be an accurate record of the meeting held on 15 July 2025. Page 1 4. Matters Arising and Summary of Agreed Actions The matters arising and actions were noted. In respect of action 1246, it was noted that virtual outpatient appointments had now been built into the Trust’s programme. Furthermore, meetings were to be held with commissioners and the cancer network to improve the quality of referrals. It was noted that action 1246 could be closed. 5. QUALITY, PERFORMANCE and FINANCE 5.1 Briefing from the Chair of the Finance and Investment Committee David Liverseidge was invited to present the Committee Chair’s Reports in respect of the meetings held on 21 July and 2 September 2025, the content of which was noted. It was further noted that: • In July 2025, the Trust had reported that it was £1.1m adverse to its plan, but that the underlying trajectory was improving. • The committee received an update from Wessex NHS Procurement Limited, noting that the company was on track in terms of its Cost Improvement Programme target. • The committee had received an update in respect of both the proposed Hampshire and Isle of Wight elective hub and a possible Urgent Treatment Centre at Southampton. • The committee reviewed the Finance Report for Month 4 (item 5.8), noting that the Trust had reported a year-to-date deficit of £19.5m, which was £5.8m adverse to plan. Key drivers for the Trust’s financial position included the lack of improvement in the number of patients having no criteria to reside and mental health patients, the continued difference between funded and actual activity under block contracts, lower than anticipated income, and higher than planned workforce numbers. • The Trust was ahead of its plan on Cost Improvement Programme delivery. • The committee reviewed the Trust’s proposed Financial Recovery Plan and noted the need to ensure that the long-term impact of decisions needed to be taken into account. • The committee reviewed the Trust’s cash position and noted that cash support would be required in the Autumn and that the committee would be amending its terms of reference to expand its role in terms of cash monitoring and oversight. • The committee reviewed the Board Assurance Framework risks within its remit, noting that Risk 5a had increased to 25 due to the risk associated with the Trust’s cash position (item 6.1). 5.2 Briefing from the Chair of the People and Organisational Development Committee Jane Harwood was invited to present the Committee Chair’s Reports in respect of the meetings held on 21 July and 1 September 2025, the content of which was noted. It was further noted that: • The committee reviewed the People Report for Month 4 (item 5.10), noting that there continued to be significant demands on the Trust’s workforce, especially due to the number of patients having no criteria to reside and patients with a primary mental health need. Whilst the Trust’s substantive workforce had reduced, there had been an increase in the number of temporary staff resulting in the Trust reporting that it was 55 whole-time- equivalents above its plan. Page 2 • The committee considered the impact of the recruitment controls on the administrative and clerical workforce and the potential for shortages in these areas causing issues elsewhere. • The committee received an update in respect of the Mutually Agreed Resignation Scheme (MARS), noting that 65 applications had been approved. • The committee received an update on the recruitment of newly qualified nurses, noting that the Trust had pre-empted the announcement of a ‘guarantee’ by the Secretary of State. • The committee reviewed the workforce related elements of the Trust’s Financial Recovery Plan, noting the challenges in delivering what was required and the Trust’s reliance on improvements in patients having no criteria to reside and mental health patients. • The committee reviewed its terms of reference, proposing to make only minor changes (item 7.2). 5.3 Briefing from the Chair of the Quality Committee Diana Eccles was invited to present the Committee Chair’s Report in respect of the meeting held on 18 August 2025, the content of which was noted. It was further noted that: • The committee considered the proposal to revise enhanced rates paid to temporary staff in certain areas to remove the enhancement and bring rates into line with Agenda for Change rates. The committee noted the impact on staff and the concerns expressed by staff members. However, it was further noted that the enhancements were not intended to be permanent. • The committee received the Experience of Care report and noted a continuation in the trend observed during Quarter 4 of staff attitudes featuring as a reason for complaint. It was considered likely that this was indicative of the pressures on staff. • The committee reviewed the Maternity and Neonatal Safety 2025-26 Quarter 1 Report, noting that an action plan was in place in respect of the Maternity Triage Line to address some shortcomings identified in the process. • The committee received the Learning from Deaths 2025-26 Quarter 1 Report (item 5.11), noting that the Trust was one of only 11 trusts out of 119 with a lower-than-expected death rate during the period. • The committee reviewed the Safeguarding Annual Report 2024-25 and Strategy 2025-26 (item 5.14), noting that activity levels remained consistent with prior years, but the complexity of cases had increased. 5.4 Chief Executive Officer’s Report Paul Grundy was invited to present the Chief Executive Officer’s Report, the content of which was noted. It was further noted that: • The NHS league tables for 2025 had been published on 9 September 2025. The Trust had ranked 48th out of 134 and had been placed in segment 3 of the NHS Oversight Framework due to the effect of the ‘financial override’. The Trust was temporarily in segment 5 due to being in the Recovery Support Programme. • Trusts were required to submit self-assessments for the Provider Capability Assessment during October 2025. This would inform decisions relating to which organisations to place in the Performance Improvement Programme. • Resident doctors undertook strike action between 25 and 30 July 2025. Approximately one-third of those eligible at the Trust took part in the industrial action and the Trust had performed well in terms of mitigating the impact on activity. Page 3 • The Royal College of Nursing had published results of its analysis of violence and aggression against nursing staff in emergency departments, noting that the number of incidents had increased from 2,093 in 2019 to 4,054 in 2024. • NHS England had published a series of urgent and emergency care improvement guides to assist organisations with managing the winter period. • A number of changes to the organisation of local councils in Hampshire and Southampton were proposed as part of national plans to create unitary councils in place of existing county and district/borough councils. 5.5 Performance KPI Report for Month 4 Andy Hyett was invited to present the Performance KPI Report for Month 4, the content of which was noted. It was further noted that: • The Trust had reported an increase in the number of patients waiting over 52, 65 and 78 weeks alongside an increase in the overall waiting list. The Trust had entered Tier 2 escalation for Referral To Treatment performance. • The Trust had been placed in Tier 1 escalation due to the gap between its current Emergency Department performance and its performance plan for 2025/26. However, indicative data for August and September 2025 showed improved performance. • Work was ongoing to improve flow with task and finish groups established to review the discharge process and to implement rapid improvements. • The number of patients having no criteria to reside and those with a primary mental health need remained high. A workshop had been set up with Hampshire and Isle of Wight Healthcare NHS Foundation Trust in respect of mental health patients. • Steps were being undertaken to reduce the number of inappropriate attendances in the Emergency Department with patients potentially redirected to other areas. However, an Urgent Treatment Centre would be key to alleviating pressure on the Emergency Department in the longer term. The Board discussed the Trust’s performance against national standards. This discussion is summarised below: • Performance against the 62-day standard for cancer waiting times was an area of focus to ensure more consistent performance. • Work was ongoing to extend shared decision-making in order to involve patients in decisions about their care and treatment, noting however that this was more of a challenge with inpatients. • There was a challenge in terms of managing the demand for patients requiring diagnostic services. It was noted that there had been issues with availability of equipment over the summer period. It was acknowledged that diagnostics performance also impacted other areas such as cancer and Emergency Department metrics. • The percentage of over 65s attending the Emergency Department was expected to be a key metric to monitor over the winter period. Actions Andy Hyett agreed to look at the roll out of Pharmacy First. Andy Hyett agreed to carry out a deep-dive into Diagnostics to be either provided as a ‘Spotlight’ in the Performance KPI Report or via a Trust Board Study Session. Page 4 5.6 UHS Operating Plan 2025-26 and Board Assurance Statement Andy Hyett was invited to present the Operating Plan 2025-26 and Board Assurance Statement, the content of which was noted. It was further noted that: • The Operating Plan provided a summary of plans from October 2025 to September 2026, sitting alongside other key policies such as those relating to infection prevention control, major incidents, and influenza. • The Operating Plan would also serve as the Trust’s winter plan, which was recognised as a period of increased pressure. The Board discussed the proposed Operating Plan for 2025/26, this discussion is summarised below: • It was considered likely that, even with delivery of the demand management schemes being led by the Integrated Care Board (ICB), there would be a gap between demand and capacity over the winter period in particular. Therefore, further interventions to improve discharge rates and to reduce the number of patients having no criteria to reside would be necessary. In addition, the Trust would be required to make potentially difficult decisions in respect of prioritisation of patients and possible cancellation of elective procedures. • Concerns were expressed in relation to the trend of low uptakes of seasonal vaccinations, such as that against influenza, which had been seen since the COVID-19 pandemic. This situation would likely create further challenges due to patients with seasonal illnesses requiring additional infection prevention control measures. Furthermore, low uptake by staff members would likely result in increased rates of staff sickness and, accordingly, reduced capacity and/or increased expenditure on temporary staffing. • It was understood that there was a NHS campaign to encourage staff in particular to be vaccinated against influenza, and that plans were in place for senior leaders to visibly support this campaign through being vaccinated. • The Board challenged whether the Trust could meet the targets set out in the Operating Plan given the financial and other pressures currently experienced. • It was additionally noted that the Trust was reliant on external support and delivery of external demand management programmes led by the ICB in order to be able to meet the performance targets, especially in terms of management of the number of patients having no criteria to reside and those with a primary mental health need. • Furthermore, the Trust’s financial position was such that it was required to produce a financial recovery plan, which would require additional financial savings to be made. • It was agreed that the Board should fully consider whether to approve the Operating Plan once it had considered the Trust’s financial recovery plan in the Closed Session of the meeting. [Note: the matters below forming part of item 5.6 were discussed following the approval of the Trust’s financial recovery plan in the Closed Session.] Noting that the Board had discussed and supported the Trust’s financial recovery plan, subject to certain caveats, the Board again discussed the proposed Operating Plan for 2025/26. This discussion is summarised below: • The Trust’s financial recovery plan would need to be supported by NHS England and would also need to deliver in order for the Trust to be able to meet the performance targets set out in the Operating Plan. • The Trust continued to have significant dependence on third parties, especially other providers, the Integrated Care Board, and local authorities, to be able to successfully reduce the number of patients having no criteria to Page 5 reside or number of mental health patients. Without these reductions, the Trust would face significant capacity constraints, which would impact its performance, especially during periods of high demand. Decision Noting the discussions in the Closed Session in respect of the financial recovery plan, and having reviewed the proposed Operating Plan 2025-26 and accompanying Board Assurance Statement, the Board approved the Operating Plan 2025-26 and its submission, subject to the following: • delivery of system-wide programmes to manage demand and reduce numbers of non-criteria to reside and mental health patients, • appropriate support being provided by third parties, including local providers, the Integrated Care Board, and local authorities, especially in terms of supporting discharges and managing numbers of non-criteria to reside and mental health patients, and • support from NHS England for and delivery of the Trust’s financial recovery plan. In addition, the Board authorised the Chair and Chief Executive Officer to sign the Board Assurance Statement. 5.7 Break 5.8 Finance Report for Month 4 Ian Howard was invited to present the Finance Report for Month 4, the content of which was noted. It was further noted that: • The Trust had reported an in-month deficit of £6.8m (£4.8m above plan), although the underlying deficit was showing improvement, reducing to £6.6m. However, this trajectory was not sufficient to deliver the plan. • The Trust was carrying out approximately £2.5m of unfunded activity per month. In order to tackle some of this amount, the Trust had conducted negotiations with other providers and systems to address underfunding on contracts. • There were concerns about whether the Trust’s elective over-performance during the first half of the year would be fully funded. Whilst agreement had been reached in respect of funding three months of over-performance, it was not clear whether this would be replicated in the future. • The Trust would be seeking an activity management plan, which would detail which activities to cease to perform on the basis that the Trust continuing to over-perform against agreed funded activity levels was financially unsustainable and that it was not reasonable that the Trust should be criticised for falling performance in areas such as waiting lists as it sought to manage its finances. • The Trust’s cash position remained an area of concern with cash support to be requested from NHS England. • There appeared to be an emerging risk of slippage against the Trust’s capital programme, which was to be discussed at the Finance and Investment Committee. 5.9 ICS Operational Delivery Report for Month 4 Ian Howard was invited to present the ICS Operational Delivery Report for Month 4, the content of which was noted. It was further noted that: • The Trust was the only organisation within the system currently reporting being off plan. However, there were indicators from other providers with Page 6 significant risks being highlighted about organisations’ abilities to meet their 2025/26 plans. • There was an error in the report in respect of the Trust’s workforce numbers. A correction to the report had been requested. • The Hampshire and Isle of Wight ICS plan was for a breakeven position at the end of 2025/26. However, this was reliant on receipt of £60m of deficit support funding from NHS England, which was at risk because the Trust was no longer reporting being on plan. 5.10 People Report for Month 4 It was noted that two questions had been received from members of the public prior to the meeting (see Annex A), both of which related to the decision to remove the enhancement from NHS Professionals rates paid to staff in certain areas of the Trust such as in Theatres and in the Emergency Department. It was further noted that: • A discussion had also been held with staff prior to the Board meeting, at which a number of other questions had been raised. In particular, staff had expressed concerns about their feeling valued by the organisation. • The reasoning behind the decision to remove the enhancement previously paid on temporary staffing rates was explained as being to provide consistency with other staffing groups and with other providers by aligning rates paid with Agenda for Change rates. This change was part of a package of measures to improve the financial position of the Trust. • The decision to remove the enhancement was supported by an Equality and Quality Impact Assessment as part of the Trust’s process for making decisions of this nature. [Post meeting note: Following the meeting, the Royal College of Nursing, on behalf of its members in the affected areas, submitted a collective dispute. The questions raised in advance of the meeting, together with other related points, were to be addressed as part of the collective dispute process.] Steve Harris was invited to present the People Report for Month 4, the content of which was noted. It was further noted that: • The Trust’s plan for 2025/26 was for a reduction in whole-time-equivalents (WTE) by 765. Whilst the Trust had reduced the size of its workforce, it was still 55 WTE off-plan. • The Trust had reduced the number of divisions from four to three and had implemented recruitment controls whereby only 70% of clinical posts would be recruited to and a prohibition on recruitment to non-clinical posts. • The Trust had also carried out a Mutually Agreed Resignation Scheme (MARS) and had made some redundancies in discrete areas. It was noted, however, that there was a lack of funding for severance payments, which limited the Trust’s options with respect to steps it could take to reduce its workforce. • Temporary staffing was a particular area of focus, both in terms of numbers of temporary staff but also in terms of the cost paid for such staff. This aligned with the work of the South East temporary staffing collaborative which aimed to reduce the price of temporary labour in both bank and agency. Page 7 • Despite its challenges during 2025/26, the Trust had proactively offered roles to newly-qualified nurses ahead of the Secretary of State’s announcement of a ‘graduate guarantee’ on the basis that, from a strategic perspective, the Trust needed to take into account its future workforce requirements. Action Steve Harris and Andy Hyett agreed to respond to the questions and points raised at the meeting held with staff in respect of the NHS Professionals rates matter. 5.11 Learning from Deaths 2025-26 Quarter 1 Report Jenny Milner was invited to present the Learning from Deaths 2025/26 Quarter 1 Report, the content of which was noted. It was further noted that: • The Trust’s summary hospital-level mortality indicator (SHMI) score continued its downward trajectory and was the lowest value recorded since 2018. As such, the Trust was one of only 11 trusts nationally to achieve a lower-thanexpected mortality rate. • Work was ongoing to disseminate lessons from end-of-life care and an additional module for the Ulysses system had been purchased to facilitate data capture and standardisation for Morbidity and Mortality meetings. Action Jenny Milner was to provide further information to the Board in respect of why the Trust’s SHMI score remained low. 5.12 Annual Complaints Report 2024-25 Jenny Milner was invited to present the Annual Complaints Report 2024/25, the content of which was noted. It was further noted that: • The report provided details of complaints received between 1 April 2024 and 31 March 2025 and was the first full year of reporting against the new standard introduced by the Parliamentary and Health Service Ombudsman (PHSO). • Complaints activity had increased by 40% and the Trust was not currently meeting response targets. • The Trust benchmarked higher than others in terms of complaints not upheld. The Board discussed the Trust’s approach to complaints handling and, in particular, whether the Trust was an outlier in terms of the number of complaints not upheld. The Board challenged whether complaints deemed as ‘not upheld’ ought, in some instances, to be considered ‘partially upheld’. Consideration should therefore be given to reviewing the Trust’s complaints against PHSO referrals and outcomes. Action Jenny Milner was to provide further information regarding how the Trust was planning to meet complaints response times. Page 8 5.13 Medical Appraisal and Revalidation Annual Report including Board Statement of Compliance Paul Grundy was invited to present the Medical Appraisal and Revalidation Annual Report, the content of which was noted. It was further noted that: • The framework published by NHS England was designed to allow the Trust to provide assurance that its professional standards processes meet the relevant statutory requirements and support quality improvement. • Feedback in respect of the appraisals process had been largely positive. • Appraisal compliance rates had continued to rise across the year with a current average of 88.8%. • The Board was required to approve a Statement of Compliance confirming that the Trust was compliant with the Medical Profession (Responsible Officers) Regulations 2010 (as amended). Decision Having considered the Medical Appraisal and Revalidation Annual Report tabled to the meeting, the Board authorised the Chair or Chief Executive Officer to sign the Statement of Compliance. 5.14 Safeguarding Annual Report 2024-25 and Strategy 2025-26 Danielle Honey was invited to present the Safeguarding Annual Report 2024/25 and Strategy for 2025/26, the content of which was noted. It was further noted that: • The report summarised the activity of the Trust’s safeguarding service in 2024/25. It was noted that the service had contributed to reviews of 56 patients where a statutory review had been considered. • The number of referrals under section 42 of the Care Act 2014 caused by Southampton City Council had reduced following the implementation of the council’s new processes. This was not reflective of a reduction in the number of UHS referrals or the complexity of the referrals responded to. • There had been an increase in the number of open cases with Southampton City Council and there had been a 13% increase in the number of patients subject to Deprivation of Liberty Safeguards (DoLS) under the Mental Capacity Act 2005. • There had also been an increase in the number of scoping reviews compared to prior years, although fewer were progressing to formal reviews. • Following a survey of staff, work was underway to improve the visibility of the team and there was a focus on team wellbeing with support from the psychology team. • The situation in respect of expected changes in the role of integrated care boards was being monitored due to the potential for changes in the team’s scope and remit. Page 9 6. STRATEGY and BUSINESS PLANNING 6.1 Board Assurance Framework (BAF) Update Lauren Anderson was invited to present the Board Assurance Framework update, the content of which was noted. It was further noted that: • All risks had been reviewed by the relevant executive directors since July 2025. • The revised risk appetites agreed by the Board in July 2025 were being embedded. • The rating of Risk 5a had increased from 20 to 25 due to the lack of agreement for cash support. However, once this agreement had been obtained and the Financial Recovery Plan was in place, it was expected that this risk would again reduce to 20. • An audit of the Trust’s risk management maturity by the Trust’s internal auditors was near to completion. 7. CORPORATE GOVERNANCE, RISK and INTERNAL CONTROL 7.1 Feedback from the Council of Governors’ (COG) Meeting 16 July 2025 The Chair presented a summary of the Council of Governors’ meeting held on 16 July 2025. It was noted that the meeting had considered the following matters: • Chief Executive Officer’s Performance Report • The Trust’s 2025/26 Operating Plan • Council of Governors’ Terms of Reference • Membership Engagement • Feedback from the Governors’ Nomination Committee Furthermore, the Council of Governors approved the extension of the appointment of Tim Peachey as a non-executive director for a period of 12 months. 7.2 People and Organisational Development Committee Terms of Reference Craig Machell was invited to present the proposed changes to the People and Organisational Development Committee’s Terms of Reference, the content of which was noted. It was further noted that: • The People and Organisational Development Committee had reviewed its terms of reference at its meeting on 1 September 2025. • It was proposed to make only minor changes to remove reference to the Charitable Funds Committee, which no longer existed. Decision Having considered the proposed amendments to the People and Organisational Development Committee’s Terms of Reference, the Board approved the changes. Page 10 8. Any other business It was noted that it was organ donation week during 22-28 September 2025. Action Craig Machell agreed to add organ donation to the agenda of a future Trust Board Study Session. 9. Note the date of the next meeting: 11 November 2025 10. Items circulated to the Board for reading The item circulated to the Board for reading was noted. There being no further business, the meeting concluded. 11. Resolution regarding the Press, Public and Others Decision: The Board resolved that, as permitted by the National Health Service Act 2006 (as amended), the Trust’s Constitution and the Standing Orders of the board of directors, that representatives of the press, members of the public and others not invited to attend to the next part of the meeting be excluded due to the confidential nature of the business to be transacted. The meeting was adjourned. Page 11 Annex A Questions: 1. The Board has agreed a cut in bank pay rates for nursing staff, resulting in local staff being unlikely to maintain their bank roles in this organisation, (based on a survey of over 450 nurses within the affected areas). Currently these roles provide staffing in areas such as theatres and other specialised areas, the impact being these departments can use local skills and knowledge to provide seamless operational delivery. How can the board provide assurance that, a) this will not impact on safety for patients, and b) they truly value nurses for the professional skills they provide for this Trust. 2. Our Emergency Department has recently been placed under Tier 1 monitoring by NHS England, reflecting serious national concerns about safety and performance. The department is already regularly understaffed, with patient care frequently delayed as a result. In light of this, how can the Trust justify reducing NHSP pay rates for Emergency Department nurses — a decision that risks deterring skilled staff from covering shifts and further compromising patient safety and the delivery of safe, timely care? What specific steps will the Trust take to mitigate these risks to patients and staff if the changes go ahead? Page 12 List of action items Agenda item Assigned to Deadline Status Trust Board – Open Session 15/07/2025 - 5.11 Freedom to Speak Up Report 1267. Data Mbabazi, Christine Watts, Natasha 13/01/2026 Pending Explanation action item Christine Mbabazi to include data from other mechanisms for reporting concerns in future Freedom to Speak Up reports. Trust Board – Open Session 09/09/2025 - 5.5 Performance KPI Report for Month 4 1281. Pharmacy First Hyett, Andy 11/11/2025 Pending Explanation action item Andy Hyett agreed to look at the roll out of Pharmacy First. 1282. Diagnostics Hyett, Andy 11/11/2025 Pending Explanation action item Andy Hyett agreed to carry out a deep-dive into Diagnostics to be either provided as a ‘Spotlight’ in the Performance KPI Report or via a Trust Board Study Session. Trust Board – Open Session 09/09/2025 - 5.10 People Report for Month 4 1283. NHS Professionals rates Harris, Steve Hyett, Andy 11/11/2025 Pending Explanation action item Steve Harris and Andy Hyett agreed to respond to the questions and points raised at the meeting held with staff in respect of the NHS Professionals rates matter. Page 1 of 2 Agenda item Assigned to Deadline Status Trust Board – Open Session 09/09/2025 - 5.11 Learning from Deaths 2025-26 Quarter 1 Report 1284. SHMI score Milner, Jenny Watts, Natasha 11/11/2025 Pending Explanation action item Jenny Milner was to provide further information to the Board in respect of why the Trust’s SHMI score remained low. Trust Board – Open Session 09/09/2025 - 5.12 Annual Complaints Report 2024-25 1285. Response times Milner, Jenny Watts, Natasha 11/11/2025 Pending Explanation action item Jenny Milner was to provide further information regarding how the Trust was planning to meet complaints response times. Trust Board – Open Session 09/09/2025 - 8 Any other business 1286. Organ donation Machell, Craig 18/12/2025 Pending Explanation action item Craig Machell agreed to add organ donation to the agenda of a future Trust Board Study Session. Update: To be scheduled 18/12/25 or 03/02/26. Page 2 of 2 Agenda Item 5.1 Committee Chair’s Report to the Trust Board of Directors 11 November 2025 Committee: Audit & Risk Committee Meeting Date: 13 October 2025 Key Messages: • • • • • • • • • The committee reviewed and discussed the outputs of a ‘lessons learned’ activity following the late publication of the Trust’s annual report and accounts. It was noted that a number of actions had been agreed and that a trial run would be conducted at Month 9. The committee noted the proposal to tender for new valuers for 2025/26 and the review of the Modern Equivalent Asset estimation methodology that would be carried out during the year. The committee agreed with a proposal to write off historical debt from private (mostly overseas) patients on the basis that it was irrecoverable. There had been 68 waivers of competitive tendering during the first half of 2025/26, most of which related to continued service provision. It was noted that the submission as part of the National Cost Collection exercise had been completed in July 2025 and that the Trust was 7% more efficient than the average based on the data. An update was received in respect of Information Governance. The Trust’s Data Security and Protection Toolkit was now rated as ‘approaching standards’ and progress had been made in respect of the backlog in subject access requests. The committee received an update in respect of legal expenditure and claims during 2024/25. The committee reviewed the internal audit reports on the Data Security and Protection Toolkit, CQC Readiness, and risk maturity. The committee received an update on the progress of the Trust’s local counter-fraud team against the plan for 2025/26, noting that imposter fraud was an area of focus. Assurance: (Reports/Papers reviewed by the Committee also appearing on the Board agenda) 6.2 Board Assurance Framework (BAF) Update Assurance Rating: Risk Rating: Substantial N/A • The committee had last reviewed the BAF in March 2025, and there had been a definite increase in the level of risk with the ratings of four of the risks having increased since then. • Approximately 25% of the risks on the Trust’s operational risk register were rated ‘critical’ (i.e. 15 or above). • The internal audit of risk management had been positive and the Trust’s risk management framework was considered as being mature. Any Other N/A Matters: Page 1 of 2 Assurance Rating: Substantial There is a robust series of suitably designed internal controls in place upon Assurance which the organisation relies to manage the risk of failure of the continuous and effective achievement of the objectives of the process, which at the time of our review were being consistently applied. Reasonable There is a series of controls in place, however there are potential risks that Assurance may not be sufficient to ensure that the individual objectives of the process are achieved in a continuous and effective manner. Improvements are required to enhance the adequacy and effectiveness of the controls to mitigate these risks. Limited Assurance Controls in place are not sufficient to ensure that the organisation can rely upon them to manage the risks to the continuous and effective achievement of the objectives of the process. Significant improvements are required to improve the adequacy and effectiveness of the controls. No Assurance There is a fundamental breakdown or absence of core internal controls such that the organisation cannot rely upon them to manage the risks to the continuous and effective achievement of the objectives of the process. Immediate action is required to improve the adequacy and effectiveness of controls. Not Applicable Where assurance is not required and/or relevant. Risk Rating: Low Medium High Not Applicable Based on the report considered by the committee, there is little or no concern that the Trust will be unable to meet its stated objectives and/or plans. There is some concern that the Trust might not be able to fully meet its stated objectives and/or plans based on the information contained in the report considered by the committee. There is a significant risk that the Trust will not be able to meet its stated objectives and/or plans based on the information contained in the report considered by the committee. Where risk rating is not relevant. Page 2 of 2 Agenda Item 5.2 i) Committee Chair’s Report to the Trust Board of Directors 11 November 2025 Committee: Finance and Investment Committee Meeting Date: 22 September 2025 Key Messages: • • • • • • • • • The committee reviewed the Finance Report for Month 5. The Trust had reported an in-month deficit of £5.9m and £25.4m deficit year-todate. The in-month deficit was £4.2m above the original plan, but was in line with the trajectory in the Financial Recovery Plan. The Trust’s underlying deficit had continued to improve, reducing to £6.2m, although this improvement was not yet at the pace required. The main drivers of the variance to plan were variances in income compared with what had been expected during 2025/26 and variances in terms of pay costs. The Trust was expecting to be 95 whole-timeequivalents above plan at year end based on current assumptions. It was noted that the Trust had identified 100% of Cost Improvement Programme savings at Month 5 and 76% of schemes were fully developed. Approximately £37m of savings had been delivered between Months 1 and 5, although higher than anticipated levels of non-recurrent savings had been delivered. The committee reviewed the Trust’s capital forecast, noting that there was a risk of a shortfall against the Trust’s internal CDEL. An update was received regarding the Urgent and Emergency Care transformation programme. The committee received the annual assurance report from UHS Pharmacy Limited, noting the company’s performance during the year and the work being done to expand services internally and externally. The committee considered the Trust’s cash forecast for Month 5, noting that the Trust’s underlying deficit was steadily eroding the Trust’s cash balance. The Trust had introduced strict treasury management measures and had previously received advance payments from the ICB as a means to mitigate the cash position. However, it had been necessary to submit a request for revenue support from NHS England in September 2025 and further such applications would be required from November 2025 onwards. In order to increase the focus on and governance of cash-related matters, the committee reviewed its terms of reference to strengthen the cash-related provisions and agreed to recommend to the Board that the committee be re-constituted as the Finance, Investment and Cash Committee with an Operating Cash Group reporting into the committee. Assurance: (Reports/Papers reviewed by the Committee also appearing on the Board agenda) N/A Any Other Matters: The revised terms of reference for the committee were reviewed and approved at the Board meeting held on 7 October 2025. Page 1 of 2 Assurance Rating: Substantial There is a robust series of suitably designed internal controls in place upon Assurance which the organisation relies to manage the risk of failure of the continuous and effective achievement of the objectives of the process, which at the time of our review were being consistently applied. Reasonable There is a series of controls in place, however there are potential risks that Assurance may not be sufficient to ensure that the individual objectives of the process are achieved in a continuous and effective manner. Improvements are required to enhance the adequacy and effectiveness of the controls to mitigate these risks. Limited Assurance Controls in place are not sufficient to ensure that the organisation can rely upon them to manage the risks to the continuous and effective achievement of the objectives of the process. Significant improvements are required to improve the adequacy and effectiveness of the controls. No Assurance There is a fundamental breakdown or absence of core internal controls such that the organisation cannot rely upon them to manage the risks to the continuous and effective achievement of the objectives of the process. Immediate action is required to improve the adequacy and effectiveness of controls. Not Applicable Where assurance is not required and/or relevant. Risk Rating: Low Medium High Not Applicable Based on the report considered by the committee, there is little or no concern that the Trust will be unable to meet its stated objectives and/or plans. There is some concern that the Trust might not be able to fully meet its stated objectives and/or plans based on the information contained in the report considered by the committee. There is a significant risk that the Trust will not be able to meet its stated objectives and/or plans based on the information contained in the report considered by the committee. Where risk rating is not relevant. Page 2 of 2 Agenda Item 5.2 ii) Committee Chair’s Report to the Trust Board of Directors 11 November 2025 Committee: Finance, Investment and Cash Committee Meeting Date: 3 November 2025 Key Messages: • • • • • • • • The committee reviewed the Finance Report for Month 6 (see below). The committee received an update in respect of the Trust’s performance against its Financial Recovery Plan, noting that progress had been made in terms of putting plans in place regarding patients with no criteria to reside and mental health patients. Good progress had also been made in respect of the ‘grip and control’ measures. At Month 6, the Trust remained on track with the Financial Recovery Plan. An overview of the recently published Medium Term Planning framework was provided. It was noted that the first submission of the Trust’s three-year plan was due before
Url: /Media/UHS-website-2019/Docs/About-the-Trust/Trust-governance-and-corporate-docs/2025-Trust-documents/Papers-Trust-Board-11-November-2025.pdf

Papers Trust Board - 11 March 2025

Description: Date Time Location Chair Agenda Trust Board – Open Session 11/03/2025 9:00 - 13:00 Conference Room, Heartbeat Education Centre Jenni Douglas-Todd 1 Chair’s Welcome, Apologies and Declarations of Interest 9:00 Note apologies for absence, and to hear any declarations of interest relating to any item on the Agenda. 2 Patient Story The patient story provides an opportunity for the Board to reflect on the experiences of patients and staff within the Trust and understand what the Trust could do better. 3 Minutes of Previous Meeting held on 7 January 2025 9:15 Approve the minutes of the previous meeting held on 7 January 2025 4 Matters Arising and Summary of Agreed Actions To discuss any matters arising from the minutes, and to agree on the status of any actions assigned at the previous meeting. 5 QUALITY, PERFORMANCE and FINANCE Quality includes: clinical effectiveness, patient safety, and patient experience 5.1 Briefing from the Chair of the Audit and Risk Committee 9:20 Keith Evans, Chair 5.2 Briefing from the Chair of the Finance and Investment Committee 9:25 Dave Bennett, Chair 5.3 Briefing from the Chair of the People and Organisational Development 9:30 Committee Jane Harwood, Chair 5.4 Briefing from the Chair of the Quality Committee 9:35 Tim Peachey, Chair 5.5 Chief Executive Officer's Report 9:40 Receive and note the report Sponsor: David French, Chief Executive Officer 5.6 Performance KPI Report for Month 10 10:10 Review and discuss the report Sponsor: David French, Chief Executive Officer 5.7 Break 10:45 5.8 Finance Report for Month 10 11:00 Review and discuss the report Sponsor: Ian Howard, Chief Financial Officer 5.9 ICS Finance Report for Month 10 11:15 Receive and discuss the report Sponsor: Ian Howard, Chief Financial Officer 5.10 People Report for Month 10 11:20 Review and discuss the report Sponsor: Steve Harris, Chief People Officer 5.11 Mortuary Standards Compliance Update (Oral) 11:35 Sponsor: Gail Byrne, Chief Nursing Officer 6 STRATEGY and BUSINESS PLANNING 6.1 Corporate Objectives 2024-25 Quarter 3 Review 11:40 Review and feedback on the corporate objectives Sponsor: David French, Chief Executive Officer Attendees: Martin De Sousa, Director of Strategy and Partnerships/Kelly Kent, Head of Strategy and Partnerships 6.2 Board Assurance Framework (BAF) Update 11:50 Review and discuss the update Sponsor: Gail Byrne, Chief Nursing Officer Attendees: Craig Machell, Associate Director of Corporate Affairs and Company Secretary/Lauren Anderson, Corporate Governance and Risk Manager 7 CORPORATE GOVERNANCE, RISK and INTERNAL CONTROL 7.1 Feedback from the Council of Governors' (CoG) meeting 29 January 2025 12:00 (Oral) Sponsor: Jenni Douglas-Todd, Trust Chair 7.2 Register of Seals and Chair's Actions Report 12:05 Receive and ratify In compliance with the Trust Standing Orders, Financial Instructions, and the Scheme of Reservation and Delegation. Sponsor: Jenni Douglas-Todd, Trust Chair Page 2 7.3 Audit and Risk Committee Terms of Reference 12:10 Review and approve the Terms of Reference Sponsor: Ian Howard, Chief Financial Officer Attendee: Craig Machell, Associate Director of Corporate Affairs and Company Secretary 7.4 Finance and Investment Committee Terms of Reference 12:15 Review and approve the Terms of Reference Sponsor: Dave Bennett, Committee Chair Attendee: Craig Machell, Associate Director of Corporate Affairs and Company Secretary 7.5 Quality Committee Terms of Reference 12:20 Review and approve the Terms of Reference Sponsors: Tim Peachey, Committee Chair Attendee: Craig Machell, Associate Director of Corporate Affairs and Company Secretary 7.6 Remuneration and Appointment Committee Terms of Reference 12:25 Review and approve the Terms of Reference Sponsor: Jenni Douglas-Todd, Trust Chair Attendee: Craig Machell, Associate Director of Corporate Affairs and Company Secretary 7.7 Trust Executive Committee Terms of Reference 12:30 Approve the proposed amendments to the Terms of Reference Sponsor: David French, Chief Executive Officer Attendee: Craig Machell, Associate Director of Corporate Affairs and Company Secretary 8 Any other business 12:35 Raise any relevant or urgent matters that are not on the agenda 9 Note the date of the next meeting: 13 May 2025 10 Items circulated to the Board for reading 29 January 2025 Message from Ian Howard re Update on legal dispute with BAM 10.1 South Central Regional Research Delivery Network (SC RRDN) 2024-25 Q3 Performance Report Note the report Sponsor: Paul Grundy, Chief Medical Officer Page 3 11 Resolution regarding the Press, Public and Others Sponsor: Jenni Douglas-Todd, Trust Chair To agree, as permitted by the National Health Service Act 2006 (as amended), the Trust's Constitution and the Standing Orders of the Board of Directors, that representatives of the press, members of the public and others not invited to attend to the next part of the meeting be excluded due to the confidential nature of the business to be transacted. 12 Follow-up discussion with governors 12:45 Page 4 Agenda links to the Board Assurance Framework (BAF) 11 March 2025 – Open Session Overview of the BAF Risk 1a: Lack of capacity to appropriately respond to emergency demand, manage the increasing waiting lists for elective demand, and provide timely diagnostics, that results in avoidable harm to patients. 1b: Due to the current challenges, we fail to provide patients and their families / carers with a high-quality experience of care and positive patient outcomes. 1c: We do not effectively plan for and implement infection prevention and control measures that reduce the number of hospital-acquired infections and limit the number of nosocomial outbreaks of infection. 2a: We do not take full advantage of our position as a leading University teaching hospital with a growing, reputable, and innovative research and development portfolio, attracting the best staff and efficiently delivering the best possible treatments and care for our patients. 3a: We are unable to meet current and planned service requirements due to the unavailability of staff to fulfil key roles. 3b: We fail to develop a diverse, compassionate, and inclusive workforce, providing a more positive staff experience for all staff. 3c: We fail to create a sustainable and innovative education and development response to meet the current and future workforce needs identified in the Trust’s longer-term workforce plan. 4a: We do not implement effective models to deliver integrated and networked care, resulting in sub-optimal patient experience and outcomes, increased numbers of admissions and increases in patients’ length of stay. 5a: We are unable to deliver a financial breakeven position, resulting in: inability to move out of the NHS England Recovery Support Programme, NHS England imposing additional controls/undertakings, and a reducing cash balance impacting the Trust’s ability to invest in line with its capital plan, estates/digital strategies, and in transformation initiatives. 5b: We do not adequately maintain, improve and develop our estate to deliver our clinical services and increase capacity. 5c: Our digital technology or infrastructure fails to the extent that it impacts our ability to deliver care effectively and safely within the organisation, 5d: We fail to prioritise green initiatives to deliver a trajectory that will reduce our direct and indirect carbon footprint by 80% by 2028-2032 (compared with a 1990 baseline) and reach net zero direct carbon emissions by 2040 and net zero indirect carbon emissions by 2045. Agenda links to the BAF No Item Linked BAF risk(s) 5.6 Performance KPI Report for Month 10 5.8 Finance Report for Month 10 5.9 ICS Finance Report for Month 10 5.10 People Report for Month 10 5.11 Mortuary Standards Compliance Update 5.11 Corporate Objectives 2024-5 Quarter 3 Review 1a, 1b, 1c 5a 5a 3a, 3b, 3c 1b All Appetite (Category) Minimal (Safety) Current risk rating 4x5 20 Cautious (Experience) Minimal (Safety) 3x3 9 4x4 16 Open (Technology & Innovation) 3x3 9 Open (workforce) Open (workforce) Open (workforce) 4x5 20 4x3 12 4x4 16 Cautious (Effectiveness) 3x3 9 Cautious (Finance) 4x5 20 Target risk rating 4 x 2 Apr 6 27 3 x 2 Mar 6 26 2 x 3 Apr 6 27 3 x 2 Dec 6 25 4 x 3 Mar 12 26 4 x 2 Mar 8 27 3 x 2 Mar 6 29 3 x 2 Dec 6 25 3 x 3 Apr 9 30 Cautious (Effectiveness) Open (Technology & Innovation) Open (Technology & Innovation) 4x5 20 3x4 12 2x3 6 4 x 2 Apr 8 30 3 x 2 Apr 6 27 2 x 2 Dec 4 27 Does this item facilitate movement towards or away from the intended target risk score and appetite? Towards Away Neither x x x x x x Minutes Trust Board – Open Session Date Time 07/01/2025 9:00 – 13:00 Location Chair Conference Room, Heartbeat/Microsoft Teams Jenni Douglas-Todd (JD-T) Present Dave Bennett, NED (DB) Gail Byrne, Chief Nursing Officer (GB) Jenni Douglas-Todd, Chair (JD-T) Diana Eccles, NED (DE) Keith Evans, Deputy Chair and NED (KE) David French, Chief Executive Officer (DAF) Paul Grundy, Chief Medical Officer (PG) Steve Harris, Chief People Officer (SH) Jane Harwood, NED/Senior Independent Director (JH) Ian Howard, Chief Financial Officer (IH) David Liverseidge, NED (DL) Tim Peachey, NED (TP) Joe Teape, Chief Operating Officer (JT) Alison Tattersall, NED (AT) In attendance Martin De Sousa, Director of Strategy and Partnerships (MDeS) Craig Machell, Associate Director of Corporate Affairs and Company Secretary (CM) James Allen, Chief Pharmacist (JA) (item 5.14) Lauren Anderson, Corporate Governance and Risk Manager (LA) (item 6.1) Julie Brooks, Deputy Director of Infection Prevention & Control (JB) (item 5.13) Rosemary Chable, Head of Nursing for Education, Practice and Staffing (RC) (item 5.15) Diana Hulbert, Guardian of Safe Working Hours and Emergency Department Consultant (DH) (item 5.11) Christine Mbabazi, Equality & Inclusion Adviser/Freedom to Speak Up Guardian (CMb) (item 5.10) John Mcgonigle, Emergency Planning & Resilience Manager (JMc) (item 7.1) Jenny Milner, Associate Director of Patient Experience (JM) (item 5.12) Danielle Sinclair, Deputy Emergency Planner (DS) (item 7.1) Julian Sutton, Lead Infection Control Director (JS) (item 5.13) Fatemeh Jenabi, Specialty Registrar (FJ) (shadowing JT) 1 member of the public (item 2) 6 governors (observing) 4 members of staff (observing) 1. Chair’s Welcome, Apologies and Declarations of Interest The Chair welcomed attendees to the meeting. There were no interests to declare in the business to be transacted at the meeting. The Board welcomed David Liverseidge, who had been appointed as an independent non-executive director with effect from 1 January 2025. Page 1 It was noted that Joe Teape had accepted an appointment as chief executive officer of Torbay and South Devon NHS Foundation Trust, and, accordingly Joe Teape would be leaving the Trust in February 2025. It was further noted that Jenni Douglas-Todd had been appointed as chair of the partnership between Portsmouth Hospitals University NHS Trust and Isle of Wight NHS Trust, commencing on 1 April 2025. 2. Patient Story Gillian Muir, one of the Trust’s ‘involved patients’, was invited to relate their experience of treatment for tongue and thyroid cancer in 2022. It was noted that: • Both the treatment received and staff were rated positively. However, the referral process was open to criticism. • In addition, it was considered that it would be beneficial to have a single point for information for patients as well as more information about self-help and on the patient journey. • The importance of the emotional aspect of treatment was noted as was the benefit of using patients to help other patients. Action Gail Byrne agreed to consider how the recommendations made in patient stories could be captured and action taken as a result. 3. Minutes of the Previous Meeting held on 5 November 2024 The draft minutes tabled to the meeting were agreed to be an accurate record of the meeting held on 5 November 2024. 4. Matters Arising and Summary of Agreed Actions It was noted that all actions were either closed or not yet due for completion. 5. QUALITY, PERFORMANCE and FINANCE 5.1 Briefing from the Chair of the Finance and Investment Committee The chair of the Finance and Investment Committee was invited to present the Committee Chair’s Reports in respect of the meetings held on 25 November and 16 December 2024, the content of which was noted. It was further noted that: • The Trust’s financial position remained challenging with additional cost pressures due to the pay awards and non-delivery of system-wide transformation programmes resulting in a year-to-date deficit of £18.2m. • There was a shortfall of £17m in respect of delivery of the Trust’s Cost Improvement Programme (CIP), largely due to non-delivery of system transformation programmes. • The Trust benchmarked well against comparator organisations in terms of its value-for-money and elective recovery delivery. • As at the end of November 2024, the Trust had carried out £21m in unfunded activity. • The Trust’s cash balance remained a concern, as it was being eroded by the Trust’s underlying monthly deficit and was expected to fall below the minimum required level in the first quarter of 2025/26. Page 2 5.2 Briefing from the Chair of the People and Organisational Development Committee The chair of the People and Organisational Development Committee was invited to present the Committee Chair’s Report in respect of the meeting held on 13 December 2024, the content of which was noted. It was further noted that: • As anticipated, the Trust’s workforce had grown slightly in November 2024. However, the main challenge to meeting the Trust’s 2024/25 plan remained the non-delivery of system-wide transformation programmes in mental health and non-criteria to reside, which the Trust had assumed would enable a reduction in its workforce by 218 whole-time-equivalents (WTE). • The committee received an update in respect of the ongoing industrial dispute with portering staff and in respect of the Band 2/3 pay dispute. • The committee reviewed the Board Assurance Framework and suggested that the rating of risk 3c should be increased to reflect the financial situation and uncertainty around the NHS long-term workforce plan (item 6.1). • Issues such as ongoing industrial disputes were impacting the Trust’s capacity to make progress on other areas such as organisational and cultural development and transformation. 5.3 Briefing from the Chair of the Quality Committee including Maternity and Neonatal Safety 2024-25 Quarter 2 Report The chair of the Quality Committee was invited to present the Committee Chair’s Report in respect of the meeting held on 25 November 2024, the content of which was noted. It was further noted that: • There had been seven ‘never events’ during 2024/25. • The committee had reviewed the Learning from Deaths 2024-25 Quarter 2 report (item 5.12), and it was noted that the risk rating attributable to this area in the Chair’s Report was aggregated. • The committee had reviewed the Infection Prevention and Control 2024-25 Quarter 2 report (item 5.13). • The committee had scrutinised the Maternity and Neonatal Safety 2024-25 Quarter 2 report in detail. 5.4 Chief Executive Officer’s Report David French was invited to present the Chief Executive Officer’s Report, the content of which was noted. It was further noted that: • There had been a water supply failure on 18 December 2024 due to a technical problem at a nearby water treatment works, which resulted in a loss of water for three days. Southern Water supplied the Trust with water via tankers during this period to ensure that soft (non-potable) water was available throughout the interruption. The Trust’s Estates team managed this incident well. • It had been a difficult start to 2025 with high Emergency Department attendance levels and ambulance volumes, exacerbated by the national prevalence of seasonal illnesses such as influenza, which impacted both patient and staff numbers. • In order to manage Emergency Department attendances as high as 450 patients per day, the Trust had been required to situate patients in other areas of the hospital, which placed additional logistical burdens on staff. • The high rates of attendance meant that the Trust was close to declaring a critical incident, noting that other local providers had already done so. • There were 263 patients having no criteria to reside awaiting discharge. Page 3 • The Government had made a number of announcements prior to Christmas in respect of possible reforms, including introduction of a league table for NHS providers. • In addition, the Government had announced its targets for the NHS, including a commitment that 92% of patients were seen within 18 weeks, which would likely pose a significant challenge, as currently only around 60% of patients were seen within this timeframe. There was also a possibility that a cap would be introduced on Elective Recovery Funding. • Based on discussions with NHS England, it was understood that the £22bn of additional funding announced in the Autumn Statement had already been allocated to address pay awards and other cost pressures, and accordingly 2025/26 would likely feel like a 1-2% decrease in terms of funding. The messaging from NHS England appeared to have also altered to one of providers doing what they could within the available funding envelope, rather than attempting to deliver against all targets whilst at the same time delivering a break-even financial position. • It was proposed to regulate NHS managers, and a consultation, closing on 18 February 2025, had been launched on 26 November 2024. It was agreed that any such regulation needed to be fair and equitable. • The Trust had opened a new state-of-the-art special care baby unit, designed to increase capacity and offer enhanced specialist care. 5.5 Performance KPI Report for Month 8 Joe Teape was invited to present the Performance KPI Report for Month 8, the content of which was noted. It was further noted that: • The Trust continued to perform well when compared to other equivalent organisations. • During November 2024, there had been an average of 450 patients per day attending the Emergency Department, and four-hour performance at Southampton General Hospital was 56.1%. • There had been improvements in cancer waiting times against the 28-day faster diagnosis and 31-day targets. • The Trust’s Referral To Treatment waiting list had reduced slightly, and the Trust’s performance against the 18-week target was top-quartile. • Between August and October 2024, the Trust’s performance against the six- week diagnostic standard was 87%, which although below the national target, was top-quartile. 5.6 Break 5.7 Finance Report for Month 8 Ian Howard was invited to present the Finance Report for Month 8, the content of which was noted. It was further noted that: • The Trust had reported a £5.7m in-month deficit (£18.2m year-to-date) and was £14.8m behind its 2024/25 plan. • The Trust had submitted its financial recovery plan to the Hampshire and Isle of Wight Integrated Care Board and was on track with this plan, with the exception of the pressures due to the pay award. • Based on the national month 7 productivity data, average national increased productivity was 1.7% whereas the Trust had recorded 4% during the same period. • The Trust’s cash position continued to deteriorate and there was a significant risk that additional cash support would be required in the fourth quarter. Page 4 • There was a risk that a cap would be applied to Elective Recovery funding in 2024/25 based on month 8 performance. 5.8 ICB Finance Report for Month 8 Ian Howard was invited to present the ICB Finance Report for Month 8, the content of which was noted. It was further noted that: • The Integrated Care System had reported a year-to-date deficit of £39.71m, compared to a planned year-to-date deficit of £10.23m. • £70m of cash support had been received and the ICS was forecasting achieving break-even at the end of the year. The Board discussed the ICB Finance Report for Month 8 and challenged the requests contained in the report in respect of the assurance to be given by Executive Directors regarding the system-wide transformation programmes. It was noted that whilst Executive Directors would be able to provide assurance regarding the Trust’s contribution, it would not be reasonable to expect them to provide assurance regarding matters outside their control. The Board additionally challenged the assertion that the Hampshire and Isle of Wight Integrated Care System would achieve break-even at the end of 2024/25, noting that there was no expectation that the system transformation programmes would deliver significant benefits in the final quarter. Actions Ian Howard agreed to coordinate a report to the Board in respect of the Trust’s contribution to the Hampshire and Isle of Wight Integrated Care System transformation programmes. The Chair and David French agreed to discuss the requests of the Board in the ICB Finance Reports with the Integrated Care Board’s chair. 5.9 People Report for Month 8 Steve Harris was invited to present the People Report for Month 8, the content of which was noted. It was further noted that: • The Trust was 77 whole-time-equivalents (WTE) above its 2024/25 plan and was projecting to be 186 WTE above plan at year end. The plan assumed a reduction of 218 WTE linked to improvements in mental health and patients having no criteria to reside through successful delivery of system-wide transformation programmes. These transformation programmes had yet to deliver any significant benefit. • An update was provided in respect of the industrial dispute with portering staff. It was noted that an ACAS-facilitated deal had been brokered and agreed with staff, although the mandate for strike action remained in force until May 2025. • An update was provided regarding the ongoing pay dispute relating to Band 2 and 3 staff. 5.10 Freedom to Speak Up Report The Freedom to Speak Up Report was tabled to the meeting, the content of which was noted. It was further noted that: • There had been 97 cases reported during 2024, most of which related to allegations of bullying or issues with team dynamics. Only one report related to a patient safety issue. Page 5 • It would be necessary to review responses to the staff survey regarding attitudes toward speaking up. • A ‘heatmap’ to triangulate safety, quality and wellbeing concerns was under consideration. The Board discussed the report and queried why staff felt unable to utilise line or senior management to resolve many of the issues reported via the Trust’s Freedom to Speak Up process. The importance of visibility on the part of the leadership team was noted. Actions Gail Byrne agreed to consider how Freedom to Speak Up can be used for its original purpose of raising concerns of safety. 5.11 Guardian of Safe Working Hours Quarterly Report Diana Hulbert was invited to present the Guardian of Safe Working Hours Quarterly Report, the content of which was noted. It was further noted that: • The vacancy rate for resident doctors was 9.16%, which was in line with previous years and low compared with peers. • There had been an average of 48 exception reports per month over the past 12 months. The most common reason had been due to working hours breaches and the majority had been in relation to F1 grades. • A lack of office space and lockers remained an issue. • The generation of a sense of belonging amongst resident doctors posed a challenge. • The session on resident doctors at the Trust Board Study Session in November 2024 was a welcome opportunity to speak to the Board about the lives of resident doctors. 5.12 Learning from Deaths 2024-25 Quarter 2 Report Jenny Milner was invited to present the Learning from Deaths 2024-25 Quarter 2 Report, the content of which was noted. It was further noted that: • The Trust’s relative mortality rate was lower than expected compared with national figures. The Trust was one of 12 other trusts (out of 119) in this position. • The Independent Medical Examiners Group had commenced work during the second quarter and was responsible for reviewing all deaths. • An electronic application was being developed to assist in disseminating the outputs from Mortality and Morbidity meetings. • There had been an increased number of reports of patients dying in bays rather than side-rooms, which correlated with complaints received. 5.13 Infection Prevention and Control 2024-25 Quarter 2 Report Julian Sutton and Julie Brooks were invited to present the Infection Prevention and Control 2024-25 Quarter 2 Report, the content of which was noted. It was further noted that: • In line with a more general national trend, the Trust was not expecting to meet its targets in respect of infection prevention and control. Page 6 • However, the Trust compared favourably with peers. • A hand-washing campaign had been carried out in October and November 2024. • Rates of clostridioides difficile were increasing both nationally and internationally. • The situation with regard to the candida auris outbreak appeared to be improving following the interventions made by the Trust. The screening arrangements would likely be required indefinitely and the maintaining of the fundamentals of care programme expectations was crucial to preventing future outbreaks. Action Gail Byrne agreed to include an item on infection prevention control at a future Trust Board Study Session to include details of an Australian study, point of care testing, and progress on the roll out of the Fundamentals of Care programme. 5.14 Annual Medicines Management 2023-24 Report James Allen was invited to present the Annual Medicines Management 2023-24 Report, the content of which was noted. It was further noted that: • During 2023/24, the Trust spent £219m on medicines, a four per cent increase compared to 2022/23. • Training continued successfully, although operational pressures had led to some challenges in this area. • The pharmacy team’s support to clinical trials had improved. • Improvements were required to the Trust’s estate to make it more suitable for the safe storage of medicines, especially given the increased volume and acuity of mental health in-patients and the resulting challenges in terms of security of patients’ medication. • The aseptic site at Adanac Park was expected to be ready in the coming months • Consideration was being given as to whether to stop prescribing over-thecounter medicines on discharge in order to accelerate the discharge process. 5.15 Annual Ward Staffing Nursing Establishment Review 2024 Gail Byrne was invited to present the Annual Ward Staffing Nursing Establishment Review 2024, the content of which was noted. It was further noted that: • It was a requirement from the National Quality Board that the Establishment Review be discussed by the Board in open session. • Out of the 37 recommendations which were made following the Francis inquiry in 2013, the Trust was compliant with 35. The areas of non-compliance related to the allocation of time for supervision time for statutory and mandatory training and in relation to equality, diversity and inclusion. Progress was being made in these areas, but further action was required to achieve full compliance. • The Trust was compliant with 37 out of 38 of the recommendations included in the NICE guideline on safe staffing for in-patient wards. An action plan was in place to address the single area of non-compliance. Page 7 • The Trust had conducted a robust six-monthly ward staffing review. Areas of challenge related to night shifts and the increasing number of patients with enhanced care needs. 6. STRATEGY and BUSINESS PLANNING 6.1 Board Assurance Framework (BAF) Update Lauren Anderson was invited to present the Board Assurance Framework Update, the content of which was noted. It was further noted that: • Five of the Trust’s risks were rated ‘critical’ and five were outside of appetite. • The rating of risk 5a had been increased from 15 to 20 due to the continuing financial pressures and the erosion of the Trust’s cash balance. • A new scoring matrix was being rolled out for the operational risk register and BAF risks. 7. CORPORATE GOVERNANCE, RISK and INTERNAL CONTROL 7.1 Annual Assurance for the NHS England Core Standards for Emergency Preparedness, Resilience and Response (EPRR) John Mcgonigle was invited to present the Annual Assurance for the NHS England Core Standards for Emergency Preparedness, Resilience and Response, the content of which was noted. It was further noted that: • The Trust had reported full compliance in 60 out of 62 core standards as part of the self-assessment, with an overall assurance rating of ‘substantially compliant’. • The two key areas for improvement were in respect of lockdown procedures and the Trust’s approach to business continuity. • The Trust had also carried out a deep-dive into its cyber security arrangements. 7.2 Register of Seals and Chair’s Actions Report The paper ‘Register of Seals and Chair’s Actions Report’ was presented to the meeting, the content of which was noted. Decision: The Board agreed to ratify the application of the Trust Seal to the documents listed in the ‘Register of Seals and Chair’s Actions Report’. 8. Any other business The Board expressed its thanks to Joe Teape for his time as Chief Operating Officer, noting that this would be his last Board meeting at the Trust. 9. Note the date of the next meeting: 11 March 2025 Page 8 10. Resolution regarding the Press, Public and Others Decision: The Board resolved that, as permitted by the National Health Service Act 2006 (as amended), the Trust’s Constitution and the Standing Orders of the board of directors, that representatives of the press, members of the public and others not invited to attend to the next part of the meeting be excluded due to the confidential nature of the business to be transacted. The meeting was adjourned. Page 9 List of action items Agenda item Assigned to Deadline Status Trust Board – Open Session 25/07/2024 5.4 Briefing from the Chair of the Quality Committee (Oral) 1163. Impact of technology Machell, Craig 01/04/2025 Pending Explanation action item Craig Machell agreed to add an item covering the impact of technology over the next 5-10 years to a future Trust Board Study Session agenda. Update: Item tentatively scheduled for 01/04/2025 Study Session. Trust Board – Open Session 07/01/2025 2 Patient Story 1200. Recommendations Byrne, Gail 11/03/2025 Pending Explanation action item Gail Byrne agreed to consider how the recommendations made in patient stories could be captured and action taken as a result. Trust Board – Open Session 07/01/2025 5.8 ICB Finance Report for Month 8 1201. Transformation programmes Howard, Ian 11/03/2025 Pending Explanation action item Ian Howard agreed to coordinate a report to the Board in respect of the Trust’s contribution to the Hampshire and Isle of Wight Integrated Care System transformation programmes. Page 1 of 2 Agenda item Assigned to Deadline Status Trust Board – Open Session 07/01/2025 5.8 ICB Finance Report for Month 8 1202. ICB Finance Reports Douglas-Todd, Jenni French, David 11/03/2025 Pending Explanation action item The Chair and David French agreed to discuss the requests of the Board in the ICB Finance Reports with the Integrated Care Board’s chair. Trust Board – Open Session 07/01/2025 5.10 Freedom to Speak Up Report 1203. Raising concerns of safety Byrne, Gail 11/03/2025 Pending Explanation action item Gail Byrne agreed to consider how Freedom to Speak Up can be used for its original purpose of raising concerns of safety. Trust Board – Open Session 07/01/2025 5.13 Infection Prevention and Control 2024-25 Quarter 2 Report 1204. Trust Board Study Session Byrne, Gail 03/06/2025 Pending Explanation action item Gail Byrne agreed to include an item on infection prevention control at a future Trust Board Study Session to include details of an Australian study, point of care testing, and progress on the roll out of the Fundamentals of Care programme. Update: Item tentatively scheduled for TBSS on 3 June 2025. Page 2 of 2 Agenda item 5.1 Committee Chair’s Report to the Trust Board of Directors 11 March 2025 Committee: Audit & Risk Committee Meeting Date: 20 January 2025 Key Messages: • • • • • The committee considered the accounting policies and management judgements in respect of the 2024/25 annual accounts, noting that most of these were consistent with previous years. It was further noted that a full re-valuation was due to take place this year in respect of the Trust’s property, plant and equipment, a process which occurs every five years. The impact of IFRS16 was also noted. The committee reviewed the Trust’s compliance with the Code of Governance for NHS Provider Trusts, noting that the Trust was compliant in all areas or had appropriate explanations for areas of non-compliance, of which there were only a few. These had also been areas of non-compliance during 2023/24. The committee received a report on cyber risk, including recent trends and the steps that both the NHS and the Trust were taking to counter the threat posed. The committee received updates in respect of the internal audit programme, including the reports in respect of an audit of the Fit and Proper Persons framework and of Data Quality. An update was provided in respect of the work of the counter-fraud team, including an update on the work being undertaken to manage the risk impersonation fraud by those pretending to be agency/temporary staff. Assurance: (Reports/Papers reviewed by the Committee also appearing on the Board agenda) 6.2 Board Assurance Framework (BAF) Update Assurance Rating: Risk Rating: Substantial N/A • All risks had been reviewed with the relevant executive director(s). • It was suggested that the BAF needed to more adequately reflect the Trust’s estate risk and the target date should be reconsidered. 7.3 Audit and Risk Committee Assurance Rating: Risk Rating: Terms of Reference Substantial N/A • The committee reviewed its Terms of Reference, proposing to only make minor changes. • The committee recommended that the Board approve the revised Terms of Reference. Any Other Matters: • The committee received an update in respect of the tenders for internal and external auditors. Assurance Rating: Substantial There is a robust series of suitably designed internal controls in place upon Assurance which the organisation relies to manage the risk of failure of the continuous and effective achievement of the objectives of the process, which at the time of our review were being consistently applied. Reasonable There is a series of controls in place, however there are potential risks that Assurance may not be sufficient to ensure that the individual objectives of the process are achieved in a continuous and effective manner. Improvements are required to enhance the adequacy and effectiveness of the controls to mitigate these risks. Page 1 of 2 Limited Assurance No Assurance Not Applicable Controls in place are not sufficient to ensure that the organisation can rely upon them to manage the risks to the continuous and effective achievement of the objectives of the process. Significant improvements are required to improve the adequacy and effectiveness of the controls. There is a fundamental breakdown or absence of core internal controls such that the organisation cannot rely upon them to manage the risks to the continuous and effective achievement of the objectives of the process. Immediate action is required to improve the adequacy and effectiveness of controls. Where assurance is not required and/or relevant. Risk Rating: Low Medium High Not Applicable Based on the report considered by the committee, there is little or no concern that the Trust will be unable to meet its stated objectives and/or plans. There is some concern that the Trust might not be able to fully meet its stated objectives and/or plans based on the information contained in the report considered by the committee. There is a significant risk that the Trust will not be able to meet its stated objectives and/or plans based on the information contained in the report considered by the committee. Where risk rating is not relevant. Page 2 of 2 Agenda item 5.2 i) Committee Chair’s Report to the Trust Board of Directors 11 March 2025 Committee: Finance and Investment Committee Meeting Date: 27 January 2025 Key Messages: • • • • • • • • • • The committee reviewed the Finance Report for Month 9. The Trust’s financial position remained challenging with a £4.5m in-month and £22.7m year-to-date deficit recorded against a plan of £3.3m. Furthermore, the Trust’s cash position remained challenging. The underlying position had deteriorated during December 2024 due to lower than expected Elective Recovery income. In addition, there had been up to 500 Emergency Department attendances per day and circa 250 patients having no criteria to reside. The Trust was anticipating a year-end deficit of circa £35m once additional pay pressures had been taken into account. There were concerns that a cap would be applied to Elective Recovery funding based on month 8 figures. A significant proportion of the Trust’s undelivered Cost Improvement Programme related to non-delivery of system-wide transformation programmes. The Trust’s capital programme was £11.6m behind plan with £50.4m due to be spent during the remainder of the financial year. The committee received a report on the management of leases from an accounting perspective, noting that further work on reviewing leases was required. An update was received in respect of the annual planning and budgetsetting process, noting that no national planning guidance had yet been received. It was expected that 2025/26 would be challenging due to an anticipated real terms reduction in funding and possible cap on Elective Recovery funding. The committee received an update in respect of the Trust’s project to optimise operating services as part of the Always Improving programme, noting good progress being made in this area. The committee received an update in respect of Digital, noting the progress being made in respect of system developments and laptop upgrades as well as the latest position regarding the proposed system-wide Electronic Patient Record system and the planned go-live for the new Emergency Department system in April 2025. Assurance: (Reports/Papers reviewed by the Committee also appearing on the Board agenda) 7.4 Finance and Investment Assurance Rating: Risk Rating: Committee Terms of Reference Substantial Low • The committee reviewed its Terms of Reference, proposing to only make minor changes. • The committee recommended that the Board approve the revised Terms of Reference. Any Other N/A Matters: Page 1 of 2 Assurance Rating: Substantial There is a robust series of suitably designed internal controls in place upon Assurance which the organisation relies to manage the risk of failure of the continuous and effective achievement of the objectives of the process, which at the time of our review were being consistently applied. Reasonable There is a series of controls in place, however there are potential risks that Assurance may not be sufficient to ensure that the individual objectives of the process are achieved in a continuous and effective manner. Improvements are required to enhance the adequacy and effectiveness of the controls to mitigate these risks. Limited Assurance Controls in place are not sufficient to ensure that the organisation can rely upon them to manage the risks to the continuous and effective achievement of the objectives of the process. Significant improvements are required to improve the adequacy and effectiveness of the controls. No Assurance There is a fundamental breakdown or absence of core internal controls such that the organisation cannot rely upon them to manage the risks to the continuous and effective achievement of the objectives of the process. Immediate action is required to improve the adequacy and effectiveness of controls. Not Applicable Where assurance is not required and/or relevant. Risk Rating: Low Medium High Not Applicable Based on the report considered by the committee, there is little or no concern that the Trust will be unable to meet its stated objectives and/or plans. There is some concern that the Trust might not be able to fully meet its stated objectives and/or plans based on the information contained in the report considered by the committee. There is a significant risk that the Trust will not be able to meet its stated objectives and/or plans based on the information contained in the report considered by the committee. Where risk rating is not relevant. Page 2 of 2 Agenda item 5.2 ii) Committee Chair’s Report to the Trust Board of Directors 11 March 2025 Committee: Finance and Investment Committee Meeting Date: 24 February 2025 Key Messages: • • • • • • • The committee considered a draft of the Trust’s annual plan submission to the Hampshire and Isle of Wight Integrated Care Board. The draft plan identified significant financial challenges continuing from the underlying financial pressures reported during 2024/25. The committee received an update in respect of the Trust’s inpatient flow programme, noting that whilst a 5% improvement in length of stay had been achieved, much of this had been offset by increased demand. The committee reviewed the Finance Report for Month 10 (see below). The committee received an update in respect of the Trust’s cash position, noting that it appeared likely that additional revenue support would be required in the first quarter of 2025/26. The committee received an update regarding the Trust’s 2024/25 Cost Improvement Programme. The Trust had identified £89.3m of schemes and forecast delivery of £76.3m of improvements. The committee received an update on the Trust’s decarbonisation programme, including on proposals for installing heat pumps, solar panels and renewing/replacing infrastructure. The committee noted an update in respect of UHS Estates Limited, including the risk associated with the management of endoscopy scopes and their replacement. Assurance: (Reports/Papers reviewed by the Committee also appearing on the Board agenda) 5.8 Finance Report for Month 10 Assurance Rating: Risk Rating: Substantial High • The Trust’s underlying monthly deficit was c.£6.5m. There was a year-to-date deficit of £15.2m, £11.8m behind plan. • The Trust had reported a £7.5m surplus during the month due to oneoff items. • The Trust was forecasting an year-end deficit of £17.65m following work to agree a Hampshire and Isle of Wight Integrated Care System ‘landing plan’ for 2024/25. • The Trust’s capital programme was £12m behind plan, with £39.3m due to be spent during the remainder of 2024/25. 6.2 Board Assurance Framework (BAF) Update Assurance Rating: Risk Rating: Substantial N/A • Risks 5a, 5b and 5c have been updated, following discussions with the respective Executive Director(s). • It was proposed to extend the target date for risk 5a, but to include an interim target as at April 2026 between the current position and the ultimate objective of reducing this risk to 9. Any Other N/A Matters: Page 1 of 2 Assurance Rating: Substantial There is a robust series of suitably designed internal controls in place upon Assurance which the organisation relies to manage the risk of failure of the continuous and effective achievement of the objectives of the process, which at the time of our review were being consistently applied. Reasonable There is a series of controls in place, however there are potential risks that Assurance may not be sufficient to ensure that the individual objectives of the process are achieved in a continuous and effective manner. Improvements are required to enhance the adequacy and effectiveness of the controls to mitigate these risks. Limited Assurance Controls in place are not sufficient to ensure that the organisation can rely upon them to manage the risks to the continuous and effective achievement of the objectives of the process. Significant improvements are required to improve the adequacy and effectiveness of the controls. No Assurance There is a fundamental breakdown or absence of core internal controls such that the organisation cannot rely upon them to manage the risks to the continuous and effective achievement of the objectives of the process. Immediate action is required to improve the adequacy and effectiveness of controls. Not Applicable Where assurance is not required and/or relevant. Risk Rating: Low Medium High Not Applicable Based on the report considered by the committee, there is little or no concern that the Trust will be unable to meet its stated objectives and/or plans. There is some concern that the Trust might not be able to fully meet its stated objectives and/or plans based on the information contained in the report considered by the committee. There is a significant risk that the Trust will not be able to meet its stated objectives and/or plans based on the information contained in the report considered by the committee. Where risk rating is not relevant. Page 2 of 2 Agenda item 5.3 i) Committee Chair’s Report to the Trust Board of Directors 11 March 2025 Committee: People & Organisational Development Committee Meeting Date: 24 January 2025 Key Messages: • • • • • • • As forecast, the Trust’s workforce was seven whole-time-equivalents (WTE) above its plan at the end of December 2024. However, the total workforce had decreased by 90 WTE, owing to the impact of Christmas resulting in deferral of start dates until January 2025. It was forecast that the Trust would be 146 WTE above plan at the end of 2024/25, noting that the Trust had assumed a reduction of 220 WTE due to the impact of system-wide transformation programmes including Non-Criteria to Reside and mental health. The Trust was experiencing particularly high sickness levels due to the impact of seasonal illnesses. The committee received a presentation on the Trust’s internal leadership development programmes, including those relating to senior, operational, and emerging leaders as well as programmes targeted at under-represented groups. The committee received an update on staff health and wellbeing, noting that uptake for influenza and Covid-19 vaccinations was low at 50% and 30% respectively. The committee was updated on the status of the disputes with UNITE for Portering and with UNISON regarding Band 2 and Band 3 pay. The committee noted that the formal consultation in respect of transfer of staff to UHS Estates Limited had commenced. Assurance: (Reports/Papers reviewed by the Committee also appearing on the Board agenda) Not applicable. Any Other Matters: The committee noted that an action plan had been agreed with the porters and that the team had moved from Estates, Facilities and Capital Development to the Site team. Assurance Rating: Substantial There is a robust series of suitably designed internal controls in place upon Assurance which the organisation relies to manage the risk of failure of the continuous and effective achievement of the objectives of the process, which at the time of our review were being consistently applied. Reasonable There is a series of controls in place, however there are potential risks that Assurance may not be sufficient to ensure that the individual objectives of the process are achieved in a continuous and effective manner. Improvements are required to enhance the adequacy and effectiveness of the controls to mitigate these risks. Limited Assurance Controls in place are not sufficient to ensure that the organisation can rely upon them to manage the risks to the continuous and effective achievement of the objectives of the process. Significant improvements are required to improve the adequacy and effectiveness of the controls. Page 1 of 2 No Assurance Not Applicable Risk Rating: Low Medium High Not Applicable There is a fundamental breakdown or absence of core internal controls such that the organisation cannot rely upon them to manage the risks to the continuous and effective achievement of the objectives of the process. Immediate action is required to improve the adequacy and effectiveness of controls. Where assurance is not required and/or relevant. Based on the report considered by the committee, there is little or no concern that the Trust will be unable to meet its stated objectives and/or plans. There is some concern that the Trust might not be able to fully meet its stated objectives and/or plans based on the information contained in the report considered by the committee. There is a significant risk that the Trust will not be able to meet its stated objectives and/or plans based on the information contained in the report considered by the committee. Where risk rating is not relevant. Page 2 of 2 Agenda item 5.3 ii) Committee Chair’s Report to the Trust Board of Directors 11 March 2025 Committee: People & Organisational Development Committee Meeting Date: 24 February 2025 Key Messages: • • • • The committee reviewed the People Report for Month 10 (see below). It was noted that January 2025 had been challenging, especially in terms of managing high levels of staff sickness due to seasonal illnesses as well as the impact of increased demand on the Trust’s services. Furthermore, the increasing number of patients requiring enhanced care placed further pressure on the Trust’s workforce numbers. It was expected that difficult decisions would be required to meet the financial and workforce expectations for 2025/26. As part of this, it would be necessary to ensure that quality indicators were monitored. In addition, the Trust will need to be focused on ensuring that staff still feel valued and supported to deliver the first class care they aspire to. This would
Url: /Media/UHS-website-2019/Docs/About-the-Trust/Trust-governance-and-corporate-docs/2025-Trust-documents/Papers-Trust-Board-11-March-2025.pdf

Annual report 20-21

Description: 2020/21 Incorporating the quality report University Hospital Southampton NHS Foundation Trust Annual Report and Accounts 2020/21 Presented to Parliament pursuant to Schedule 7, paragraph 25(4)(a) of the National Health Service Act 2006 © 2021 University Hospital Southampton NHS Foundation Trust Table of contents Welcome from our chair and chief executive 6 Overview and performance 8 Performance report 9 Overview 10 Accountability report 29 Directors’ report 30 Remuneration report 53 Staff report 65 NHS Foundation Trust Code of Governance 81 NHS Oversight Framework 81 Annual governance statement 84 Quality report 95 Statement on quality from the chief executive 96 Priorities for improvement and statements of assurance from the board 99 Other information 153 Annual accounts 180 Statement from the chief financial officer 181 Auditor’s report 182 Foreword to the accounts 188 Statement of Comprehensive Income 189 Statement of Financial Position 190 Statement of Changes in Taxpayers’ Equity 191 Statement of Cash Flows 192 Notes to the accounts 193 5 Welcome from our chair and chief executive 2020/21 was undoubtedly the most challenging year in the history of the NHS, and we have felt the impact of the COVID-19 pandemic here at University Hospital Southampton NHS Foundation Trust (UHS) in full. Responding to this has meant there isn’t a single part of our organisation that hasn’t changed in some way over the last year and we have all had to adapt to a rapidly changing environment. Our staff have been unwavering in their dedication, hard work and commitment to keeping our hospitals running, our patients cared for, and their colleagues supported. Every single member of the UHS family has played their part. The loss of life from COVID-19 has been devastating, and at UHS we stand shoulder-to-shoulder with everyone affected by this tragedy, including the families of staff members whom we lost. We must recognise the incredible work of Southampton Hospital Charity, which has funded boost boxes, wellness rooms, a helpline and so much more to support staff at a time when their wellbeing is more important than ever. As the nationwide vaccination programme continues to offer hope of life more like pre-pandemic times, we are proud to have been at the forefront of these efforts - from being part of early research for the Oxford-AstraZeneca vaccine, to the opening of one of the largest vaccination hubs in the region on our site in December 2020. We will continue to play a key role in vaccination development by leading the world’s first clinical trial into the effectiveness of COVID-19 booster vaccines, as well as taking part in a study involving pregnant people. Our response to COVID-19 has prompted innovation and new ways of working across the Trust, to the benefit of patient experience. At the start of the pandemic we faced real challenges of capacity and increases in waiting times, which led to us working with Spire Southampton so cancer treatment and surgery could continue for patients at highest risk. We also increased the number of outpatient attendances which took place by telephone or video call, and our patient support hub was set up to provide a single point of support for patients who had been advised to shield. We are immensely proud of the record of the Trust during the pandemic, exemplified by the number of patients we were able to take into our care from well outside the local area. The Trust is in a strong financial position as a result of careful spending and efficiencies, which has allowed us to invest significantly in upgrading our estate. These improvements have seen the opening of the general intensive care unit, and the new cancer ward, which was built in just six months. These formed part of overall capital expenditure of £80 million during the year. The last year has seen us say goodbye to two members of our executive leadership team. Paula Head left the chief executive officer role in November to join the national response to COVID-19, before becoming a senior fellow at The King’s Fund. Derek Sandeman moved on from being our chief medical officer to take the same position at the Hampshire and Isle of Wight Integrated Care System. We are grateful to both for their efforts on the Trust leadership team during the most challenging of years. One of our non-executive directors, Jenni Douglas-Todd, also left the Trust to take on the important role of director of equality and inclusion with NHS England and NHS Improvement. 6 Looking ahead to the future, UHS will play a key role in the Hampshire and Isle of Wight Integrated Care System. Our commitment is to deliver services with partners through clinical networks, collaboration and integration across geographical and organisational boundaries for seamless patient care. We as a Trust board are looking forward to implementing our own five year strategy, which sets out ambitions for what we want the hospital to be in 2025, for both patients and staff. Our focus will always be on enabling world class people to deliver world class care. Peter Hollins David French Chair Chief Executive Officer 7 OVERVIEW AND PERFORMANCE Performance report Introduction from our chief executive Over the last year, the way in which the Trust has worked and performance it has achieved, has been transformed by the COVID-19 pandemic. • UHS saw a number of large surges in demand for inpatient care, and for intensive respiratory support in particular, due to COVID-19 infection rates. Our capacity to deliver intensive care had to be increased, and many of our staff moved from other services such as our elective theatres in order to meet this need for care. • We have introduced and continue to maintain a number of changes to reduce the risk of COVID-19 being transmitted, or adversely affecting patient outcomes, within the Trust. Changes have included the wearing of additional personal protective equipment by our staff (especially when caring for patients who might have COVID-19 or undertaking higher risk procedures), reducing the number of patients coming to our outpatient departments and increasing the number of telephone and video consultations, separating elective and emergency patients within our departments and regular testing of our staff and all patients on or prior to their admission to hospital for treatment. • Public concerns about safety, government restrictions and the efforts of community services actually contributed to reductions in the total number of patients who sought hospital care this year. • Treatment plans have been modified by a number of services, in partnership with patients, to reduce the risk posed by COVID-19 to those patients. This was often appropriate in those circumstances in which the normal treatment would significantly reduce the patient’s own resistance to infections. Our performance has, in many cases, been strongly influenced by these profound changes. We have responded well to the need to provide the most urgent care, and the adverse impacts on elective care have been slightly less than the average across the NHS. However, we remain very concerned by the significant increase in the numbers of patients waiting longer than they should for elective care. It will take concerted and sustained action within both the Trust and the wider NHS in order to return elective performance to levels achieved before the pandemic whilst also continuing to meet urgent care needs as the restrictions that have been implemented within our society are progressively relaxed. 9 Overview About the Trust Our services University Hospital Southampton NHS Foundation Trust is one of the largest acute teaching trusts in England with a turnover of more than £1 billion in 2020/21. It is based on the coast in south east England and provides services to over 1.9 million people living in Southampton and south Hampshire and specialist services, including neurosciences, respiratory medicine, cancer care, cardiovascular, obstetrics and specialist children’s services, to more than 3.7 million people in central southern England and the Channel Islands. The Trust is also a designated major trauma centre, one of only two places in the south of England to offer adults and children full major trauma care provision. As a leading centre for teaching and research, the Trust has close working relationships with the University of Southampton, the Medical Research Council, National Institute for Health Research (NIHR), Wellcome Trust and Cancer Research UK. UHS is consistently one of the UK’s highest recruiting trusts of patients to clinical trials and in the top ten nationally for research study volume as ranked by the NIHR Clinical Research Network. 12,000 Every year over staff at UHS: treat around 160,000 inpatients and day patients, including about 75,000 emergency admissions see over 650,000 people at outpatient appointments deal with around 150,000 cases in our emergency department deliver more than 100 outpatient clinics across the south of England, keeping services local for patients The Trust provides most of its services from the following locations: • Southampton General Hospital – the Trust’s largest location, where a great number of specialist services are based alongside emergency and critical care and which includes Southampton Children’s Hospital. • Princess Anne Hospital – located across the road from Southampton General Hospital and providing maternity care and specialist care for women with medical problems during pregnancy and babies who need extra care around birth across the region. • Royal South Hants Hospital – although the Trust does not operate this site near the centre of Southampton it provides a smaller number of services from this location. • New Forest Birth Centre – located at Ashurst on the edge of the New Forest and run by experienced midwives and support staff it offers a safe, ‘home away from home’ environment for women having a healthy pregnancy and expecting a straightforward birth. The services provided by the Trust are commissioned and paid for by local clinical commissioning groups (CCGs) and, in the case of more specialised services (such as treatments for rare conditions), by NHS England. Over 50% of UHS services are paid for by CCGs and approximately 48% by NHS England. We provide these under a standard NHS contract, which incorporates ongoing monitoring of the Trust and the quality of the services provided. 10 Our structure UHS gained foundation trust status on 1 October 2011. A foundation trust is a public benefit corporation providing NHS services in line with the core NHS principles: that care should be universal, comprehensive and free at the point of need. The Trust is licensed as a foundation trust to provide these services by Monitor (the independent regulator, now part of NHS England and NHS Improvement) and the healthcare services we provide are regulated by the Care Quality Commission. Being a foundation trust has enabled greater local accountability and greater financial freedom and has supported the delivery of the Trust’s mission and strategy over a number of years. The diagram below provides an overview of the overall organisational structure of the Trust. Public and foundation trust members Council of Governors Board of Directors Executive Directors Division A Surgery Critical Care Opthalmology Theatres and Anaesthetics Division B Division C Cancer Care Emergency Medicine Helicopter Emergency Medical Services Medicine and Medicine for Older People Pathology Specialist Medicine Women and Newborn Maternity Child Health Clinical Support Division D Trust Headquarters Division Cardiovascular and Thoracic Neurosciences Trauma and Orthopaedics Radiology Corporate Affairs Communications Estates, Facilities and Capital Development Finance Human Resources Informatics Patient Support Services Procurement and Supply Transformation and Improvement (‘Always Improving’) Research and Development Strategy and Business Development 11 The Trust is also part of an integrated care system in Hampshire and the Isle of Wight, which is a partnership of NHS and local government organisations working together to improve the health and wellbeing of the population across Hampshire and the Isle of Wight. Our values Our values describe how we do things at UHS and act as a guide to all staff working with colleagues to deliver high quality patient care and a great patient experience every day. Our values are: Patients, their families and carers are at the heart of what we do. Their experience of our services will be our measure of success. Partnership between clinicians, patients and carers is critical to achieving our vision, both within hospital teams and extending across organisational boundaries in the NHS, social care and the third sector. We will ensure we are always improving services for patients through research, education, clinical effectiveness and quality improvement. We will continue to incorporate new ideas, technologies and create greater efficiencies in the services we provide. 12 Our strategy 2021-25 The Trust’s strategy was updated during 2020/2021 to take account of everything our staff had experienced during the COVID-19 pandemic and what we had learnt from this. The vision for UHS is to continue on its journey to become an organisation of world class people delivering world class care. Our strategy is organised around five themes and for each of these describes a number ambitions we aim to achieve by 2025. Theme Ambitions Outstanding patient outcomes, • We will monitor clinical outcomes, safety and experience of our experience and safety patients regularly to ensure they are amongst the best in the UK By 2025 we will strengthen our and the world. national reputation for outstanding • We will reduce harm, learning from all incidents through our patient outcomes, experience and proactive patient safety culture. safety, providing high quality care • We will ensure all patients and relatives have a positive experience and treatment across an extensive of our care, as a result of the environment created by our people range of services from foetal and our facilities. medicine, through all life stages and conditions, to end-of-life care. Pioneering research • We will recruit and enable people to deliver pioneering research and innovation in Southampton. We will continue to be a leading teaching hospital with a growing, reputable and innovative research and development portfolio • We will optimise access to clinical research studies for our patients. • We will enable innovation in everything we do, and ensure that ‘cutting edge’ investigations and treatments are delivered in Southampton. that attracts the best staff and efficiently delivers the best possible treatments and care for our patients. World class people • We will recruit and develop enough people with the right Supporting and nurturing our knowledge and skills to meet the needs of our patients. people through a culture that values • We will provide satisfying and fulfilling roles, growing our talent diversity and builds knowledge and through development and opportunity for progression. skills to ensure everyone reaches • We will empower our people, embracing diversity and embedding their full potential. We must provide compassion, inclusion and equity of opportunity. rewarding career paths within empowered, compassionate, and motivated teams. Integrated networks and collaboration We will deliver our services with partners through clinical networks, collaboration and integration across geographical and organisational boundaries. • We will work in partnership with key stakeholders across the Hampshire and Isle of Wight integrated care system. • We will strengthen our acute clinical networks across the region, centralising when necessary and supporting local care when appropriate. • We will foster local integration with primary and community care as well as mental health and social care services for seamless delivery across boundaries. • We will build on our successful partnership with University of Southampton (UoS), growing our reputation as a national leading university teaching hospital. 13 Theme Foundations for the future Making our enabling infrastructure (finance, digital, estate) fit for the future to support a leading university teaching hospital in the 21st century and recognising our responsibility as a major employer in the community of Southampton and our role in broader environmental sustainability. Ambitions • We will deliver best value to the tax payer as a financially efficient and sustainable organisation. • We will support patient self-management and seamless care across organisational boundaries through our ambitious digital programme, including real time data reporting, to inform our care. • We will expand and improve our estate, increasing capacity where needed and providing modern facilities for our patients and our people. • We will strengthen our role in the community as an employer of choice, a partner in delivery of services to our population and by leading the Greener NHS agenda locally. During each year of the strategy the Trust will set out a more detailed series of objectives to achieve and progress towards the delivery of its ambitions. In 2020/21 these objectives included: • Recovery, restoration and improvement of clinical services • Implementing the ‘Always Improving’ strategy • Restoring a full research portfolio • Continuing our focus on staff wellbeing including the long-term effects of coronavirus (long COVID) • Working in partnership with the newly established integrated care system • Creating a sustainable financial infrastructure • Making our corporate infrastructure (digital, estate) fit for the future to support a leading university teaching hospital in the 21st century, including an estates masterplan. Performance against these objectives will be monitored and reported to the Trust’s board of directors on a quarterly basis. Principal risks to our strategy and objectives The board of directors has identified and manages the principal risks to the delivery of its strategy and objectives through its board assurance framework. The principal risks to the delivery of its strategy and objectives identified by the Trust during 2020/21 were that: • it would be unable to form effective partnerships that achieve networked care for patients; • it could not develop the estate in line with the ambitions set out in the strategy; • it would fail to restore and increase capacity following the COVID-19 pandemic to meet waiting times for elective care and cancer care needs; • it would fail to introduce and implement new technology for the transformation of care; • it would be unable to retain, recruit, develop and train a diverse and inclusive workforce necessary to meet the strategic goals; • it could not develop a sustainable model within the new financial regime that preserves quality care; • it would fail to provide vulnerable service users with timely and high quality and appropriate care; • it would not reach the ambition of outstanding compliance and quality standards; • it could not sufficiently engage with key stakeholders and system partners to support effective interventions and maintain the health of the local population; • it would be unable to respond to the needs of the NHS in order to deliver our strategy; • it would fail to capitalise on its relationship with the universities in Southampton and other health education providers in line with our strategy; • it would not develop innovative education and training approaches. 14 While the COVID-19 pandemic presented the Trust with new risks as it introduced more stringent infection control processes, stopped certain types of activity and responded quickly to care for large numbers of seriously ill patients who had tested positive for COVID-19, it also prompted innovation across a wide range of areas. However the ongoing impact of the pandemic on both our staff, patients who have had COVID-19 and patients who have waited longer than expected for treatment as a result, added to the risks facing the Trust. National targets for performance have not been amended as a result of the pandemic, although the national plan has focussed on the recovery of activity levels as the first stage in a restoration of elective services. Capacity – The initial and subsequent waves of the COVID-19 pandemic have led to increases in the waiting times for patients and the number of patients waiting more than 52 and 78 weeks has increased significantly. While the Trust was able to recover capacity quickly between waves of the pandemic, its ability to reduce the overall waiting list and the length of time patients are waiting for treatment remains one of the key risks for the Trust. This may be compounded by the reduction in the number of referrals from GPs during the pandemic, leading to a potential future increase in the number of patients being referred as people visit their GPs for the first time with more advanced disease. During the pandemic the Trust utilised the support available from the independent sector to continue cancer treatment and surgery for those patients at highest risk. It also increased the number of outpatient attendances which took place by telephone or video call. The Trust developed a clinical assurance framework during the year to better assess the risk of harm to patients as a result of delays in treatment and this has been utilised in decision-making around the allocation of resources to those areas where there is the greatest risk of potential harm to patients. In addition to opening additional capacity during 2020/21 (described in the Estates section below), the Trust also committed expenditure and commenced construction works in 2020/21 in order to be in a position to open an additional endoscopy room and four further operating theatres during 2021/22 and prepared plans for a significant expansion in ophthalmology outpatient capacity. These initiatives will contribute to improvements in elective waiting times that needed following the pandemic. Quality and compliance – The Trust continued to monitor the quality of care delivered throughout 2020/21. During the COVID-19 pandemic the primary focus became infection prevention and control, with the launch of a successful COVID ZERO campaign that saw the Trust reduce the transmission of the virus in hospital (nosocomial transmission). The Trust also achieved its annual target for reduction in Clostridium Difficile infections, however, there was one MRSA Bacteraemia during March 2021, the only such event in 2020/21. The Trust continued to develop its proactive patient safety culture during 2020/21 with changes to the way in which patient safety incidents are investigated and the approval of its Always Improving strategy, which will be launched in 2021. Reporting and investigation of incidents continued during 2020/21. Partnerships – During 2020/21, the Trust and its partners worked together very effectively to discharge patients safely and provide ongoing support to patients who had tested positive for COVID-19, to ensure patients requiring urgent cancer treatment and surgery were able to continue their treatment in the independent sector and to develop a COVID-19 saliva testing pilot with the University of Southampton and local authorities. Work to respond to the COVID-19 pandemic, however, meant that as a system we were unable to progress the Hampshire and Isle of Wight strategic plan delivery at the pace we would have wanted or had set out to achieve, particularly the development of networks. Nonetheless the application for Hampshire and Isle of Wight to become an integrated care system was approved with effect from 1 April 2021. 15 Existing networks continued to develop and improve. The Trust also became the Wessex Cancer Surgical Hub during 2020 as a result of a national initiative with the aim of maximising the number of patients receiving curative surgery. Both the Wessex Cancer Alliance and the Trust ended the year as the second highest performing among their respective peers for cancer treatment. Workforce – While additional staff were recruited to specifically assist the Trust during the pandemic, the Trust continued to recruit nurses from overseas during 2020/21 meaning that the number of vacancies has reduced compared to the position prior to the pandemic. Changes to recruitment processes were approved in 2020/21 to improve the fairness, transparency and quality of these. The Trust also continued to work with its staff networks and specific focus groups to increase diversity in leadership roles. While workforce capacity continues to be one of the biggest challenges faced by the Trust, during 2020/21 our main focus has been on supporting our staff to respond to the COVID-19 pandemic and providing both the tools and time to help staff recovery. We are incredibly proud of the way that staff responded to the pandemic and continue to recognise this in whatever ways we can, however, we also want to ensure that staff continue to be able to contribute to patient care at their best and want to stay and develop with the Trust. Technology was also used at levels not previously achieved to continue to deliver training to staff and enable staff to work from home where possible, ensuring a safer environment for patients and staff in the hospitals. Estate – The Trust continued to invest in and develop its estate during 2020/21 including the opening a new general intensive care unit (GICU), a new operating theatre and a new cancer care ward, built in just six months. These were part of £80 million of capital expenditure in 2020/21. The Trust has also established a programme to reduce backlog maintenance in addition to continuing to add to and improve the environment in which services are provided to patients and the working environment for staff. Innovation and technology – There have been exceptional levels of achievement in relation to COVID-19 related research activity, including in partnership with the universities. You can read more about these from page 167 of the quality report. The board of directors also supported the funding of an expansion of research and innovation activity to allow the continued delivery of the Trust’s ambitions to innovate and improve and transform its services. Sustainable financial model – The Trust achieved its forecast breakeven position in 2020/21. Income was more predictable in 2020/21 as block contract arrangements were put in place in response to the COVID-19 pandemic and ensured that costs were covered. The Trust continues to maintain a strong cash position and to implement improvements and efficiency savings, allowing it to continue to invest in its services. 16 Summary of performance COVID-19 bed occupancy UHS has experienced two distinct peaks in inpatient care for patients with COVID-19 infection, with smaller numbers of patients continuing to receive care outside these peak times. Bed occupancy reached a maximum of 173 in the first peak in April 2020, and 322 in the second peak in January 2021. All bed types Intensive care/higher care beds 17 Emergency access through our emergency and eye casualty departments Public concerns about safety, government restrictions on the activities people were able to do, and the efforts of community services contributed to significant reductions in the total number of patients who presented to our departments. All patients presenting to the emergency department Many changes were introduced within our departments in the course of the year to ensure that emergency assessment and treatment could be provided safely, including wearing of protective equipment by staff and patients, providing care in separate areas for patients suspected or known to have COVID-19, and using rapid laboratory tests to identify infection and confirm/exclude COVID-19 as a cause. Emergency access performance (measured as the percentage of patients discharged from emergency department care or admitted to a hospital bed within four hours of arrival to the department) improved significantly in 2020/21 compared to previous years. The national target of 95% was not achieved, however, the performance of our departments compared favourably with the average for acute trusts in England. 18 Emergency access four hour performance 19 Elective Waiting times Demand We saw a significant reduction in the number of elective referrals to hospital in the early part 2020/21, though they had returned close to pre-pandemic levels by the end of the year. It is likely that this pattern relates to a range of factors including reluctance from members of the public to attend healthcare facilities at that time, changes to the ways in which primary care was accessed, and efforts made within primary and community to avoid hospital referrals needing to be made. Accepted referrals The number of patients referred to hospital with suspected cancer also reduced during 2020/21; 7% fewer patients were seen across the year as a whole, though referrals returned to pre-pandemic levels or higher from July 2020 onwards. Patients seen following ‘Two week wait’ urgent referral for suspected cancer 20 Activity UHS hospital appointments, diagnostic tests and elective admissions were all significantly reduced during 2020/21 due to the impact of COVID-19. • During periods of higher bed occupancy with COVID-19 it was necessary to significantly reduce the number of elective admissions undertaken in order that additional staff could work in intensive care. Less clinically urgent and therefore longer waiting patients were primarily those affected. • Throughout the year, additional infection prevention measures have reduced the number of patients that can be seen in each session, particularly when higher risk ‘aerosol generating’ procedures are planned, but also as a result of additional PPE being worn or to enable greater distancing of patients attending outpatient departments. UHS was offered additional capacity at local independent sector hospitals and used this effectively to minimise these adverse impacts. Approximately 30% of outpatient appointments are now undertaken by telephone or video, helping to maintain the capacity for patient care whilst reducing the infection risk for those patients and helping to maintain distancing measures for those patients still attending our outpatient departments. The graphs below show 2020/21 activity levels as a percentage of those achieved in the previous year. Elective admissions (including daycase) 21 Outpatient attendances Performance The average waiting time for first outpatient appointments has remained close to nine weeks for the majority of the year. UHS has however experienced very significant deteriorations in the waiting times our patients experience for diagnostic tests to be undertaken and elective treatment to be provided. The reduced number of new patients referred to hospital early in 2020/21 has moderated the extent of the growth in the total numbers of patients waiting, and the greatest rate of growth has unfortunately been amongst those groups of patients already waiting longest. 22 Diagnostics Our performance measures for diagnostics report on a total of 15 different frequently used tests. The waiting list is approximately 50% bigger than it was before the pandemic and stable through the second half of the year. At the end of the year 28% of patients were waiting more than six weeks to receive their investigation compared to the national target of 1%. The tests with the largest numbers of longer waiting patients include non-obstetric ultrasound, MRI and endoscopies, and further recovery will be driven through a combination of recruitment, independent sector capacity and an additional endoscopy room which opened at the start of April 2021. Patients waiting for a diagnostic test to be performed (sum of 15 different frequently used tests) Percentage of patients waiting over 6 weeks for a diagnostic test to be performed 23 Referral to Treatment Our waiting list from referral to treatment increased in size by 6% (2,220 patients) during 2020/21, rising when the recovery in referral numbers exceeded the recovery in clinical activity, the total increase in waiting list size would have been significantly higher had it not been for the significant reduction in the referrals received by the hospital especially during the early months of the pandemic. Looking forward, we anticipate referrals numbers returning to pre-pandemic levels, and being able to maintain the total size of our waiting list by delivering an equivalent number of treatments each month. Number of patients waiting between referral and commencement of a treatment for their condition The national target is that at least 92% of patients should be waiting for treatment no more than 18 weeks from their referral to hospital. Our performance against this measure is now 12% worse than one year ago, at 66%. Our performance continues to be typical of the major teaching hospital trusts that we benchmark with and the trend has been similar to that experienced across trusts in England. Percentage of patients waiting up to 18 weeks between referral and treatment 24 Unfortunately, the number of patients waiting significantly longer than the 18 week target has increased at a faster rate than the size of the waiting list as a whole. The graph below shows how the percentage of patients who have waited more 52 weeks increased. The number of patients who have waited more 52 weeks increased from 40 in March 2020 to 3,419 by March 2021 (of these 445 patients had waited more than 78 weeks). Such patients often require surgical treatment, particularly in the orthopaedic, ear nose and throat and oral surgery specialities. The impact on surgical care has been greater than that in outpatients during the pandemic, and it is also more challenging to increase capacity due to the need for additional operating theatres and a combination of different healthcare professionals to work within them. UHS opened an additional operating theatre in 2020/21, and has a further four theatres scheduled to open during 2021/22, which will make a significant contribution to our capacity to treat more patients. Unfortunately, the number of patients waiting significantly longer than the 18 week target is likely to continue to grow further in the short term, due to diagnostic investigations having been progressed less quickly than usual during the pandemic, the need to prioritise our increased treatment capacity according to the clinical urgency of conditions and because our scheduled capacity increases will not be completed before the autumn of 2021. Percentage of patients waiting more than 52 weeks, between referral and commencement of a treatment for their condition 25 Cancer Waiting Times UHS has been mostly successful in maintaining the timeliness of urgent services for patients with suspected cancer through the pandemic, and our performance has been amongst the best in both the south-east and nationally. UHS prioritised the theatre and intensive care capacity we were able to provide during the pandemic in order to meet the needs of those patients with the greatest clinical urgency, used capacity offered by independent sector hospitals to supplement that available within NHS, and operated a hub through which hospitals in Wessex were able to collaborate to continue critical cancer surgery during periods of peak COVID-19 demand. The national target is to provide the first definitive treatment to at least 85% of patients with cancer with 62 days of referral to hospital. Whilst UHS performance remained below this level in the majority of months, our performance has been significantly better than the national average, and has improved relative to other trusts. Treatment for Cancer within 62 days of an urgent GP referral to hospital 26 The national target is to provide the first definitive treatment to at least 96% of patients within 31 days of a decision to treat being made and agreed with the patients; both for the first and any subsequent treatments for cancer. UHS achieved this level on average across the year, and in the majority of months. The treatments provided are typically by means of surgery, chemotherapy/immunotherapy or radiotherapy. The most significant performance challenge this year has been in radiotherapy, where more sophisticated treatment plans improve patient outcomes but take longer to prepare, and there was also reduced treatment capacity whilst we replaced one of our ‘Linear Accelerator’ treatment machines with a new model. First definitive treatment for cancer within 31 days of a decision to treat Equality in service delivery Identifying and addressing health inequalities have been the central part of the Trust’s approach to improving the experience of care for our patients, families and carers. Over the past year, new initiatives have augmented progress on existing work to ensure there is appropriate support, due regard and recognition of those patients and their families and carers who are most at risk of poor experiences, outcomes and access to services. In 2020 we added two questions to our patient surveys, asking first if patients felt themselves to have a disability or require a reasonable adjustment, and, if yes, whether the Trust met this need. In 2020/21, the results were: TOTAL Had a disability / required a reasonable adjustment 27% Had this need met by the Trust (positive response) 95% This question was added to our major Friends and Family Test surveys as well as our local service-specific patient surveys. In June 2020 the Trust launched the sunflower lanyard scheme for hidden disabilities, participating in the national initiative to ensure that people whose disabilities are not visible are able to access further support and reasonable adjustments by means of a nationally recognised indicator (the sunflower). In 2020/21, 618 lanyards were issued with those needs recorded to ensure future reasonable adjustments are made for those individuals. 27 Carers have always been essential partners in the care that we provide, and having introduced a new post at the end of 2019 to focus solely on carer experience, this work has culminated in a Trust strategy for improving the involvement, support and experience carers have of our services. We have, over the past year, introduced carers cards, virtual peer support and carer-specific information about services while actively participating in local and regional work on carers. In January 2021 we realised our ambition of becoming an accredited ‘Veterans Aware’ hospital, with our submission of evidence being recognised as ‘strong’ and indicative of an organisation that has made great progress in helping to provide enhanced support for the armed forces community. Towards the end of 2019 we worked with the disability organisation AccessAble to produce accessibility guides for all of our services and estate. These online guides allow patients and visitors with disabilities to plan their journey and identify potential challenges to the environment. In 2020/21 our guides had 5,000 unique visits per month. One of our COVID-19 initiatives, a patient support hub, was set up in May 2020 to provide a single point of support for our patients who had been advised to shield. The service has grown and now offers support to patients and carers who are vulnerable, disabled or with additional needs. This includes coordinating community transport, arranging companions to assist with attending appointments, hosting a technology library to support those who are digitally excluded in accessing virtual appointments and information, and most recently receiving funding to pilot volunteer-led support for diabetes patients. Across the Trust, we continue to actively promote the importance of asking patients and carers about disabilities and reasonable adjustments, flagging needs on our patient administrative system to prompt our services to take proactive steps to ensure that any needs or adjustments are met on each and every visit. This has been of vital importance for meeting accessible information and communication needs. We are currently one of first trusts to pilot a new translation app that provides immediate interpretation into different languages, and we have worked closely with our communication support partners to ensure that where virtual appointments are needed, people with communication needs (BSL, foreign language) are supported to access care virtually. Our specialist nursing liaison teams continued to support access to services throughout the pandemic, ensuring that patients with dementia, with learning disabilities and autism, were supported to attend hospital where necessary. Further information about the Trust’s work in relation to equality, diversity and inclusion can be found on page 69 and pages 106 and 160 in the quality report. Going concern After making enquiries, the directors have a reasonable expectation that the services provided by the Trust will continue to be provided by the public sector for the foreseeable future. For this reason, the directors have adopted the going concern basis in preparing the accounts, following the definition of going concern in the public sector adopted by HM Treasury’s Financial Reporting Manual. David French Chief Executive Officer 28 June 2021 28 Accountability report Directors’ report Board of directors The board of directors is usually made up of six executive directors and seven non-executive directors, including the chair. Since 1 January 2021 the number of non-executive directors has been reduced by one as Jane Bailey’s reappointment as a non-executive director was deferred to allow her to lead the Hampshire and Isle of Wight saliva mass testing programme. Jane is expected to return to the board of directors in her non-executive director role by 1 July 2021. Paragraph B.1.2 of the NHS foundation trust code of governance provides that at least half the board of directors, excluding the chair, should comprise non-executive directors determined by the board to be independent. Pending the reappointment of Jane Bailey as a non-executive director, the Trust has been operating with one fewer non-executive directors than is required by the Trust’s constitution and the Trust has been non-compliant with this paragraph of the code. During this period the provisions of the Trust’s constitution that a quorum for meetings of the board of directors requires at least one non-executive director and one executive director to be present and for the chair to have a second and casting vote in the case of an equal vote continued to apply. The board of directors has given careful consideration to the range of skills and experience it requires to run the Trust. Together the members of the board of directors bring a wide range of skills and experience to the Trust, such that the Board achieves balance and completeness at the highest level. The chair was determined to be independent on his appointment and the other non-executive directors have been determined to be independent in both character and judgement. This included specific consideration of Jane Bailey’s continued independence following her role leading the Hampshire and Isle of Wight saliva mass testing programme. The chair, executive directors and non-executive directors have declared any business interests that they have. Each director has declared their interests at public meetings of the board of directors. The register of interests is available on the Trust’s website. 30 The current members of the board of directors are: Non-executive directors Peter Hollins Chair Peter graduated in chemistry from Hertford College, Oxford. Joining Imperial Chemical Industries in 1973, he undertook a series of increasingly senior roles in marketing and then general management. Following three years in the Netherlands as general manager of ICI Resins BV, in 1992 he was appointed as chief operating officer of EVC in Brussels – a joint venture between ICI and Enichem of Italy. He played a key role in the flotation of the company in 1994, before returning in 1998 to the UK as chief executive officer of British Energy where he remained until 2001. From 2001, he held various chairmanships and non-executive directorships. In 2003, he decided to return to an executive role as chief executive of the British Heart Foundation in which post he remained until retirement in March 2013. He joined Southampton University Hospital Trust as a non-executive director in 2010, became senior independent director and deputy chairman of UHS in 2014 and was appointed chair in April 2016. Trust roles: • Chair of remuneration and appointment committee • Chair of governors’ nomination committee Jane Bailey Non-executive director In 1985, Jane joined the pharmaceutical company Glaxo as a management trainee, having graduated from London University with a degree in environmental science and pharmacology. Here she rose to senior commercial vice-president, gaining experience of a broad range of disease areas across different regions of the world. She specialised in leading global research and development teams in the formation of strategies to bring new medicines to patients. She also worked to ensure that the medicines developed were supported by robust evidence demonstrating their clinical and cost-effectiveness. In delivering this she gained extensive experience of leading large diverse teams across a complex global organisation. For five years, Jane ran her own strategy development consultancy, working across a breadth of healthcare organisations. In 2017 Jane gained an MSc in public health, with distinction, at King’s College, London University. Her studies focused on how to ensure the public are engaged in development of healthcare services and how social theories can help inform effective disease prevention and management. Jane is a director of Wessex NHS Procurement Limited, a joint venture between the Trust and Hampshire Hospitals NHS Foundation Trust and a director of Healthwatch Portsmouth. Trust roles: • Deputy chair and senior independent director • Chair of finance and investment committee • Audit and risk committee member • Charitable funds committee member • People and organisational development committee member • Remuneration and appointment committee member • Wellbeing Guardian 31 Non-executive directors Dave Bennett Non-executive director Dave graduated in chemistry from the University of Southampton before entering management consulting, becoming a partner in Accenture’s strategy practice. In 2003 he joined Exel Logistics (later acquired by DHL), managing the company’s healthcare business across Europe and the Middle East. During this time, he established NHS Supply Chain, a UK organisation responsible for procuring and delivering medical consumables for the NHS in England, as well as sourcing capital equipment. Dave joined the board of Cable & Wireless as sales director in 2008. He later set up his own strategy consulting practice serving the healthcare sector, completing numerous projects in the UK and the US. Dave has also served as a non-executive director at The Royal Bournemouth and Christchurch Hospitals NHS Foundation Trust between 2009 and 2016, where he chaired the Trust’s quality committee. Dave is a non-executive director at the Faculty of Leadership and Medical Management and a director of Royal College of General Practitioners (RCGP) Enterprises Ltd and RCGP Conferences Ltd. Trust roles: • Chair of charitable funds committee • Chair of finance and investment committee (from 1 January 2021) • Audit and risk committee member (from 9 February 2021) • Quality committee member • Remuneration and appointment committee member • Chair of Trust’s organ donation committee 32 Non-executive directors Cyrus Cooper Non-executive director Cyrus Cooper is professor of rheumatology and director of the MRC Lifecourse Epidemiology Unit. He is also vice-dean of the faculty of medicine at the University of Southampton and professor of epidemiology at the Nuffield Department of Orthopaedics (rheumatology and musculoskeletal sciences, University of Oxford). He leads an internationally competitive programme of research into the epidemiology of musculoskeletal disorders, most notably osteoporosis. His key research contributions have been: • discovery of the developmental influences which contribute to the risk of osteoporosis and hip fracture in late adulthood • demonstration that maternal vitamin D insufficiency is associated with sub-optimal bone mineral accrual in childhood • characterisation of the definition and incidence rates of vertebral fractures • leadership of large pragmatic randomised controlled trials of calcium and vitamin D supplementation in the elderly as immediate preventative strategies against hip fracture. He is president of the International Osteoporosis Foundation, chair of the BHF Project Grants Committee, an emeritus NIHR senior investigator, a director of The Rank Prize Funds and associate editor of Osteoporosis International. He has previously served as chairman of the Scientific Advisors Committee (International Osteoporosis Foundation), the MRC Population Health Sciences Research Network and the National Osteoporosis Society of Great Britain. He has also been president of the Bone Research Society of Great Britain and has worked on numerous Department of Health, European Community and World Health Organisation committees and working groups. Cyrus has published extensively on osteoporosis and rheumatic disorders and pioneered clinical studies on the developmental origins of peak bone mass. In 2015, he was awarded an OBE for services to medical research. Trust roles: • Quality committee member • Remunerati
Url: /Media/UHS-website-2019/Docs/About-the-Trust/Annual-reports-and-quality-accounts/annual-report-20-21.pdf

Papers Trust Board - 13 January 2026

Description: Date Time Location Chair Apologies Agenda Trust Board – Open Session 13/01/2026 9:00 - 13:00 Conference Room, Heartbeat Education Centre Jenni Douglas-Todd Diana Eccles 1 Chair’s Welcome, Apologies and Declarations of Interest 9:00 Note apologies for absence, and to hear any declarations of interest relating to any item on the Agenda. 2 Patient Story The patient story provides an opportunity for the Board to reflect on the experiences of patients and staff within the Trust and understand what the Trust could do better. 3 Minutes of Previous Meeting held on 11 November 2025 9:15 Approve the minutes of the previous meeting held on 11 November 2025 4 Matters Arising and Summary of Agreed Actions To discuss any matters arising from the minutes, and to agree on the status of any actions assigned at the previous meeting. 5 QUALITY, PERFORMANCE and FINANCE Quality includes: clinical effectiveness, patient safety, and patient experience 5.1 Briefing from the Chair of the Finance, Investment & Cash Committee 9:20 David Liverseidge, Chair 5.2 Briefing from the Chair of the People and Organisational Development 9:30 Committee Jane Harwood, Chair 5.3 Briefing from the Chair of the Quality Committee 9:40 including Maternity and Neonatal Safety 2025-26 Quarter 2 Report Tim Peachey, Chair 5.4 Chief Executive Officer's Report 9:50 Receive and note the report Sponsor: David French, Chief Executive Officer 5.5 Performance KPI Report for Month 8 10:20 Review and discuss the report Sponsor: Andy Hyett, Chief Operating Officer 5.6 11:00 5.7 11:15 5.8 11:25 5.9 11:30 5.10 11:45 5.11 11:55 5.12 12:05 5.13 12:15 6 6.1 12:25 7 12:35 8 Break Finance Report for Month 8 Review and discuss the report Sponsor: Ian Howard, Chief Financial Officer ICB System Report for Month 8 Receive and discuss the report Sponsor: Ian Howard, Chief Financial Officer People Report for Month 8 Review and discuss the report Sponsor: Steve Harris, Chief People Officer Learning from Deaths 2025-26 Quarter 2 Report Review and discuss the report Sponsor: Paul Grundy, Chief Medical Officer Attendee: Jenny Milner, Associate Director of Patient Experience Infection Prevention and Control 2025-26 Quarter 2 Report Review and discuss the report Sponsor: Natasha Watts, Acting Chief Nursing Officer Attendees: Julian Sutton, Clinical Lead, Department of Infection/Julie Brooks, Deputy Director of Infection Prevention and Control Medicines Management Annual Report 2024-25 Receive and discuss the report Sponsor: Paul Grundy, Chief Medical Officer Attendee: James Allen, Chief Pharmacist Annual Ward Staffing Nursing Establishment Review 2025 Discuss and approve the review Sponsor: Natasha Watts, Acting Chief Nursing Officer CORPORATE GOVERNANCE, RISK and INTERNAL CONTROL Annual Assurance for the NHS England Core Standards for Emergency Preparedness, Resilience and Response (EPRR) Review and discuss the report Sponsor: Andy Hyett, Chief Operating Officer Attendee: John Mcgonigle, Emergency Planning & Resilience Manager Any other business Raise any relevant or urgent matters that are not on the agenda Note the date of the next meeting: 10 March 2026 Page 2 9 Resolution regarding the Press, Public and Others Sponsor: Jenni Douglas-Todd, Trust Chair To agree, as permitted by the National Health Service Act 2006 (as amended), the Trust's Constitution and the Standing Orders of the Board of Directors, that representatives of the press, members of the public and others not invited to attend to the next part of the meeting be excluded due to the confidential nature of the business to be transacted. 10 Follow-up discussion with governors 12:45 Page 3 Agenda links to the Board Assurance Framework (BAF) 13 January 2026 – Open Session Overview of the BAF Risk 1a: Lack of capacity to appropriately respond to emergency demand, manage the increasing waiting lists for elective demand, and provide timely diagnostics, that results in avoidable harm to patients. 1b: Due to the current challenges, we fail to provide patients and their families / carers with a high-quality experience of care and positive patient outcomes. 1c: We do not effectively plan for and implement infection prevention and control measures that reduce the number of hospital-acquired infections and limit the number of nosocomial outbreaks of infection. 2a: We do not take full advantage of our position as a leading University teaching hospital with a growing, reputable, and innovative research and development portfolio, attracting the best staff and efficiently delivering the best possible treatments and care for our patients. 3a: We are unable to meet current and planned service requirements due to the unavailability of staff to fulfil key roles. 3b: We fail to develop a diverse, compassionate, and inclusive workforce, providing a more positive staff experience for all staff. 3c: We fail to create a sustainable and innovative education and development response to meet the current and future workforce needs identified in the Trust’s longer-term workforce plan. 4a: We do not implement effective models to deliver integrated and networked care, resulting in sub-optimal patient experience and outcomes, increased numbers of admissions and increases in patients’ length of stay. 5a: We are unable to deliver a financial breakeven position, resulting in: inability to move out of the NHS England Recovery Support Programme, NHS England imposing additional controls/undertakings, and a reducing cash balance impacting the Trust’s ability to invest in line with its capital plan, estates/digital strategies, and in transformation initiatives. 5b: We do not adequately maintain, improve and develop our estate to deliver our clinical services and increase capacity. 5c: Our digital technology or infrastructure fails to the extent that it impacts our ability to deliver care effectively and safely within the organisation, 5d: We fail to prioritise green initiatives to deliver a trajectory that will reduce our direct and indirect carbon footprint by 80% by 2028-2032 (compared with a 1990 baseline) and reach net zero direct carbon emissions by 2040 and net zero indirect carbon emissions by 2045. Agenda links to the BAF No Item Linked BAF risk(s) 5.5 Performance KPI Report for Month 8 5.7 Finance Report for Month 8 5.8 ICB System Report for Month 8 5.9 People Report for Month 8 5.10 Learning from Deaths 2025-26 Quarter 2 Report 5.11 Infection Prevention and Control 2025-26 Quarter 2 Report 5.12 Medicines Management Annual Report 2024-25 5.13 Annual Ward Staffing Nursing Establishment Review 2025 6.1 Annual Assurance for the NHS England Core Standards for Emergency Preparedness, Resilience and Response (EPRR) 1a, 1b, 1c 5a 5a 3a, 3b, 3c 1b 1c 1b 1b, 3a 1b Appetite (Category) Minimal (Safety) Current risk rating 4x5 20 Cautious (Experience) Minimal (Safety) 4x4 16 4x4 16 Open (Technology & Innovation) 3x4 12 Open (workforce) Open (workforce) Open (workforce) 4x5 20 4x3 12 4x4 16 Cautious (Effectiveness) 3x3 9 Cautious (Finance) 5x5 25 Target risk rating 4 x 2 Apr 6 27 3 x 2 Apr 6 27 2 x 3 Apr 6 27 3 x 2 Mar 6 27 4 x 3 Mar 12 30 4 x 2 Mar 8 30 3 x 2 Mar 6 29 3 x 2 Dec 6 25 3 x 3 Apr 9 30 Cautious (Effectiveness) Open (Technology & Innovation) Open (Technology & Innovation) 4x5 20 3x4 12 2x4 8 4 x 2 Apr 8 30 3 x 2 Apr 6 27 2 x 2 Dec 4 27 Does this item facilitate movement towards or away from the intended target risk score and appetite? Towards Away Neither x x x x x x x x x Minutes Trust Board – Open Session Date 11/11/2025 Time 9:00 – 13:00 Location Conference Room, Heartbeat Education Centre Chair Jenni Douglas-Todd (JD-T) Present Diana Eccles, NED (DE) Keith Evans, Deputy Chair and NED (KE) David French, Chief Executive Officer (DAF) Paul Grundy, Chief Medical Officer (PG) Steve Harris, Chief People Officer (SH) Jane Harwood, NED/Senior Independent Director (JH) Ian Howard, Chief Financial Officer (IH) Andy Hyett, Chief Operating Officer (AH) David Liverseidge, NED (DL) Tim Peachey, NED (TP) Alison Tattersall, NED (AT) Natasha Watts, Acting Chief Nursing Officer (NW) In attendance Craig Machell, Associate Director of Corporate Affairs and Company Secretary (CM) Lauren Anderson, Corporate Governance and Risk Manager (LA) (item 6.2) Martin de Sousa, Director of Strategy and Partnerships (MdS) (item 6.1) Lucinda Hood, Head of Medical Directorate (LH) (item 5.13) Diana Hulbert, Guardian of Safe Working Hours and Emergency Department Consultant (DH) (item 5.12) Vickie Purdie, Head of Patient Safety (VP) (item 7.3) Kate Pryde, Clinical Director for Improvement and Clinical Effectiveness (KP) (item 5.13) Scott Spencer, Health and Safety Advisor (SS) (item 7.3) 4 governors (observing) 2 members of staff (observing) 1. Chair’s Welcome, Apologies and Declarations of Interest The Chair welcomed attendees to the meeting. There were no interests to declare in the business to be transacted at the meeting. It was noted that no apologies had been received. The Chair provided an overview of meetings she had held and events that she had attended since the previous Board meeting. 2. Patient Story Item deferred to the next meeting. 3. Minutes of the Previous Meeting held on 9 September 2025 The draft minutes tabled to the meeting were agreed to be an accurate record of the meeting held on 9 September 2025, subject to a minor correction at 5.10. Page 1 4. Matters Arising and Summary of Agreed Actions The matters arising and actions were noted. • Actions 1281, 1283 and 1284 were closed. • Action 1282 was to be addressed through item 5.6 below. • In respect of action 1285, the Quality Committee would monitor progress on complaints response times. 5. QUALITY, PERFORMANCE and FINANCE 5.1 Briefing from the Chair of the Audit and Risk Committee Keith Evans was invited to present the Committee Chair’s Report in respect of the meeting held on 13 October 2025, the content of which was noted. It was further noted that: • In terms of the internal audit reports, which had been received by the committee, whilst there were a number of points for the Trust to address, no areas of significant concern had been identified. • There was a focus on ‘imposter fraud’ whereby individuals who had turned up to carry out a shift were not who they claimed to be. Whilst there had been no reported incidents at the Trust, the Trust had implemented controls at the ward level, which would be subject to testing during 2025/26. 5.2 Briefing from the Chair of the Finance, Investment & Cash Committee David Liverseidge was invited to present the Committee Chair’s Reports in respect of the meetings held on 22 September and 3 November 2025, the contents of which were noted. It was further noted that: • In September 2025, the Trust had reported that it was in line with its Financial Recovery Plan. Of the £110m Cost Improvement Programme (CIP) target, 76% had been fully developed. • The committee had reviewed the Finance Report for Month 6 (item 5.8), noting that the Trust had reported an in-month deficit of £5.4m, which was in line with the Financial Recovery Plan. • The committee had expressed concern that 17% of the CIP target was not fully developed and that the Trust was £2.5m off-track in terms of delivery of the target at Month 6. • Whilst progress had been made in terms of addressing patients with no criteria to reside and mental health patients, this remained an area of concern. • The committee considered the NHS England Medium Term Planning Framework, noting that the first submission by the Trust was due prior to Christmas 2025. 5.3 Briefing from the Chair of the People and Organisational Development Committee Jane Harwood was invited to present the Committee Chair’s Reports in respect of the meetings held on 22 September and 3 November 2025, the contents of which were noted. It was further noted that: • There continued to be little improvement in terms of the number of patients with no criteria to reside or mental health patients, which impacted staffing numbers. • The Trust was adopting a harder line in respect of its approach to violence and aggression, which included a greater willingness to exclude individuals. • The current participation rate in the Staff Survey was lower than the national average, which was likely indicative of staff morale and engagement. Page 2 • The Trust’s workforce numbers remained above plan, with limited options available to address this issue, especially in the absence of funding for restructuring costs. 5.4 Briefing from the Chair of the Quality Committee Tim Peachey was invited to present the Committee Chair’s Report in respect of the meeting held on 13 October 2025, the content of which was noted. It was further noted that: • The committee received an update in respect of mental health patients, noting that although there were significant issues in the Emergency Department, the whole pathway for these patients remained a problem. • The committee carried out a six-monthly review of the Trust’s progress against its Quality Priorities, noting that good progress had been made on four of the six priorities and two were slightly behind. 5.5 Chief Executive Officer’s Report David French was invited to present the Chief Executive Officer’s Report, the content of which was noted. It was further noted that: • NHS England had published the Medium Term Planning Framework, which was intended to encourage organisations to think beyond a 12-month time horizon and to progress the NHS 10-Year Plan. The Trust was expected to provide its first submission prior to Christmas 2025, but the detailed planning assumptions had yet to be received from NHS England. It was noted that a more detailed report on the Medium Term Planning Framework was to be received as part of the closed session of the meeting. • The Strategic Commissioning Framework had been published by NHS England, which provided welcome clarifications about the future role of integrated care boards. • The Trust had been placed into Tier 1 for both Urgent and Emergency Care and for Elective performance. There was a national expectation that trusts would have no patients waiting over 65 weeks for elective care by 21 December 2025. Where organisations had more than 100 such patients at the end of October 2025, they had been placed into Tier 1. The Trust was taking steps, including mutual aid, to attempt to address the number of long waiters, but there was insufficient capacity in the system. • Resident doctors were due to strike for a further five-day period commencing on 14 November 2025, having rejected the Government’s latest offer to resolve the ongoing dispute with the British Medical Association. • The Hampshire and Isle of Wight Integrated Care Board and NHS England South East Region had carried out a visit to the Trust’s paediatric hearing services in May 2025. The report, received in October 2025, had been positive about the service. • The Trust and the University of Southampton had been awarded £16.3m by the National Institute for Health and Care Research. The Trust was one of only four organisations out of 15 applications to receive an award. • The NHS Business Services Authority had announced the award of a £1.2bn contract to Infosys to deliver a new and enhanced workforce management system for the NHS to replace the existing Electronic Staff Record system. The 2030 target date for implementation was considered ambitious. Further details would be considered by the People and Organisational Development Committee when available. Page 3 5.6 Performance KPI Report for Month 6 Andy Hyett was invited to present the ‘spotlight’ report in respect of Diagnostics, the content of which was noted. It was further noted that: • Diagnostics performance was a key element of the pathway, as delays in diagnosis had a consequential impact on the overall length of pathways such as those for cancer and patients on a Referral To Treatment pathway. • Although there were some concerns with Diagnostics in the Trust, the Trust, generally, performed better than other organisations. The Board discussed the matters raised in the Diagnostics ‘spotlight’. This discussion is summarised below: • There had been a long-standing issue with waiting times for cystoscopy due to insufficient capacity. However, a plan was being developed to improve the situation, although it was considered appropriate that the plan should also address broader issues with urology as a whole. • There was concern regarding the availability of magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) scanners, particularly as two scanners were out-of-action. It was noted that the current set-up in terms of MRI scanners was not fit for the longer term and a strategy for the future needed to be developed. • There was a disparity between capacity and demand in respect of the neurophysiology service, as this service had previously relied on outsourcing. • Generally, activity was increasing, but overall performance appeared to be declining. There was also the additional financial challenge that Diagnostics was funded under a ‘block’ contract arrangement which did not fully take into account the demand for these services. • There were concerns about the electrical supply capacity at the Southampton General Hospital site and the ability of the Trust to expand its Diagnostic capacity with this limitation. It was considered that a better longer-term model would be for scanners at local community diagnostics centres. Actions Andy Hyett agreed to work on and present at either a future Board meeting or Trust Board Study Session the Trust’s longer-term strategy with respect to MRI scanners and imaging. Andy Hyett agreed to develop a longer-term plan for cystoscopy/urology and to report back to the Board during Quarter 4. Andy Hyett agreed to develop a long-term solution to the neurophysiology service. Andy Hyett was invited to present the Performance KPI Report for Month 6, the content of which was noted. It was further noted that: • The Trust’s Emergency Department had recorded performance of 67.6% against the four-hour standard during September 2025. The department remained busy with c.450 patients and 120 ambulance attendances per day. • There had been some initial performance impacts with the roll out of the MIYA system in the Emergency Department, but this appeared to have now been addressed with performance up to previous levels. • A number of initiatives were being introduced into the Emergency Department in order to improve performance. These included the layout of the service, pathway re-designs, having General Practitioners in the department, and arranging with non-urgent patients to attend at a scheduled time rather than waiting in the department. Page 4 • In October 2025, the Trust had recorded 363 patients waiting over 65 weeks on a Referral To Treatment pathway against a national target of no such patients by the end of December 2025. • The Trust was making use of the independent sector, weekend working, and was requesting capacity from other providers to address the number of patients waiting over 65 weeks. • The planned industrial action by resident doctors posed a challenge, noting that the national expectation was that trusts maintain 95% of their capacity during this period. It was noted that, in contrast to previous instances of industrial action, resident doctors were apparently less forthcoming in terms of whether they intended to participate in the industrial action. • The Trust continued to report one of the lowest Hospital Standardised Mortality Rates in England. • The Trust’s cancer performance, based on a BBC article, was 21 out of 121 trusts. It was noted that whilst the number of patients being referred on a cancer pathway had increased significantly, the number of patients diagnosed with cancer had not materially changed. • There appeared to have been an increase in the number of pressure ulcers and ‘red flag’ incidents. Work was ongoing to address the findings of the pressure ulcer audit which had been presented to the Quality Committee on 2 June 2025. • The number of patients having no criteria to reside and mental health patients remained high. Actions Andy Hyett agreed to clarify the basis of the calculation of the ‘Watch & Reserve antibiotics usage per 1,000 adms’ metric. 5.7 Break 5.8 Finance Report for Month 6 Ian Howard was invited to present the Finance Report for Month 6, the content of which was noted. It was further noted that: • The Trust had submitted its Financial Recovery Plan to NHS England in August 2025, which committed to an additional £23m improvement in the Trust’s financial position to deliver a full-year position of a £54.9m deficit. In the absence of these additional improvements, the Trust had been forecasting a year-end position of a £78m deficit. The revised target was subject to a number of assumptions, including the need for demand management and improvements in non-criteria to reside and mental health patient numbers. • There were a number of risks to the achievement of the Financial Recovery Plan, including whether there would be improvements in mental health and non-criteria to reside and/or steps taken to manage demand, high levels of activity, and whether it would be possible to reduce the workforce and close theatres. The need for the Trust to focus on achieving the 65-week wait target in particular could impact the Trust’s ability to close capacity. • The Trust had reported an in-month deficit of £5.4m (£30.8m year-to-date), which was in line with the trajectory set out in the Financial Recovery Plan. The Trust’s underlying deficit had seen some marginal improvement during the period. • The Trust’s cash position remains an area of significant concern. Cash requests had been made to NHS England, but the latest request for November 2025 had been rejected. It was therefore likely that the Trust would need to manage its supplier payments in accordance with its available cash. Page 5 5.9 ICS System Report for Month 6 Ian Howard was invited to present the ICS System Report for Month 6, the content of which was noted. It was further noted that: • The Hampshire and Isle of Wight Integrated Care System had reported a year- to-date deficit of £48m. • A significant improvement in the run-rate would be required for the system to be able to deliver its 2025/26 plan. • The system was one of the worst in England in terms of the number of beds occupied by patients having no criteria to reside with approximately 23% of beds being occupied by such patients compared with a national average of 12%. • The system was also below plan in terms of its targets for access to General Practitioners and targets relating to mental health patients. It was noted that the performance in these areas had a consequential impact on the Trust’s performance in areas such as urgent and emergency care performance. 5.10 People Report for Month 6 Steve Harris was invited to present the People Report for Month 6, the content of which was noted. It was further noted that: • The overall workforce fell by 73 whole-time-equivalents (WTE) during September 2025 and was reported as being 54 WTE above the Trust’s 2025/26 plan. The reduction in workforce had been driven through a combination of the impact of the recruitment controls, mutually agreed resignation scheme (MARS) leavers, and a significant drop in use of temporary staff during the month. • On 15 October 2025, the Trust had heard the collective grievance brought by the Royal College of Nursing in respect of the removal of enhanced NHS Professionals rates. It was decided not to reverse the decision in order to maintain equity with the rest of the workforce and consistency across other local providers. A number of actions had been agreed following the hearing. • Sickness rates had increased to 3.8%, although the Trust still benchmarked well against peers. • There were concerns about the potential impact of influenza during the winter period and therefore the Trust was taking a number of actions to promote vaccination of staff. The Trust was currently third in terms of uptake in the Region. • The level of participation in the national Staff Survey remained a challenge with only 32% of staff having completed the survey compared with a national average of 38%. It was considered likely that the recent difficult decisions taken and the impact on staff was impacting staff experience and engagement. • The People and Organisational Development Committee would be examining statutory and mandatory training levels together with the latest proposed national changes. Page 6 5.11 NHSE Audit and review of 'Developing Workforce Safeguards' including UHS Self-Assessment Return Natasha Watts was invited to present the NHS England audit and review of ‘Developing Workforce Safeguards’ (2018), including the Trust’s Self-Assessment Return, the content of which was noted. It was further noted that: • ‘Developing Workforce Safeguards’ was published in October 2018 and included a range of standards to assure safe staffing across the workforce. NHS England had initiated an audit, review and improvement plan amidst concern about a national reduction in compliance. • The Trust had submitted a self-assessment as part of this NHS England review. This assessment showed that the Trust continued to comply with the majority of the standards. • The audit exercise has been used as an opportunity to identify opportunities for improvement. Twelve recommendations have been developed, of which nine were assessed as ‘green’ and three as ‘amber’. 5.12 Guardian of Safe Working Hours Quarterly Report and Update on 10-Point Plan Diana Hulbert was invited to present the Guardian of Safe Working Hours Quarterly Report and Update on the 10-Point Plan, the content of which was noted. It was further noted that: • Resident doctors were due to strike for five days from 14 November 2025. This would be the thirteenth strike in recent years. It was noted that, in addition to pay, the dispute also concerned working conditions and the shortage of posts and consequent risk to resident doctors of unemployment. • The Trust had performed a self-assessment against the 10-Point Plan and it was noted that the majority of the plan’s contents had been considered by the Trust for some time. There were also a number of dependencies on the part of NHS England in areas such as lead employer models. • A national review of statutory and mandatory training was expected to enable portability of training records to facilitate staff moving between NHS organisations. • There had been significant improvements in respect of gaps in rotas. 5.13 Annual Clinical Outcomes Summary Luci Hood and Kate Pryde were invited to present the Annual Clinical Outcomes Summary Report, the content of which was noted. It was further noted that: • The paper provided an overview of the clinical outcomes reviewed by the Clinical Assurance Meeting for Effectiveness and Outcomes (CAMEO) over the 12-month period to September 2025. • The majority of specialities provide reports to CAMEO, although outcome data can be more difficult in some areas to capture than in others. • The outcomes reviewed by the CAMEO and outputs from this body were also influencing the development of the Trust’s clinical strategy. • The strains on the capacity of services posed a risk to clinical outcomes. Page 7 • There was potential that a ‘quality’ override could form part of the NHS Oversight Framework in the future, operating in a similar manner to the ‘financial’ override by limiting the segmentations available to an organisation. 6. STRATEGY and BUSINESS PLANNING 6.1 Corporate Objectives 2025-26 Quarter 2 Review Martin De Sousa was invited to present the review of Corporate Objectives 2025/26 for the second quarter, the content of which was noted. It was further noted that: • Of the 12 objectives agreed for 2025/26, six were rated ‘green’, four were ‘amber’ and two were ‘red’. • The ‘red’ rated risks were that relating to the Trust’s financial performance and that relating to the Trust’s achievement of its workforce plan for 2025/26. 6.2 Board Assurance Framework (BAF) Update Lauren Anderson was invited to present the Board Assurance Framework update, the content of which was noted. It was further noted that: • BDO had completed its audit of the Trust’s risk maturity and had presented its report to the Audit and Risk Committee on 13 October 2025. The audit had highlighted a number of strengths including the Board Assurance Framework, risk definition, and use of risk in decision-making. In terms of opportunities for improvement, the audit report suggested some improvements in articulation of operational risks and use of ‘SMART’ methodology for actions. • The Board Assurance Framework had been reviewed by relevant executive directors and committees since it was last presented to the Board. There had been no changes to the ratings or target dates. 7. CORPORATE GOVERNANCE, RISK and INTERNAL CONTROL 7.1 Feedback from the Council of Governors’ (COG) Meeting 28 October 2025 The Chair presented a summary of the Council of Governors’ meeting held on 28 October 2025. It was noted that the meeting had considered the following matters: • Chief Executive Officer’s Performance Report • Governor attendance at Council of Governors’ meetings • Review of the Council of Governors’ Expenses Reimbursement Protocol • Appointment of Jane Harwood as Deputy Chair with effect from 1 October 2025 • Membership engagement • Feedback from the Governors’ Nomination Committee It was noted that the Trust’s work on violence and aggression received particular attention from the Governors. 7.2 Register of Seals and Chair’s Action Report The paper ‘Register of Seals and Chair’s Actions Report’ was presented to the meeting, the content of which was noted. Page 8 It was further noted that one further item had been sealed on 7 November: Deed of Guarantee between University Hospital Southampton NHS Foundation Trust (Guarantor) and CHG-Meridian UK Limited (Beneficiary) regarding the payment and due performance obligations of UHS Estates Limited (UEL) under the Guaranteed Contract and specifically the Stryker Power Tools delivered to UEL under the pre-contract open build period with CHG. Seal number 307 on 7 November 2025. Decision: The Board agreed to ratify the application of the Trust Seal to the documents listed in the ‘Register of Seals and Chair’s Actions Report’ and to the additional document referred to above. 7.3 Health and Safety Services Annual Report 2024-25 Spencer Scott was invited to present the Health and Safety Services Annual Report 2024/25, the content of which was noted. It was further noted that: • The number of incidents reportable pursuant to the Reporting of Injuries, Diseases and Dangerous Occurrences Regulations (RIDDOR) had increased substantially to 68 such incidents compared to 39 in 2023/24. The majority of these incidents related to moving and handling or exposure to infectious diseases. • There was a concern that there had been a reduction in the number of health and safety related reports and escalations whilst at the same time the number of RIDDORs had increased. • Four areas of concern were highlighted: Entonox surveillance of maternity staff, display screen equipment compliance, the Southampton General Hospital loading bay, and workplace temperatures during the summer. 8. Any other business There was no other business. 9. Note the date of the next meeting: 13 January 2026 10. Items circulated to the Board for reading The item circulated to the Board for reading was noted. There being no further business, the meeting concluded. 11. Resolution regarding the Press, Public and Others Decision: The Board resolved that, as permitted by the National Health Service Act 2006 (as amended), the Trust’s Constitution and the Standing Orders of the board of directors, that representatives of the press, members of the public and others not invited to attend to the next part of the meeting be excluded due to the confidential nature of the business to be transacted. The meeting was adjourned. Page 9 List of action items Agenda item Assigned to Deadline Status Trust Board – Open Session 15/07/2025 - 5.11 Freedom to Speak Up Report 1267. Data Mbabazi, Christine 10/03/2026 Pending Explanation action item Christine Mbabazi to include data from other mechanisms for reporting concerns in future Freedom to Speak Up reports. Trust Board – Open Session 09/09/2025 - 8 Any other business 1286. Organ donation Machell, Craig 03/02/2026 Pending Explanation action item Craig Machell agreed to add organ donation to the agenda of a future Trust Board Study Session. Update: Scheduled for TBSS on 03/02/26. Trust Board – Open Session 11/11/2025 - 5.6 Performance KPI Report for Month 6 1293. MRI scanners and imaging Hyett, Andy 13/01/2026 Pending Explanation action item Andy Hyett agreed to work on and present at either a future Board meeting or Trust Board Study Session the Trust’s longer-term strategy with respect to MRI scanners and imaging. 1294. Cystopscopy/urology Hyett, Andy 13/01/2026 Pending Explanation action item Andy Hyett agreed to develop a longer-term plan for cystoscopy/urology and to report back to the Board during Quarter 4. Page 1 of 2 Agenda item Assigned to Deadline Status Trust Board – Open Session 11/11/2025 - 5.6 Performance KPI Report for Month 6 1295. Neurophysiology Hyett, Andy 13/01/2026 Pending Explanation action item Andy Hyett agreed to develop a long-term solution to the neurophysiology service. 1296. Watch & Reserve antibiotics usage Hyett, Andy 13/01/2026 Pending Explanation action item Andy Hyett agreed to clarify the basis of the calculation of the ‘Watch & Reserve antibiotics usage per 1,000 adms’ metric. Page 2 of 2 Agenda Item 5.1 i) Committee Chair’s Report to the Trust Board of Directors 13 January 2026 Committee: Finance, Investment and Cash Committee Meeting Date: 24 November 2025 Key Messages: Assurance: (Reports/Papers reviewed by the Committee also appearing on the Board agenda) Any Other Matters: • The committee received an update in respect of the Trust’s commercial activities, noting that the Trust had robust systems in place to maximise cost recovery for private patient and overseas visitor income. The Trust’s private patient unit project continued to progress. The Trust was also seeking a partner to manage its parking provision. • The committee received the Finance Report for Month 7. The Trust had reported a £5.1m in-month deficit (£35.9m year-to-date), which was in line with the trajectory contained in the Financial Recovery Plan. The underlying deficit remained flat at £6.4m. Whilst there had been a slight reduction in the number of mental health patients, there were c.240 patients having no criteria to reside at any point during the period. There was an increased level of scrutiny in respect of non-pay expenditure. • The committee reviewed an update on the Trust’s measures for financial improvement, noting that the Trust was forecasting achievement of £85-95m against its target of £110m Cost Improvement Programme delivery for 2025/26. • The committee noted the Trust’s approach and the timelines associated with the Medium Term Planning submission. It was noted that the framework set ambitious financial and performance targets. • The committee received an update in respect of the Trust’s Theatre Experience Programme, noting that there had been a 3% increase in utilisation and a 3% reduction in cancellations. • The committee reviewed the Trust’s productivity, noting that the Trust’s productivity had fallen by 3.3% compared to the prior year due to high-cost growth. • The committee received an update in respect of the Trust’s cash position and forecast and supported a proposal to request further cash support for January 2026. • The committee received an update on Capital Planning for 2026/272029/30. It was noted that it was expected that the Trust would be allocated c.£40m per annum, although there were concerns about the impact of the Trust’s cash position and the ability of the Trust to meet this level of expenditure. N/A N/A Page 1 of 2 Assurance Rating: Substantial There is a robust series of suitably designed internal controls in place upon Assurance which the organisation relies to manage the risk of failure of the continuous and effective achievement of the objectives of the process, which at the time of our review were being consistently applied. Reasonable There is a series of controls in place, however there are potential risks that Assurance may not be sufficient to ensure that the individual objectives of the process are achieved in a continuous and effective manner. Improvements are required to enhance the adequacy and effectiveness of the controls to mitigate these risks. Limited Assurance Controls in place are not sufficient to ensure that the organisation can rely upon them to manage the risks to the continuous and effective achievement of the objectives of the process. Significant improvements are required to improve the adequacy and effectiveness of the controls. No Assurance There is a fundamental breakdown or absence of core internal controls such that the organisation cannot rely upon them to manage the risks to the continuous and effective achievement of the objectives of the process. Immediate action is required to improve the adequacy and effectiveness of controls. Not Applicable Where assurance is not required and/or relevant. Risk Rating: Low Medium High Not Applicable Based on the report considered by the committee, there is little or no concern that the Trust will be unable to meet its stated objectives and/or plans. There is some concern that the Trust might not be able to fully meet its stated objectives and/or plans based on the information contained in the report considered by the committee. There is a significant risk that the Trust will not be able to meet its stated objectives and/or plans based on the information contained in the report considered by the committee. Where risk rating is not relevant. Page 2 of 2 Agenda Item 5.1 ii) Committee Chair’s Report to the Trust Board of Directors 13 January 2026 Committee: Finance, Investment and Cash Committee Meeting Date: 15 December 2025 Key Messages: • • • • • • The committee received the Finance Report for Month 8 (see below). The committee discussed the Trust’s future transformation programmes, noting that the areas of focus would be: urgent and emergency care, elective care, and automation of administrative processes. The committee was assured that the programmes were felt to be suitably ‘bold and ambitious’ and were grounded in realistic opportunities, rather than ‘blue sky’ ideas. The committee reviewed the draft capital plan for 2026/27 – 2029/30, noting that the Trust had been allocated c.£40m of capital departmental expenditure limit (CDEL) per year. It was noted that the Trust’s cash position could place constraints on the Trust’s capital programme. The opportunity to secure funding from national programmes outside of CDEL should be pursued vigorously. The plan was to be discussed in a Trust Board Study Session prior to submission in February 2026. The committee reviewed, challenged and discussed the Trust’s medium-term plan ahead of the first submission to NHS England on 17 December 2025. The committee provided feedback in respect of the proposed submission noting that some of the assumptions within the 2025/26 plan had not materialised with regard to matters such as reductions in non-criteria to reside numbers and the committee sought assurance that learnings had been applied to the development of the medium-term plan submission. The committee was assured that such assumed reductions within the 2026/27 plan were based purely on actions which were deemed to be within the Trust’s control. The committee suggested some changes with regard to the plan, particularly around growth assumptions in the cost base, and agreed to recommend the revised plan to the Board for approval. It was noted that more detail and reviews would be required prior to the final submission date in February 2026. The committee received an update in respect of the Trust’s cash position and supported a proposal to make a further request for cash support from NHS England for January 2026. The Trust reviewed and supported a proposal for transforming the Southern Counties Pathology network. Assurance: (Reports/Papers reviewed by the Committee also appearing on the Board agenda) 5.7 Finance Report for Month 8 Assurance Rating: Risk Rating: Substantial High • The Trust had reported an in-month deficit of £4.9m (£40m year-todate), which was consistent with the Trust’s Financial Recovery Plan. • November 2025 had been a challenging month due to costs associated with industrial action, patients with no criteria to reside and mental health patients. • The Trust had received c.£3m of income out of £6.1m for elective over-performance. • There had been a slight improvement in the Trust’s underlying deficit. Page 1 of 2 Any Other N/A Matters: Assurance Rating: Substantial There is a robust series of suitably designed internal controls in place upon Assurance which the organisation relies to manage the risk of failure of the continuous and effective achievement of the objectives of the process, which at the time of our review were being consistently applied. Reasonable There is a series of controls in place, however there are potential risks that Assurance may not be sufficient to ensure that the individual objectives of the process are achieved in a continuous and effective manner. Improvements are required to enhance the adequacy and effectiveness of the controls to mitigate these risks. Limited Assurance Controls in place are not sufficient to ensure that the organisation can rely upon them to manage the risks to the continuous and effective achievement of the objectives of the process. Significant improvements are required to improve the adequacy and effectiveness of the controls. No Assurance There is a fundamental breakdown or absence of core internal controls such that the organisation cannot rely upon them to manage the risks to the continuous and effective achievement of the objectives of the process. Immediate action is required to improve the adequacy and effectiveness of controls. Not Applicable Where assurance is not required and/or relevant. Risk Rating: Low Medium High Not Applicable Based on the report considered by the committee, there is little or no concern that the Trust will be unable to meet its stated objectives and/or plans. There is some concern that the Trust might not be able to fully meet its stated objectives and/or plans based on the information contained in the report considered by the committee. There is a significant risk that the Trust will not be able to meet its stated objectives and/or plans based on the information contained in the report considered by the committee. Where risk rating is not relevant. Page 2 of 2 Agenda Item 5.2 i) Committee Chair’s Report to the Trust Board of Directors 13 January 2026 Committee: People & Organisational Development Committee Meeting Date: 21 November 2025 Key Messages: • • • • The committee reviewed the People Report for Month 7 including progress against the workforce plan. During October 2025, the overall workforce grew by 14 whole-time-equivalents (WTE). Although the substantive workforce had reduced by 15 WTE, there had been lowerthan-expected turnover and increased temporary staffing usage due in part to high sickness levels. The Trust remained on track, however, with respect to its Financial Recovery Plan trajectory. There were concerns about the response rate to the Staff Survey, which was below the national average. The Trust’s vaccination campaign for staff had started well with the uptake rate for the flu vaccine amongst staff at 43%. The committee considered the outputs of the review by NHS England of statutory and mandatory training and the implications for UHS. It was noted that a revised framework would facilitate passporting of training between NHS organisations. The Trust was aligned to the Core Skills Training Framework across six out of eleven areas and ten out of eleven areas for the Utilising E-Learning for Health material. The committee received an update in respect of the Trust’s Inclusion and Belonging strategy. It was noted that resource constraints and the impact of the current financial and operational environment on staff morale had impacted progress towards achievement of the objectives set out in the strategy. The committee reviewed the People risks contained within the Trust’s Board Assurance Framework. Assurance: N/A (Reports/Papers reviewed by the Committee also appearing on the Board agenda) Any Other N/A Matters: Assurance Rating: Substantial There is a robust series of suitably designed internal controls in place upon Assurance which the organisation relies to manage the risk of failure of the continuous and effective achievement of the objectives of the process, which at the time of our review were being consistently applied. Reasonable There is a series of controls in place, however there are potential risks that Assurance may not be sufficient to ensure that the individual objectives of the process are achieved in a continuous and effective manner. Improvements are required to enhance the adequacy and effectiveness of the controls to mitigate these risks. Limited Assurance Controls in place are not sufficient to ensure that the organisation can rely upon them to manage the risks to the continuous and effective achievement of the objectives of the process. Significant improvements are required to improve the adequacy and effectiveness of the controls. Page 1 of 2 No Assurance Not Applicable Risk Rating: Low Medium High Not Applicable There is a fundamental breakdown or absence of core internal controls such that the organisation cannot rely upon them to manage the risks to the continuous and effective achievement of the objectives of the process. Immediate action is required to improve the adequacy and effectiveness of controls. Where assurance is not required and/or relevant. Based on the report considered by the committee, there is little or no concern that the Trust will be unable to meet its stated objectives and/or plans. There is some concern that the Trust might not be able to fully meet its stated objectives and/or plans based on the information contained in the report considered by the committee. There is a significant risk that the Trust will not be able to meet its stated objectives and/or plans based on the information contained in the report considered by the committee. Where risk rating is not relevant. Page 2 of 2 Agenda Item 5.2 ii) Committee Chair’s Report to the Trust Board of Directors 13 January 2026 Committee: People & Organisational Development Committee Meeting Date: 15 December 2025 Key Messages: Assurance: (Reports/Papers reviewed by the Committee also appearing on the Board agenda) • The committee reviewed the People Report for Month 8 (see below) including progress against the workforce plan and Financial Recovery Plan. • The committee considered the workforce implications of the Trust’s medium term plan submission, noting that there were a number of national expectations and targets, such as those relating to sickness rates and elimination of agency spend. In addition, the committee noted the risks associated with the plan, including those where the Trust was reliant on progress with respect to non-criteria to reside and mental health numbers. • The committee received an update regarding the Trust’s Violence and Aggression workstream, noting that the Trust had adopted a revised approach to violence, aggression and abuse directed at staff with a greater willingness to take action against violent/abusive patients and members of the public. A violence and aggression board had been established to provide executive oversight and leadership, and the Trust’s policy was being revised. This work would be accompanied by a comprehensive communication plan for both staff and members of the public. • The committee reviewed the Trust’s progress against its objectives for Year 4 of its People Strategy. 5.9 People Report for Month 8 Assurance Rating: Risk Rating: Substantial High • The overall workforce fell during November 2025, with substantive numbers falling by 52 whole-time-equivalents (WTE). However, temporary staffing use had increased during the month due to increased sickness and operational pressures, which offset much of the reduction in substantive numbers. • The Trust was over its original plan by 214 WTE despite a decrease of nearly 400 WTE since 31 March 2025. In order to hit the Trust’s Financial Recovery Plan target, the overall workforce would need to fall by a further 137 WTE (including a 72 WTE reduction in temporary staffing) by the end of March 2026. • A forecast based on the previous year’s temporary staffing usage for the remaining months of the year indicated that the Trust would end the year approximately 500 WTE above the Trust’s 2025/26 plan. • The Trust had submitted a baseline assessment against the 10 Point Plan to improve Resident Doctors’ working lives in August 2025, which indicated that the Trust compared favourably against other organisations in the South East. The main issues concerned space available for doctors to work in and timeliness of reimbursement of course-related expenses. • The Trust was expected to meet a target of 95% of job plans having been signed off prior to 31 March 2026. At the start of December 2025, 55% of job plans had been signed off. Page 1 of 2 Any Other Matters: • Sickness absence had increased in November 2025 to 4.2% in month due to seasonal illnesses. • The staff survey closed on 28 November 2025. The completion rate for the staff survey had been lower t
Url: /Media/UHS-website-2019/Docs/About-the-Trust/Trust-governance-and-corporate-docs/2026-Trust-documents/Papers-Trust-Board-13-January-2026.pdf

Annual report 2021-2022

Description: 2021/22 Incorporating the quality report University Hospital Southampton NHS Foundation Trust Annual Report and Accounts 2021/22 Presented to Parliament pursuant to Schedule 7, paragraph 25(4)(a) of the National Health Service Act 2006 © 2022 University Hospital Southampton NHS Foundation Trust Table of contents Welcome from our chair and chief executive 6 Overview and performance 8 Performance report 9 Overview 10 Accountability report 36 Directors’ report 37 Remuneration report 59 Staff report 72 Annual governance statement 94 Quality report 105 Statement on quality from the chief executive 106 Priorities for improvement and statements of assurance from the board 109 Other information 182 Annual accounts 210 Statement from the chief financial officer 211 Auditor’s report 212 Auditor’s report including audit certificate 218 Foreword to the accounts 220 Statement of Comprehensive Income 221 Statement of Financial Position 222 Statement of Changes in Taxpayers’ Equity 223 Statement of Cash Flows 224 Notes to the accounts 225 5 Welcome from our chair and chief executive As we emerged from the most severe phase of the COVID-19 pandemic, 2021/22 was another challenging year for everyone at University Hospital Southampton NHS Foundation Trust (UHS). It was also a year on which we can look back with pride at what we achieved together in unprecedented circumstances. Amongst many notable achievements over the past twelve months, we have: • Led on globally ground-breaking research trials to inform the country’s COVID-19 vaccine booster strategy, including the world’s first COVID-19 vaccine booster study of mixed schedules. • Successfully managed infection prevention and control, putting us amongst the best in the country for minimising nosocomial spread. This was against a backdrop of, at times, R-rates in our local community that were amongst the highest in the country. • Published new strategies for digital and sustainability, which respectively set out how we are revolutionising our technical capability to meet changing patient needs and responding to the growing threat posed by climate change as part of the NHS-wide commitment to reaching carbon net zero by 2045. The pandemic also highlighted the vital importance of our staff’s wellbeing so we could continue to meet the needs of the most vulnerable and sick within our community and beyond. In response, we launched and have sustained a comprehensive programme of support to help our staff recognise and address the physical and emotional burden of the last two years. In financial terms, the Trust achieved its forecast breakeven position in 2021/22 on a turnover of £1.15 billion. Our strong, long-term financial performance meant we could continue investing in the capacity and condition of our estate. During the last year we have welcomed patients into our new ophthalmology outpatients area, expanded the majors area of our emergency department, built Hamwic House for treating cancer patients and opened four new operating theatres. Our ambition remains to increase capacity and improve facilities so that we can meet rising demand for our services, treating more people in improved settings than ever before. The momentum we are building is informed and driven by our five-year strategic plan, which describes our collective ambitions on our journey to becoming a world-class organisation. Our successes over the last twelve months were set against a backdrop of exceptional pressure on our services, unlike anything we have seen before. Like most hospital trusts, the lifting of COVID-19 restrictions in the wider community saw significant increases in attendances at our emergency department and increased referrals for treatments including surgery and cancer care. Everyone at UHS is working hard to restore services and bring waiting times down, although there are headwinds impacting our elective recovery. As we write this report, we have more than 200 patients in the hospital who no longer need our care but are waiting for discharge, either to a care home or to their own home with domiciliary care packages. Like many sectors, our local authority partners are struggling to buy or directly provide the capacity that is needed due primarily to workforce shortages. On occasion, the number of patients stranded in our hospitals means we have had to cancel scheduled surgery patients due to a lack of beds. Despite this, we are making good progress on recovering our elective performance, for example the number of elective surgery procedures in May 2022 was over 8% higher than in May 2019, prior to the COVID-19 pandemic. 6 Looking back over the year, our achievements would not have been possible without every single one of our 13,000 staff, who have gone above and beyond to put patients first. As a Trust Board we recognise that our people are our greatest asset. The results of this year’s NHS annual staff survey are encouraging, with the percentage of staff recommending UHS as a place to work being the sixth highest across all NHS trusts in England. However, we know we can do even better and our new people strategy will help us achieve this by introducing programmes which enable our people to thrive, excel and belong in a diverse and inclusive environment. We ended the year by saying farewell to Peter Hollins, who completed his second and final term as chair on 31 March 2022. In the six years of his leadership, the Trust has undergone a huge transformation to the benefit of both patients and staff. Peter has been a trusted and respected colleague whose outstanding leadership has set UHS on course to be a world-class organisation with world-class people delivering worldclass care. We welcome the formation of the Hampshire and Isle of Wight integrated care system on 1 July 2022, which will facilitate increased integration and collaboration across health and social care partners. We look forward to continuing strong relationships with all our partners as we work to develop an NHS of which all the communities we serve can be proud. Jane Bailey Interim Chair June 2022 David French Chief Executive Officer June 2022 7 OVERVIEW AND PERFORMANCE Performance report Introduction from our chief executive 2021/22 is the second year that the ways in which the Trust has worked, and the performance it has achieved, have been strongly influenced the COVID-19 pandemic. Our circumstances varied significantly through the year, however, by March 2022: • COVID-19 related restrictions had been removed across the wider community, but remained necessary within healthcare settings; • a combination of partial immunity and improved treatments had reduced the numbers of patients experiencing the most severe symptoms of COVID-19, but the total numbers of people being infected remained very high; and • the numbers of patients attending, or being referred to, healthcare services for other conditions had returned to pre-pandemic levels or higher. Our challenges and priorities have varied through the year in a similar manner, and have included: • providing sufficient urgent care capacity for patients with COVID-19 alongside those with other illnesses or injuries; • running our services with significantly increased levels of COVID-19 related absence amongst our staff, as infection rates have increased in the wider community; and • increasing the numbers of elective treatments provided, back to pre-pandemic levels and higher, to start to reduce patient waiting times and reverse the increases in waiting list sizes caused by COVID-19. Our performance this year has often been impacted by the adversity of the circumstances. We have not always been able to achieve the targets established prior to the pandemic, nor to deliver the standard of service that we would aspire to for our patients. The Trust is proud to have performed well in comparison to other hospital trusts across many performance measures, however, I would like to thank our patients for their understanding and patience, and all our staff for their resilience, commitment and dedication to care for patients and their colleagues. As we begin to emerge from the pandemic, and consider the year ahead, we look forward to working with patients, hospital colleagues, and partners across health and social care to: • continue the recovery from the impacts of the COVID-19 pandemic; • improve our performance against key measures, continuing to perform well in comparison with other hospitals and moving closer to the national targets; and • continue to adapt and improve services such that the outcomes and results achieved for patients will be better than ever before. 9 Overview About the Trust Our services University Hospital Southampton NHS Foundation Trust is one of the largest acute teaching trusts in England with a turnover of more than £1 billion in 2021/22. It is based on the coast in south east England and provides services to over 1.9 million people living in Southampton and south Hampshire and specialist services, including neurosciences, respiratory medicine, cancer care, cardiovascular, obstetrics and specialist children’s services, to more than 3.7 million people in central southern England and the Channel Islands. The Trust is also a designated major trauma centre, one of only two places in the south of England to offer adults and children full major trauma care provision. As a leading centre for teaching and research, the Trust has close working relationships with the University of Southampton, the Medical Research Council, National Institute for Health and Care Research (NIHR), Wellcome Trust and Cancer Research UK. The Trust is consistently one of the UK’s highest recruiting trusts of patients to clinical trials and in the top ten nationally for research study volumes as ranked by the NIHR Clinical Research Network. 12,000 Every year over staff at UHS: treat around 160,000 inpatients and day patients, including about 75,000 emergency admissions see over 650,000 people at outpatient appointments deal with around 150,000 cases in our emergency department deliver more than 100 outpatient clinics across the south of England, keeping services local for patients The Trust provides most of its services from the following locations: • Southampton General Hospital – the Trust’s largest location, where a great number of specialist services are based alongside emergency and critical care and which includes Southampton Children’s Hospital. • Princess Anne Hospital – located across the road from Southampton General Hospital and providing maternity care and specialist care for women with medical problems during pregnancy and babies who need extra care around birth across the region. • Royal South Hants Hospital – although the Trust does not operate this site near the centre of Southampton it provides a smaller number of services from this location. • New Forest Birth Centre – located at Ashurst on the edge of the New Forest and run by experienced midwives and support staff it offers a safe, ‘home away from home’ environment for women having a healthy pregnancy and expecting a straightforward birth. The NHS patient services provided by the Trust are commissioned and paid for by local clinical commissioning groups (CCGs) and, in the case of more specialised services (such as treatments for rare conditions), by NHS England. Just under half of the Trust’s NHS patient services are paid for by CCGs and just over half are paid for by NHS England. We provide these under a standard NHS contract, which incorporates ongoing monitoring of the Trust and the quality of the services provided. 10 Our structure UHS gained foundation trust status on 1 October 2011. A foundation trust is a public benefit corporation providing NHS services in line with the core NHS principles: that care should be universal, comprehensive and free at the point of need. The Trust is licensed as a foundation trust to provide these services by Monitor (the independent regulator, now part of NHS England and NHS Improvement) and the healthcare services we provide are regulated by the Care Quality Commission. Being a foundation trust has enabled greater local accountability and greater financial freedom and has supported the delivery of the Trust’s mission and strategy over a number of years. The Trust has been a university teaching hospital since 1971. The diagram below provides an overview of the overall organisational structure of the Trust. Division A Surgery Critical Care Opthalmology Theatres and Anaesthetics Public and foundation trust members Council of Governors Board of Directors Executive Directors Division B Division C Division D Cancer Care Emergency Medicine Helicopter Emergency Medical Services Medicine and Medicine for Older People Pathology Specialist Medicine Women and Newborn Maternity Child Health Clinical Support Cardiovascular and Thoracic Neurosciences Trauma and Orthopaedics Radiology 11 Trust Headquarters Division Always Improving Central Operations Clinical Outcomes Commercial Development Communications Contracting Corporate Affairs Data and Analytics Education and Workforce Estates, Facilities and Capital Development Finance Health and Safety Human Resources Informatics Medical Examinerss Service Occupational Health Organisational Development Quality Patient Safety Planning and Productivity Procurement and Supply Research and Development Safeguarding Strategy and Partnerships The Trust is also part of an integrated care system in Hampshire and the Isle of Wight, which is a partnership of NHS and local government organisations working together to improve the health and wellbeing of the population across Hampshire and the Isle of Wight. Our values Our values describe how we do things at UHS and act as a guide to all staff working with colleagues to deliver high quality patient care and a great patient experience every day. Our values are: Patients, their families and carers are at the heart of what we do. Their experience of our services will be our measure of success. Partnership between clinicians, patients and carers is critical to achieving our vision, both within hospital teams and extending across organisational boundaries in the NHS, social care and the third sector. We will ensure we are always improving services for patients through research, education, clinical effectiveness and quality improvement. We will continue to incorporate new ideas, technologies and create greater efficiencies in the services we provide. 12 Our strategy 2021-25 The Trust’s strategy was updated during 2020/21 to take account of everything our staff had experienced during the COVID-19 pandemic and what we had learnt from this. The vision for UHS is to continue on its journey to become an organisation of world class people delivering world class care. Our strategy is organised around five themes and for each of these it describes a number of ambitions we aim to achieve by 2025. Theme Ambitions Outstanding patient outcomes, • We will monitor clinical outcomes, safety and experience of our experience and safety patients regularly to ensure they are amongst the best in the UK By 2025 we will strengthen our and the world. national reputation for outstanding • We will reduce harm, learning from all incidents through our patient outcomes, experience and proactive patient safety culture. safety, providing high quality care • We will ensure all patients and relatives have a positive experience and treatment across an extensive of our care, as a result of the environment created by our people range of services from foetal and our facilities. medicine, through all life stages and conditions, to end-of-life care Pioneering research • We will recruit and enable people to deliver pioneering research in and innovation Southampton. We will continue to be a leading teaching hospital with a growing, reputable and innovative research and development portfolio • We will optimise access to clinical research studies for our patients. • We will enable innovation in everything we do, and ensure that ‘cutting edge’ investigations and treatments are delivered in Southampton. that attracts the best staff and efficiently delivers the best possible treatments and care for our patients. World class people • We will recruit and develop enough people with the right Supporting and nurturing our knowledge and skills to meet the needs of our patients. people through a culture that values • We will provide satisfying and fulfilling roles, growing our talent diversity and builds knowledge and through development and opportunity for progression. skills to ensure everyone reaches • We will empower our people, embracing diversity and embedding their full potential. We must provide compassion, inclusion and equity of opportunity. rewarding career paths within empowered, compassionate, and motivated teams. Integrated networks and collaboration We will deliver our services with partners through clinical networks, collaboration and integration across geographical and organisational boundaries. • We will work in partnership with key stakeholders across the Hampshire and Isle of Wight integrated care system. • We will strengthen our acute clinical networks across the region, centralising when necessary and supporting local care when appropriate. • We will foster local integration with primary and community care as well as mental health and social care services for seamless delivery across boundaries. • We will build on our successful partnership with University of Southampton (UoS), growing our reputation as a national leading university teaching hospital. 13 Theme Foundations for the future Making our enabling infrastructure (finance, digital, estate) fit for the future to support a leading university teaching hospital in the 21st century and recognising our responsibility as a major employer in the community of Southampton and our role in broader environmental sustainability. Ambitions • We will deliver best value to the tax payer as a financially efficient and sustainable organisation. • We will support patient self-management and seamless care across organisational boundaries through our ambitious digital programme, including real time data reporting, to inform our care. • We will expand and improve our estate, increasing capacity where needed and providing modern facilities for our patients and our people. • We will strengthen our role in the community as an employer of choice, a partner in delivery of services to our population and by leading the Greener NHS agenda locally. During each year of the strategy the Trust sets out a more detailed series of objectives to achieve and progress towards the delivery of its ambitions. In 2021/22 these objectives included: • Recovery restoration and improvement of clinical services • Introducing a robust and proactive safety culture • Empowering and developing staff to improve services for patients • Implementing the ‘Always Improving’ strategy • Delivering the first year of the research and investment plan • Restoring a full research portfolio and preparing for future growth • Delivering joint research and innovation infrastructure with UoS and Wessex partners • Increasing our people capacity (recruitment, retention, education) • Great place to work including focus on wellbeing • Building an inclusive and compassionate culture • Working in partnership with the integrated care system and primary care networks • Integrated networks and collaboration • Creating a sustainable financial infrastructure • Making our corporate infrastructure (digital, estate) fit for the future to support a leading university teaching hospital in the 21st century • Recognising our responsibility as a major employer in the community of Southampton and our role in delivering a greener NHS. Performance against these objectives will be monitored and reported to the Trust’s board of directors on a quarterly basis. Principal risks to our strategy and objectives The board of directors has identified and manages the principal risks to the delivery of its strategy and objectives through its board assurance framework. The principal risks to the delivery of its strategy and objectives identified by the Trust during 2021/22 were that: • It would have insufficient capacity to respond to emergency demand, reduce waiting lists for planned activity and provide diagnostics results in avoidable harm to patients • It would not be able to provide service users with a safe, high quality experience of care and positive patient outcomes • It would not effectively plan for and implement infection prevention and control measures that reduce the number of hospital-acquired infections and limit the number of nosocomial outbreaks of infection • It would not secure the required ongoing investment to support our pioneering research and innovation, driving clinical services of the future 14 • It would not realise the full benefits of being a University teaching hospital through working with regional partners to accelerate research, innovation and adoption; increasing the number of studies initiated and the patients recruited to participate in these studies and the delivery of new treatments and treatments that would not otherwise be available to patients • It would not be able to increase the UHS workforce to meet current and planned service requirements through recruitment to vacancies and maintaining annual staff turnover below 12% and develop a longerterm workforce plan linked to the delivery of the Trust’s corporate strategy • It would not develop a diverse, compassionate and inclusive workforce, providing a more positive staff experience for all staff • It would not create a sustainable and innovative education and development response to meet the current and future workforce needs • It would not implement effective models to deliver integrated and networked care, resulting in suboptimal patient experience and outcomes, increased numbers of admissions and increases in patients’ length of stay. • It would be unable to deliver a financial breakeven position and support prioritised investment as identified in the Trust’s capital plan within locally available limits (CDEL). • It would not adequately maintain, improve and develop our estate to deliver our clinical services and increase capacity. • It would fail to introduce and implement new technology and expand the use of existing technology to transform our delivery of care through the funding and delivery of the digital strategy. • It would fail to prioritise green initiatives to deliver a trajectory that will reduce our direct and indirect carbon footprint and reach net zero direct carbon emissions by 2040 and net zero indirect carbon emissions by 2045 While the COVID-19 pandemic presented the Trust with new risks as it introduced more stringent infection control processes, stopped certain types of activity and responded quickly to care for large numbers of seriously ill patients who had tested positive for COVID-19, it also prompted innovation across a wide range of areas. However the ongoing impact of the pandemic on both our staff, patients who have had COVID-19 and patients who have waited longer than expected for treatment as a result, have added to the risks facing the Trust. This risk has continued into 2021/22 and has been coupled with increases in referrals for cancer and increased attendances to our emergency department and non-elective activity. National targets for performance have not been amended as a result of the pandemic, although the national plan has focussed on the recovery of activity levels as the first stage in a restoration of elective services. Capacity – The initial and subsequent waves of the COVID-19 pandemic have led to increases in the waiting times for patients and the number of patients waiting more than 52, 78 and 104 weeks has increased significantly. While there was a significant reduction in the number of patients waiting over 104 weeks in 2021/22, with the Trust expecting that no patients will be waiting more than 104 weeks by July 2022, its ability to reduce the overall waiting list and the length of time patients are waiting for treatment remains one of the key risks for the Trust. This may be compounded by future waves of the COVID-19, a continuation of the sustained demand for urgent non-elective activity and an ongoing number of referrals, often requiring more complex treatment due to delays in people visiting their GPs for the first time and presenting with more advanced disease. The Trust utilised the support available from the independent sector to continue cancer treatment and surgery for those patients at highest risk and continues to make use of independent capacity for cardiac surgery. It also increased the number of outpatient attendances which took place by telephone or video call. The Trust developed a clinical assurance framework during the year to better assess the risk of harm to patients as a result of delays in treatment and this has been utilised in decision-making around the allocation of resources to those areas where there is the greatest risk of potential harm to patients. In addition to opening additional capacity during 2021/22 (described in the Estates section below), the Trust also committed expenditure in 2021/22 to open further wards and operating theatres during 2022/23 and 2023/24. These initiatives will contribute to further improvements in elective waiting times in coming years. 15 Quality and compliance – The Trust continued to monitor the quality of care delivered throughout 2021/22. During the COVID-19 pandemic the primary focus became infection prevention and control, with the launch of an award-winning COVID ZERO campaign that saw the Trust reduce the transmission of the virus in hospital (nosocomial transmission). While the Trust continued to perform well overall, the Trust exceeded its annual threshold for Clostridium difficile infections and there was one MRSA bacteraemia during March 2022, the only such event in 2021/22. The Trust continued to develop its proactive patient safety culture during 2021/22 with changes to the way in which patient safety incidents are investigated and the launch of its Always Improving strategy and transformation initiatives in theatre efficiency, patient flow and outpatients. Reporting and investigation of incidents continued during 2021/22. The Trust continues to prepare for the implementation of the new patient safety incident response framework in June 2022/23. Partnerships – During 2021/22, the Trust and its partners continued to work together to discharge patients safely, to ensure patients requiring urgent cancer treatment and surgery were able to continue their treatment in the independent sector and to develop the regional COVID-19 saliva testing programme for local schools, hospitals and other employers. The new arrangements for integrated care systems will be implemented in July 2022. This is expected to reinvigorate work with partners at a system, place and provider level in Hampshire and Isle of Wight. The Trust is already part of an acute provider collaborative with other acute trusts in Hampshire and the Isle of Wight and is progressing a number of projects including the development of an elective hub at Winchester Hospital, diagnostics, pathology, endoscopy and imaging networks. The Trust also continued to progress research activity and opportunities with the University of Southampton and Wessex health partners. Workforce – The Trust continued to recruit nurses from overseas and through targeted recruitment campaigns during 2021/22 meaning that the number of nursing vacancies has remained relatively stable. Vacancies in other areas have increased reflecting a more competitive job market, particularly for lower band roles. The Trust also continued to work with its staff networks and specific focus groups to increase diversity in leadership roles. Staff turnover remained above the 12% target during 2021/22 and retention is a key element of the people strategy. While workforce capacity continues to be one of the biggest challenges faced by the Trust, during 2021/22 we have also focused on supporting our staff to respond to the COVID-19 pandemic and operational pressures by providing both the tools and time to help staff recovery. We are incredibly proud of the way that staff responded to the pandemic and continue to recognise this in whatever ways we can, however, we also want to ensure that staff continue to be able to contribute to patient care at their best and want to stay and develop with the Trust. Technology was also used at levels not previously achieved to continue to deliver training to staff and enable staff to work from home where possible, ensuring a safer environment for patients and staff in the hospitals. Estate – The Trust continued to invest in and develop its estate during 2021/22 including opening a new ophthalmology outpatient area, expansion of the majors area of the emergency department and four new operating theatres. These were part of £65 million of capital expenditure in 2021/22 that also included equipment, digital and the backlog maintenance programme. Innovation and technology – There have been exceptional levels of achievement in relation to COVID-19 related research activity, including in partnership with the universities. You can read more about these in part three of the quality account. The board of directors has also supported the funding of an expansion of research and innovation activity to allow the continued delivery of the Trust’s ambitions to innovate and improve and transform its services. 16 The Trust and its partners also been successful in securing external funding including one of only four successful NHSX awards to test the concept of federated trusted research environments with its Wessex health partners and core funding of £10.5 million for the National Institute for Health and Care Research (NIHR) Southampton Clinical Research Facility (CRF) for the period between September 2022 and August 2027. Sustainable financial model –The Trust achieved its forecast breakeven position in 2021/22. Income was more predictable in 2021/22 as block contract arrangements remained in place in response to the COVID-19 pandemic and ensured that costs were covered, however, funding from the elective recovery fund, particularly, in the first half of 2021/22 introduced a degree of income volatility as did changes to the framework for the elective recovery fund half way through the year. The Trust continues to maintain a strong cash position and to implement improvements and efficiency savings, allowing it to continue to invest in its services. The financial outlook across the NHS looks extremely challenging going into 2022/23 due to the reductions in non-recurrent funding and efficiency targets. The Trust currently has an underlying deficit, with pressures on energy prices and drugs cost growth within block contract arrangements, which had been supported with non-recurrent funding in previous years. While specific funding has been provided to address inflationary pressures there is a risk that inflation could exceed this funding and raw material and supply shortages could also impact on costs. Performance overview The Trust monitors a very wide range of key performance indicators within its departments, divisions, directorates and executive committee. Assurance for our board of directors and executive committee includes an integrated performance report which is reviewed monthly and contains a variety of indicators intended to provide assurance regarding implementation of our strategy and that the care we provide is safe, caring, effective, responsive and wellled. The integrated performance report also includes a monthly ‘spotlight’ section, to enable more detailed consideration of any topics that are of particular interest or concern. The selection of topics is informed by a rolling schedule, any performance concerns and requests from the board of directors. Assurance for our council of governors includes a quarterly Chief executive’s performance report, which includes a range of non-financial and financial performance information. 17 Performance analysis COVID-19 Impacts In 2021/22, the most prominent impacts of COVID-19 have been in relation to occupancy of inpatient beds by patients with a COVID-19 diagnosis and increased levels of staff sickness absence associated with COVID-19, in addition to normal levels of absence due to other causes. The impact of COVID-19 has varied significantly through the year, linked primarily to the prevalence of the disease within the wider community. In comparison to 2020/21: • bed occupancy (all types) did not reach the same exceptional peaks, however, it exceeded 50 patients between August 2021 and March 2022 and reached an average of 83 in March 2022; • the number of patients requiring treatment in intensive care and high care were much reduced, though still significant; • fewer patients were admitted requiring hospital treatment for COVID-19 alone, and greater numbers were admitted requiring treatment for other medical conditions who were also infected with COVID-19 at the same time; • staff sickness absence levels were typically higher, particularly in the second half of the year when national restrictions had been removed and COVID-19 infections in the community increased – the sickness absence rate (from all causes) peaked at 6% in March 2022 All bed types Intensive care/higher care beds 18 Staff sickness absence Emergency access through our emergency department Following a reduction during the first year of the pandemic, the numbers of patients who presented to receive care at our emergency department increased exponentially in 2021/22. Attendance levels exceeded the higher levels seen prior to the pandemic by approximately 10%. All patients presenting to the emergency department This exceptional increase in the clinical demand upon our department has had a significant adverse impact upon the timeliness of care, particularly for those patients who have a less urgent condition. The department has also continued to deliver services separately for those patients who have respiratory symptoms and those who do not, and to implement additional infection control measures. Emergency access performance is measured as the percentage of patients discharged from emergency department care or admitted to a hospital bed within four hours of arrival to the department. The national target of 95% was not achieved and the Trust experienced a large deterioration in our own performance to 64% (main ED/Type 1 attendances) by March 2022. Our performance compared favourably with other acute trusts in England despite this, however. 19 Emergency access four hour performance The number and duration of any ambulance handover delays are another important performance indicator. Ensuring that ambulance staff can ‘hand over’ the patients they convey to our emergency department without delay is important because this releases the staff and their vehicle to meet the needs of other medical emergencies in the community. We are very proud to have an exceptionally good record in this regard, working with colleagues in ambulance services to transfer arriving patients into our emergency department and the care of our staff even when the hospital is already fully occupied. 20 Elective Waiting times Demand 2021/22 has seen a continuation of the trend of increasing elective referrals, following a major reduction which occurred at the start of the COVID-19 pandemic. Referral rates to our services are now typically at, or above, the levels seen before the pandemic. Feedback from clinicians is that they are also seeing more patients with advanced disease than they would normally, because of delays in referral to the service/diagnosis. Accepted referrals The number of patients referred to hospital with suspected cancer increased exceptionally during 2021/22; the number of patients seen for a first consultant-led appointment was 27% higher than in 2020/21 and 18% higher than in 2019/20. Performance remained below the national target of 93% throughout the year, with a deterioration to 74% in December 2021 prior to a recovery to 90% in March 2022. Our performance also declined in comparison with other acute trusts in England. Most of the patients who waited longer than two weeks for their first appointment were within our breast service, which sees a very large number of referrals for suspected cancer and experienced a 22% increase in the number of patients seen compared to 2019/20. Additional consultants who specialise in breast cancer have now been recruited and performance in this service returned to target in April 2022. 21 Performance following ‘Two week wait’ urgent referral for suspected cancer 22 Activity The number of UHS hospital appointments, diagnostic tests and elective admissions all increased significantly during 2021/22. The number of appointments undertaken, and diagnostic tests performed, exceeded activity levels in both 2019/20 and 2020/21. The number of elective and day case admissions increased significantly compared to 2020/21 (the first year of the pandemic) yet remained approximately 10% below the levels achieved between April 2019 and February 2020 (prior to COVID-19). There were a wide range of factors influencing these activity levels, and the lower levels of admitted activity specifically, including: • the availability of beds for the admission of elective patients after emergency patients with COVID-19 and other conditions had been accommodated; • the availability of staff to deliver elective care, during periods of increased COVID-19 bed occupancy, and during periods of increased staff absence related to COVID-19; • additional infection prevention measures which were maintained, particularly within inpatient treatment settings where risks of COVID-19 transmission are otherwise increased. Most of the activity has been delivered within NHS hospitals in 2021/22 (local independent sector hospitals were used to replace NHS elective capacity in 2020/21), and we have recruited additional staff and invested in an additional ward, theatres and outpatient rooms in order to be able increase our treatment activity. The graphs below show 2021/22 activity levels as a percentage of those achieved prior to the COVID-19 pandemic. Elective admissions (including day case) 23 Outpatient attendances Diagnostics Our performance measures for diagnostics report on a total of 15 different frequently used tests. At the end of March 2022, 20% of patients were waiting more than six weeks to receive their investigation. This is a significant improvement compared to 28% of patients waiting more than six weeks at the end of March 2021, yet still significantly worse than the national target (1%) and UHS performance prior to pandemic. At the end of March 2022, the total waiting list size (including patients waiting less than six weeks) had increased by 14% compared to March 2021 and was 34% larger than before the pandemic. These trends reflect a combination of large reductions in diagnostic activity in the first year of the pandemic, followed by record levels of diagnostic tests being performed during 2021/22 (7% higher than before the pandemic) combined with very high levels of referrals for diagnostic testing over the same period. 24 The tests with largest numbers of longer waiting patients are non-obstetric ultrasound, peripheral neurophysiology, MRI and CT. Initiatives to improve performance include the recruitment of additional staff in the relevant professions and investment in additional equipment, in the context of NHS forecasts that diagnostic demand will continue to increase over the longer term. Patients waiting for a diagnostic test to be performed (sum of 15 different frequently used tests) Percentage of patients waiting over 6 weeks for a diagnostic test to be performed 25 Referral to Treatment Our waiting list from referral to treatment increased in size by 27% (9,768 patients) during 2021/22 and is now 36% larger than before the pandemic. Both referrals and hospital activity declined steeply at the start of the pandemic, but referral levels increased more quickly than hospital activity following this. The rate at which the waiting list is increasing has however reduced in the most recent six months. Number of patients waiting between referral and commencement of a treatment for their condition The national target is that at least 92% of patients should be waiting for treatment no more than 18 weeks from their referral to hospital. Our performance has deteriorated from 80% immediately before the pandemic, to 68% at the end of March 2022. Our performance continues to be typical of the major teaching hospital trusts that we benchmark with, and the trend has been similar to that experienced across trusts in England. Percentage of patients waiting up to 18 weeks between referral and treatment 26 The fact that some patients wait significantly longer than the 18 week target is a particular concern. In 2020/21 NHS England targeted the stabilisation of the numbers of patients waiting more than 52 weeks and the elimination of waiting times more than 104 weeks (except when patients choose to wait longer). The percentage of patients waiting more than 52 weeks at UHS reduced from 9% to 4%. The number of patients waiting more than 104 weeks reduced, from a maximum of 171, to 59 at the end of March 2022 (of whom only five were wishing to proceed with treatment at that time). The patients who typically wait longest for treatment continue to be those who require admission for surgical procedures in specialities such as ear nose and throat, orthopaedics and oral surgery. The Trust opened four additional operating theatres during 2020/21 and is working in collaboration with partners in the Hampshire and Isle of Wight integrated care system to implement further elective recovery plans. Percentage of patients waiting more than 52 weeks, between referral and commencement of a treatment for their condition 27 Cancer Waiting Times The timeliness of urgent services for patients with suspected cancer has unfortunately declined during 2021/22. The Trust continues to perform well in comparison with the teaching hospitals that we benchmark with and deliver a similar range of services, however. We have faced a range of challenges including: • a large increase in the number of new patients referred for investigation; • delays in the onward referral (for specialist investigation or treatment) of patients from other trusts which have also experienced increases in referrals; • the need to provide capacity to investigate and treat the full range of other conditions, alongside those patients with suspected cancer; and • an increase in the complexity of treatment required by new and existing patients, potentially because of delays in referral or treatment during the first year of the pandemic The national target is to provide the first definitive treatment to at least 85% of patients with cancer with 62 days of referral to hospital. UHS exceeded this level of performance in April 2021 but has not done so since then, performance deteriorated to 66% in January 2022 before recovering somewhat to 72% by March 2022. Treatment for Cancer within 62 days of an urgent GP referral to hospital The national target is to provide the first definitive treatment to at least 96% of patients within 31 days of a decision to treat being made and agreed with the patients. Trust performance has been very variable in 2021/22, ranging from 89% to 98% in individual months. Likewise, performance has ranged from below average in some months, to amongst the best in the group of teaching hospitals that we benchmark with. 28 First definitive treatment for cancer within 31 days of a decision to treat A range of initiatives are being pursued to maintain and improve the timeliness of our cancer services including: • changes to some of the processes for the referral and initial assessment of patients with suspected cancer, for example the inclusion of high quality photographs within referrals for suspected skin cancer; • projects to refine processes and procedures for the investigation of suspected gynaecological and urological cancers; • an operating services improvement programme designed to improve the flow of patients, and the numbers of patients treated, through our existing theatre facilities; and • staffing level increases and recruitment to clinical roles in specialities where the increases in demand require this. Quality priorities The Trust set four quality priorities in 2021/22, which were aimed at ensuring we continued to deliver the highest quality of care. The quality priorities were shaped by a range of national and regional factors as well as local and Trust‐wide considerations. We recognised the overriding issues of significant operational pressures being felt right across the health and social care system, including those associated with the second year of the COVID-19 pandemic, by limiting the number of priorities to four. We also acknowledged the risk that the delivery of our priorities could be disrupted by the ongoing pandemic and that we needed to be flexible in adapting the priorities to changing circumstances. The Trust set the following four priorities: 1. Introduction of midwifery continuity of carer for women at risk of complications in pregnancy. 2. To support staff wellbeing and recovery. 3. Managing risks to patients delayed for treatment and restoring elective programmes. 4. Reducing healthcare associated infection (HCAI) 29 The Trust achieved three of the quality priorities and partially achieved one priority. In relation to midwifery continuity of carer, the Trust’s performance exceeded the ambition that had been set by NHS England in 2020/21 following its national review of maternity services in 2015 as shown below. NHS England ambition set in 2020/21 35% of women will be booked to receive care in a continuity of carer team 35% of black and minority ethnic women booked to receive care in a continuity of carer team 35% of women living in an IMD-1 area (most deprived areas measured using indices of deprivation) Percentage achieved 41.7% 75% 80% The Trust continued to introduce programmes, interventions and wider support offerings to promote staff wellbeing and recovery in 2021/22. Our 2021/22 annual NHS staff survey results are positive with our scores relating to wellbeing above the benchmark average. Contributing factors to wellbeing such as staff engagement, morale, staff experience in areas such as kindness and respect, feeling valued and trusted to do their job were all above the benchmark average. More information about staff health and wellbeing is included in the staff report below. The Trust only partially achieved the priority relating to managing the risks to patients delayed for treatment and restoring elective programmes. The Trust’s performance against elective waiting time standards are described in more detail above. While the Trust focused on prioritising all patients waiting for surgery to ensure we continued to treat people based on need and urgency, we continue to recognise the impact of delays on people’s quality of life and, at times, outcomes. COVID-19 remained a key area of focus for the Trust in 2021/22 in terms of infection prevention. The Trust implemented a number of awareness campaigns, including its award-winning COVID ZERO campaign, and strategies to reduce in-hospital transmission of COVID-19 and kept these under review throughout the year. The chart below shows the trend of hospital-onset cases of COVID-19, which has broadly followed local and national prevalence of the virus, and the Trust’s performance compared very favourably with its local and national peers. 30 The table below provides an overview of the Trust’s performance against national and other infection prevention standards and limits to minimise infections, the majority of which have been achieved by the Trust. Category National Objectives: MRSA bacteraemia Clostridium difficile infection E coli Bacteraemia End of year RAG Action /Comment R One MRSA bloodstream infection attributable to UHS 2021/22 in March 2022. R 74 cases against a threshold of 64 for the year. G 138 cases in 2021/22 against a threshold of 151. Klebsiella Bacteraemia A 64 cases in 2021/22 against a threshold of 64. Pseudomonas Bacteraemia MSSA G 30 cases in 2021/22 against a threshold of 34. 43 cases in 2021/22 after 48 hours in hospital. Other: Hospital onset, healthcare associated COVID-19 103 hospital-onset probable healthcareassociated cases in 2021/22. 125 hospital onset definite healthcare associated cases in 2021/22. Prudent antibiotic Antimicrobial prescribing Stewardship G The standard contract requirement for reduction in antibiotic usage for 2021/22 was waived, as in 2020/21. Had it been applied as anticipated, the Trust would very likely have met this. Provide Assurance of Infection G The annual infection prevention audit assurance of Prevention Practice programme was reinstated in April 2021 for basic infection Standards the monitoring and assurance of infection prevention prevention and control practices but practice: subsequently suspended in September 2021. You can find more information about how the Trust delivered and measured its quality priorities, including feedback from patients and staff and improvement aims and quality priorities for 2022/23, in the Trust’s quality account for 2021/22, incorporated in the Trust’s annual report and accounts. 31 Financial performance The Trust delivered a surplus of £0.048 million from a revenue position of over £1.2 billion, once items deemed as “below the line” by NHS England and NHS Improvement, su
Url: /Media/UHS-website-2019/Docs/About-the-Trust/Annual-reports-and-quality-accounts/Annual-report-2021-2022.pdf

Papers Trust Board - 29 November 2022

Description: Date Time Location Chair Agenda Trust Board – Open Session 29/11/2022 9:00 - 13:20 Conference Room, Heartbeat/Microsoft Teams Jenni Douglas-Todd 1 Chair’s Welcome, Apologies and Declarations of Interest 9:00 Note apologies for absence, and to hear any declarations of interest relating to any item on the Agenda. 2 Staff Story The staff story provides an opportunity for the Board to reflect on the experiences of patients and staff within the Trust and understand what the Trust could do better. 3 Minutes of Previous Meeting held on 29 September 2022 9:20 Approve the minutes of the previous meeting held on 29 September 2022 4 Matters Arising and Summary of Agreed Actions To discuss any matters arising from the minutes, and to agree on the status of any actions assigned at the previous meeting. 5 QUALITY, PERFORMANCE and FINANCE Quality includes: clinical effectiveness, patient safety, and patient experience 5.1 Briefing from the Chair of the Charitable Funds Committee (Oral) 9:30 Dave Bennett, Chair 5.2 Briefing from the Chair of the Finance and Investment Committee (Oral) 9:35 Jane Bailey, Chair 5.3 Briefing from the Chair of the Quality Committee (Oral) 9:40 Tim Peachey, Chair 5.4 Chief Executive Officer's Report 9:45 Receive and note the report Sponsor: David French, Chief Executive Officer 5.5 Integrated Performance Report for Month 7 10:05 Review and discuss the Trust's performance as reported in the Integrated Performance Report. Sponsor: David French, Chief Executive Officer 5.6 Finance Report for Month 7 10:35 Review and discuss the finance report Sponsor: Ian Howard, Chief Financial Officer 5.7 People Report for Month 7 10:45 Review and discuss the people report Sponsor: Steve Harris, Chief People Officer 6 Break 10:55 7 Infection Prevention and Control 2022-23 Q2 Report 11:05 Review and discuss the report Sponsor: Gail Byrne, Chief Nursing Officer Attendees: Julian Sutton, Interim Lead Infection Control Director/Julie Brooks, Head of Infection Prevention Unit 8 Medicines Management Annual Report 2021-22 11:15 Receive and discuss the report Sponsor: Paul Grundy, Chief Medical Officer Attendee: James Allen, Chief Pharmacist 9 Equality, Diversity and Inclusivity (EDI) Update including Workforce Race 11:25 Equality Standard (WRES) and Workforce Disability Equality Standard (WDES) Results 2022 Receive and discuss the reports Sponsor: Steve Harris, Chief People Officer Attendee: Ceri Connor, Director of OD and Inclusion 10 Annual Ward Staffing Nursing Establishment Review 11:35 Discuss and approve the review Sponsor: Gail Byrne, Chief Nursing Officer Attendee: Rosemary Chable, Head of Nursing for Education, Practice and Staffing 11 Guardian of Safe Working Hours Quarterly Report 11:45 Receive and discuss the report Sponsor: Paul Grundy, Chief Medical Officer Attendee: Diana Hulbert, Guardian of Safe Working Hours and Emergency Department Consultant 12 Learning from Deaths 2022/23 Quarter 2 Report 11:55 Review and discuss the report Sponsor: Paul Grundy, Chief Medical Officer Attendee: Ellis Banfield, Associate Director of Patient Experience 13 Freedom to Speak Up Report 12:05 Review and discuss the report Sponsor: Gail Byrne, Chief Nursing Officer Attendee: Christine Mbabazi, Equality & Inclusion Adviser/Freedom to Speak Up Guardian Page 2 14 Annual Assurance Process and Self-assessment against the NHS 12:15 England Core Standards for Emergency Preparedness, Resilience and Response (EPRR) Review and discuss the report Sponsor: Joe Teape, Chief Operating Officer Attendee: John Mcgonigle, Emergency Planning & Resilience Manager 15 STRATEGY and BUSINESS PLANNING 15.1 Board Assurance Framework (BAF) Update 12:25 Review and discuss the update Sponsor: Gail Byrne, Chief Nursing Officer Attendee: Craig Machell, Associate Director of Corporate Affairs and Company Secretary 16 CORPORATE GOVERNANCE, RISK and INTERNAL CONTROL 16.1 Register of Seals and Chair's Actions Report 12:35 Receive and ratify In compliance with the Trust Standing Orders, Financial Instructions, and the Scheme of Reservation and Delegation. Sponsor: Jenni Douglas-Todd, Trust Chair 16.2 Review of Standing Financial Instructions 2022-23 12:40 Review and approve the SFIs Sponsor: Ian Howard, Chief Financial Officer Attendee: Phil Bunting, Director of Operational Finance 16.3 Corporate Governance Update 12:50 Receive and discuss the update Sponsor: Gail Byrne, Chief Nursing Officer Attendee: Craig Machell, Associate Director of Corporate Affairs and Company Secretary 17 Any other business 13:00 Raise any relevant or urgent matters that are not on the agenda 18 Note the date of the next meeting: 31 January 2023 19 Items circulated to the Board for reading 19.1 CRN: Wessex 2022-23 Q2 Performance Report Note the report Sponsor: Paul Grundy, Chief Medical Officer Page 3 20 Resolution regarding the Press, Public and Others Sponsor: Jenni Douglas-Todd, Trust Chair To agree, as permitted by the National Health Service Act 2006 (as amended), the Trust's Constitution and the Standing Orders of the Board of Directors, that representatives of the press, members of the public and others not invited to attend to the next part of the meeting be excluded due to the confidential nature of the business to be transacted. 21 Follow-up discussion with governors 13:05 Page 4 3 Minutes of Previous Meeting held on 29 September 2022 1 Draft Minutes TB 29 Sept 22 OS v2 Minutes Trust Board – Open Session Date Time Location Chair Present 29/09/2022 9:00 – 13:00 Microsoft Teams Jenni Douglas-Todd (JD-T) Jane Bailey (JB), Non-Executive Director (NED) Gail Byrne (GB), Chief Nursing Officer Cyrus Cooper (CC), NED (from item 5.4 part two) Jenni Douglas-Todd (JD-T), Chair Keith Evans (KE), NED David French (DAF), Chief Executive Officer Paul Grundy (PG), Chief Medical Officer Steve Harris (SH), Chief People Officer Jane Harwood (JH), NED Ian Howard (IH), Chief Financial Officer Tim Peachey (TP), NED Joe Teape (JT), Chief Operating Officer In attendance Jane Fisher, Head of Health and Safety Services (JF) (for item 7.3) Sarah Herbert, Deputy Chief Nursing Officer (SHe) (for item 5.7) Femi Macaulay (FM), Associate NED Corinne Miller, Named Nurse for Safeguarding Adults (CM) (for item 5.8) Karen McGarthy, Named Nurse for Safeguarding Children (KMcG) (for item 5.8) Christine McGrath (CMcG), Director of Strategy and Partnerships Helen Potton, Associate Director of Corporate Affairs and Company Secretary (Interim) (HP) Helen Ralph, Manager, Transformation Team (HR) (for item 6.1) Annabel Shawcroft, Clinical Programme Officer, Transformation Team (AS) (for item 6.1) Jason Teoh, Director of Data and Analytics (JTe) (for item 5.11) Diana Ward, Clinical Outcomes Manager (DW) (for item 5.10) One member of the public (observing) 3 governors (observing) 5 members of staff (observing) 1 members of the public (observing) Apologies Dave Bennett (DB), NED 1. Chair’s Welcome, Apologies and Declarations of Interest JD-T welcomed all those attending the meeting which was being held by Microsoft Teams. Apologies were received from DB. CC would be joining the meeting later. 2. Patient Story HP introduced the Patient Story which focused on the experience of a mother and daughter who had used the Trust’s services. Mum advised that during the pandemic, her daughter had been diagnosed with cancer in her abdomen at the age of nine years old. Page 1 Her daughter had surgery followed by nine rounds of chemotherapy at the Trust followed by radiotherapy in London. Whilst on maintenance chemotherapy her daughter had relapsed and sadly a decision was made that further treatment would not be beneficial. Her daughter’s response was to write a “bucket list”. Some of the items were for herself but some related to changes that she wanted for other people including wanting parents to be fed. Her daughter could not understand why, when she was asked what she wanted to eat, that this did not extend to her mum, when her mum was in the hospital supporting her. Her daughter had not wanted mum to leave to go and eat, and no one else could come to sit with her because of the COVID restrictions. Her daughter was scared and going through gruelling treatment and that made it very difficult for mum to leave her. In addition, her treatment had affected her smell, making her feel unwell which resulted in her mum eating in the ensuite toilet as there was nowhere else to sit and eat. After her daughter died, mum had been working on items from her daughter’s bucket list, with senior representatives of the NHS. Work focused on putting in place a national programme to feed parents, improve food for children and also the provision of play specialists. In terms of food, mum had been working with UHS’ Patient Support Hub since January. Initially snack and toiletry boxes were put into every parent room but now, every children’s ward across Portsmouth and Southampton, a total of 17 wards, received food and drink every week. A charity, Sophie’s Legacy, had been set up and a trial had started that provided parents with a £4 food voucher for the restaurant, which was in addition to the support provided by the Patient Support Hub. The initiative had been well received by parents. The hope is to roll this out across the Country as looking after parents was important to enable them to support the care of their children. JD-T thanked mum for sharing noting how devastating it must have been to lose her daughter and how amazing it was that she and her daughter had wanted to support others in this difficult time. GB also thanked mum for sharing the experience and the work that was being done in her daughter’s name, which was important to continue. DAF noted how extraordinary that at the age of nine her daughter was considering the future of others. DAF asked whether mum had good links with the hospital charity and SH confirmed that he would make contact to ensure that this happened. Action: SH JT noted the importance of good facilities being available including good quality, affordable food. It was important for the Board to look at this and also to look at the estate to ensure that there was appropriate spaces provided for parents. 3. Minutes of the Previous Meeting held on 28 July 2022 The minutes of the meeting held on 28 July 2022 were approved as an accurate record of the meeting save for the following amendments: Page 2 • Page 3 – Correct spelling of Beachcroft • Page 3 – 5.3 third bullet – should read compliant not complaint. 4. Maters Arising and Summary of Agreed Actions Actions that were due had been completed. Action 763 – The complaint data was being compiled and would be sent out shortly. The remaining actions were not yet due but were being taken forward. 5. QUALITY, PERFORMANCE and FINANCE 5.1 Briefing from the Chair of the Audit and Risk Committee KE provided a briefing following the meeting on 12 September. The External Auditors had signed off their opinion on the financial statements with a clean opinion being given. From the Internal Auditors three reviews had been completed. The incident management review had focused on smaller incidents, noting that major incidents would normally be highlighted quickly. A large number had been tested and the conclusion was that the Trust needed to work on turning the reports around within the ten-day period. The Cyber Security review was one of significant assurance. However, the report highlighted that the Trust did not have formal documentation in terms of a Cyber Security Strategy and that not much training was provided for staff. Finally, in terms of General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) and personal information, the Trust was required to have a “record of processing activities” (ROPA). The Trust undertook hundreds of activities but did not have a ROPA for every activity and the recommendation was to review and put in place an appropriate policy to enable a more general approach for wider coverage. The final review was stage 2 of how the Trust managed and governed IT projects. The report had focused on three areas: • The initial assessment of the benefits of the IT project which had been found to be thorough and well thought out and documented. • More guidance was recommended on how to evaluate benefits particularly in terms of non financial benefits including safety benefits. • There were very few post benefit assessments being completed which would help with learning. Plans were in place to put additional controls in place by March 2023 and a review would take place as part of their follow up procedures. JT reminded members that he had arranged for Cyber training for the Board and had agreed to provide further assurance around some of the arrangements and the Internal Audit was aligned to this. JT noted that staffing arrangements would need to be reviewed as currently there was only one colleague within the digital team that worked on cyber security issues. HP informed the Board that work was already underway in terms of the work around ROPAs. Action: JT Page 3 5.2 Briefing from the Chair of the Finance and Investment Committee JB provided an update from the last meeting noting that discussions had taken place around the current financial position and the operational plan, both of which were due to be discussed in the closed board meeting. There was significant challenge particularly around the deficit position but overall there was a really good grip on exactly where the Trust currently was, with appropriate decisions being made to reflect the balance between managing the financial position, whilst continuing to support our people and activity. A number of ongoing actions around productivity were being addressed together with a clearer view of the future cash position of the Trust. Finally, JB noted that Model Hospital data had been reviewed to enable the Trust to drive efficiencies compared to other hospitals and to facilitate learning. 5.3 Chief Executive Officer’s Report DAF noted that this was the first time that the Board had met since the death of Her Majesty Queen Elisabeth II and wanted to formally recognise the fantastic public service that she had given. The state funeral, which gave an additional bank holiday, provided the Trust with some challenging operational issues, with little guidance being provided in terms of what the best approach should be. Where staff were not involved in urgent or emergency care, such as within outpatients, electives and day case procedures, they were given the choice that if they wanted to work that would be gratefully received, but similarly if they wanted to take the day off to pay their respects, they were able to. Some staff wanted to work and others wanted to take the day. More than two thirds of the scheduled activity had been undertaken. DAF thanked all staff for all of their hard work and dedication. He also noted that: • The pilot of the care village had been very successful and would be discussed further in the next item. • Junior doctor pay rates had been quite challenging and was symptomatic of where the Trust was with many members of the workforce. The Royal College of Nursing (RCN) had notified the Trust of an intended ballot for strike action. Also, the British Medical Association (BMA) had published a rate card that they wanted trusts to pay, which was in many cases, significantly above current ratees. DAF noted that there were groups of staff who had indicated that they would not work for the Trust unless paid the new rates. It was a period of instability and people were understandably wanting to protect their income which was manifesting in the behaviours that we were seeing. • The HR team had been recognised by the Chartered Institute of Professional Management (CIPD), for a National awards which was a testament to the good work that SH and his team did. • The number of COVID positive cases was increasing with around 70 currently in the hospital. Mask wearing had been re-introduced in clinical areas in an attempt to limit the number of nosocomial transmissions. Care homes were not willing to accept patients with COVID which would impact potential discharges. In terms of staff Page 4 absence from COVID this was also increasing and staff were being encouraged to have both COVID and influenza vaccinations. • UHS was in the process of finalising an IT contract which, at first glance looked like it could be a replacement for our Emergency Department (ED) IT system. The initial contract was small but included from a strategic perspective, as the Trust had recognised the potential for having a longer-term development partner. UHS remained committed to its “Best of Breed” strategy but had been struggling to recruit and retain the people needed to develop the systems and this could be a step to delivering this by working together in partnership. Ultimately this could result in UHS not only being able to bring to develop our systems but also had the potential to bring to the market a number of our IT products that we had developed. • At the previous month’s board, the Trust had been aware of its segmentation under the Single Oversight Framework (SOF) review, but had omitted to formally advise the board. The Trust remained in segment 2, with 1 being good and 4 being bad. Trusts in segments 3 and 4 received more dedicated support and oversight. This was a vote of confidence from the regulators in the Trust despite the challenges it was facing. TP noted that the BMA pay card had received much criticism and should be resisted unless there was a proper negotiation about the rates. In terms of the IT partnership this was excellent news. PG noted that the Trust had been very clear through the Local Medical Councils (LMC), and individual conversations with teams, that the Trust would not be entering into negotiations about the BMA rates. It was growing as an issue but was an untenable position to hold in front of the rest of the workforce. Meetings were taking place with teams noting that it was not just about money. PG had been clear with his medical consultant colleagues that he was not able to recommend that consultants were paid as much in one day for an overtime operating list, which was greater than the amount some staff received in a month. In a cost-of-living crisis this was wrong. Many colleagues had understood this approach but there was still many who were very unhappy. JH congratulated SH for the award noting that this was a very difficult award to achieve, with tough competition, and that to achieve it during the pandemic was outstanding. Decision: The Board noted the report. 5.4 Integrated Performance Report for Month 5 (part one) JT noted the challenges that the Trust was currently under and in particular highlighted: • The previous day had been particularly tough with every space in the hospital full and lots of patients in the ED waiting for beds. This was replicated nationally with many organisations had declared critical incidents due to the pressures being faced. It was caused by increased numbers of COVID positive patients and a big spike in the number of delayed patients in the hospital which had hit 245 patients at the start of the week, with almost a quarter of the bed base who could be treated elsewhere. Page 5 • There was a record number of cancer referrals with the waiting list being the highest it had ever been. The Trust continued to deliver more diagnostic capacity than it had ever delivered but continued to struggle with capacity in view of the increased demand. This was a very difficult position alongside a time where staff morale was low and staff were tired due to the pressures over the last couple of years. • One of the two spotlights related to cancer and the Board had a study session the following week with a deep dive. Referrals had grown by about 25% per month from around 1600 two-week referrals to consistently above 2000 per month. The backlog of patients who had breached 62 days had gone up three-fold in the last two years from around 100 to 370 patients. The overall number of patients on the cancer pathway had also doubled in this period. This was challenging for a group of patients that the Trust wanted to prioritise in terms of access to services and care. • Across the Wessex Alliance footprint the backlog remained better than the rest of the Country but it was not where we would want to be in terms of cancer services. It was likely that our performance would dip as we started to treat those patients which would impact the 62 day target, despite the levels of activity and delivering relatively well in terms of our peer groups. • There were some excellent new pathways being developed including the dermatology dream pathway which would make a significant impact on the skin pathway once implemented. Work was also being done with the cancer allowance to map what we had, against what we needed to understand better the gaps. DAF noted that the cancer performance metrics were a measure of the patients that had been treated. Once you had a number of patients above the 62 days, if you did not treat them and let them remain on the waiting list. your measure would remain strong. However, this was not the right thing to do but once you had treated them this would impact that metric which was likely to be poor over the coming months. TP noted that the waiting had continued to get bigger which would suggest that either the Trust was not coping with the numbers coming through and people were therefore waiting longer and longer or that there was a higher rate of cancer in the population. Was this as a result of COVID reducing the body’s ability to fight small cancers that would normally disappear. JD-T also noted the highest number of referrals happening in August and wondered whether there was any national modelling being done around this. JT informed members that Professor Peter Johnson would be one of the presenters at the board study session and this would be a good opportunity to explore this. Anecdotally we appeared to be seeing more sicker patients who had a number of co-morbidities presenting as more complex patients and work was underway to investigate this further particularly from an inequality lens in terms of the demographics that were being referred on the two week wait referrals. PG noted that during COVID people tended to not present which was part of the reason for a backlog of presentations but that diagnosis appeared to also be increasing. Understanding why was not yet known and a discussion in the study session would be helpful to understand that particularly better. In terms of the appraisals spotlight SH noted: Page 6 • That a key element from the People Strategy was the Trust’s ability to provide meaningful progression for our staff. From the feedback given in the staff survey many staff believed that during the pandemic they had not received the development, training or the appraisal focus that they would have wanted. • Work to address that included a multi disciplinary team who had focused on refreshing the appraisal paperwork which had been well received. The team had a wide breadth of staff including clinical, operational and trade union representatives. Previously the number of appraisals carried out had been good but the quality had been low so training for appraisals had been reviewed to improve the quality of the appraisal discussion. Whilst the Trust was better than its peers, this simply highlighted that the NHS was not particularly good at appraisals. • A pilot had been implemented to better align appraisals with objective setting to enable them to cascade down to staff better which would conclude shortly and would feed into the process. JD-T noted that Division D consistently outperformed the other Divisions in terms of completed appraisals. In addition the staff survey showed that they were the only division that achieved a green in terms of an appraisal helping staff to undertake their job. This showed a correlation between the two and wondered what was the learning was. SH noted that Division D had historically had good rates of completion and had been involved in the refresh and had highlighted the need to focus at every level of the team. JH asked whether those within Division D had better promotion and development opportunities which could link back into the value of conducting a good appraisal. SH advised that there was nothing obvious but Division D had some good engagement scores overall but this could be looked at further. GB noted that the new appraisal paperwork had removed the need to consider how an individual contributed to the values of the organisation, and although the values were still referenced, questioned how through appraisal the behaviours and values continued to sit within the process. SH noted that the review of the values work was important and it would be good to look at how that could be brought back into the appraisal process to add value. Decision: The Board noted the report. 5.5 Finance Report for Month 5 IH presented the report and highlighted: • The Trust continued to focus on the underlying deficit, which for months 1 – 4 had been around £3m which had slightly worsened to £3,5m as energy costs started to grow. A deep dive had taken place at the Finance & Investment (F&I) Committee looking at some of the actions being undertaken and some of the future forecasts before the energy cap would come in and whether this would help or otherwise. There would still be a small increase in run rate into the latter half of the year which would deteriorate the Trust’s underlying position as we entered the winter months. • The key drivers were consistent. As well as energy prices, there were some drug costs pressures as we were on a block contract, cost associated with COVID including backfill of staff together with all of the operational pressures that had already been discussed. Page 7 • Cost Improvement Programme (CIP) performance had improved following the introduction of the Cost Savings Group. The Trust was currently achieving more than 80% identified which should increase going forward. In month delivery had also been strong. Everything was being done to try and improve the financial position but there were a number of pressures that were outside our control that would impact this. • Elective recovery framework performance had dipped in line with the operational pressures discussed, but UHS continued to achieve 106%, above the required 104%. UHS was in the top Trusts both in the region and nationally in terms of activity levels compared to 2019/20 levels. However, this was not resolving the waiting list issue that continued to grow. UHS continued to do well in terms of 2019/20 levels compared to other Trusts but this did create a financial pressure. • The Trust had reported a £12m deficit. The Hampshire and Isle of Wight deficit was £53m. This was an outlier within the region, and the region was an outlier nationally. This had resulted in the system becoming an outlier in terms of financial performance which might have adverse consequences going forward including upon the SOF rating. • The underlying deficit reduced the Trust’s cash balance and that may put pressure on our future capital investment programme. KE referred to the financial risks table and asked what the difference was between the original worst case of £57m and the forecast assessments which showed, best, intermediate and worst case? IH noted that the original worstcase scenario had been presented to the Board as part of the planning submissions, to show the range of possible financial outcomes with everything that was known at the time. The current best, intermediate and worst case were the current assessments. KE noted that UHS could not control COVID costs, energy costs and inflationary measures and that this would need Treasury to provide support. IH reminded members that nationally there was a drive to find efficiencies. It was likely that many Trusts would go into deficit this year but it was not clear what the response would be to that. KE commended the work on the CIP which was a fantastic achievement. He questioned whether the position could improve further with more CIP savings. IH advised that a target date of Month 6 had been agreed in terms of everything being identified 100% and the position might improve next month. IH noted that UHS was at 106% activity levels with the national average being around 94%. The 12% from the Elective Recovery Fund (ERF) would be worth about £20m to the Trust. If the Trust had undertaken less activity the Trust’s financial position would be a lot less stark but UHS continued to put patients first and try and balance performance, money and quality. In response to a question from JD-T IH confirmed that as of today and what was currently known, UHS could still achieve the best-case scenario. DAF suggested that in view of what had happened in markets over the recent days it was unlikely that the NHS would want to approach the Treasury. UHS should proceed on the basis that there would be no financial support being provided. In those circumstances the Board would need to consider at what point more significant interventions would need to be made. Page 8 5.6 People Report for Month 5 JD-T noted that this was a new report for the board. Previously the report had been presented to the Trust Executive Committee (TEC) and following discussion in that forum a decision was made that it should be presented to the open board for discussion. SH presented the report and noted that the version before the Board was the detailed report presented to TEC. Going forward a more streamlined report, with key highlights, would be developed for the Board discussion. SH highlighted: • Some of the key actions that had been taken in relation to recruitment and retention and also the cost-of-living crisis. There had been discussions at a previous closed board meeting around concerns in relation to the recruitment and retention of certain staff groups and some actions had been put in place to mitigate those concerns. • SH highlighted the challenges around Advanced Clinical Practitioners (ACPs) and pay rates. A few local organisations including GP practices were providing a differential rate of pay with a higher pay band. In the short term this was being addressed by a recruitment and retention premium to bridge the gap, together with conducting a workforce review that would seek to understand the banding and whether there was a need for a permanent band change. However, it would be important to consider the possible impact on the change to other bands across the Trust and manage that appropriately. • UHS continued to undertake Health Care Assistant (HCA) recruitment well, but the challenge was retention. There were good pathways in place but work was needed to strengthen landing boards and increase the support available in the hubs and implement some band 2 to band 3 progression roles for those who did not want to utilise the nursing apprenticeship route. • Demand on the recruitment team had significantly increased with a 25% increase of requested support. Some additional resource had been agreed to support them both within the organisation but also to increase engagement outside of the organisation. • In terms of cost of living, SH had been undertaking a lot of work with partners across the Trust including trade unions and listening to staff voices. There were a number of elements that were not under the Trust’s control including the national pay award and the rising energy crisis so the approach being taking was to take a balanced and fair approach. A number of things would be implemented which would be highlighted to all staff. A substantial discount was being negotiated in the restaurant to help people to eat a broad range of foods at competitive prices. The cycle to work scheme was being expanded, and there was some targeted support for those with high mileage within the organisation. For the 200 or so families who used the nursery the price was being rolled back to April this year. • The Trust already has a range of general support which would be expanded to make sure that we were targeting the right people. Through a partnership with the ICS we were linking up with the Citizens Advice Bureau to provide really high quality financial advice to our staff. We were focusing on crisis, and working with the Charity, had set up a hardship fund of £20,000 which would be distributed to the most challenging cases where staff had been identified as a particular Page 9 hardship case they would be able to eat free at the restaurant. Arrangements had also been made with a local charity to provide vouchers and food parcels. Discussion had taken place as to whether a food bank should be set up on site which logistically would have been difficult, so the decision to work with the charity was agreed to be the best approach to deliver that service for us. • Discussions had taken place at the Trust Executive Committee (TEC) who had fully supported the measures noting the impact on the nonrecurrent spend. KE suggested that this was a very sensible, targeted group of things to support our people. However, asked if the cost of £2.3m was currently included in the financial reports. IH advised that it was not included although some of the nonrecurrent elements had a funding source so would not hit the underlying position. In terms of annual leave buy out there were accruals from previous years. However, there were some recurrent costs. The measures were targeted, proportionate and in line with the Trust’s values for the current pressures being faced and if the Trust did not do anything it would likely increase costs or consequences elsewhere. DAF noted that the report was the same as presented to the TEC at which there had been a more detailed conversation. It would be helpful to understand which areas of the report were more relevant and appropriate for the Board conversation which could be discussed at the next People and OD POD) Committee meeting. Action: SH. JH supported the proposals within the paper and noted that they had also been presented to the People and OD Committee (POD). POD would be tracking the progress of each of the initiatives to ensure that they were delivering as anticipated. JH asked if the Trust had looked at what others were doing to ensure that we were doing everything possible for our staff. SH confirmed that discussions had taken place locally and that the Trust was one of the first to implement the range of measures which were similar to those of others. Nationally, there had been a push to have a collective response, noting that the NHS employed 1.5m people and that there would be national support that would be available shortly. TP noted the importance of having a people report at the Board and whilst the contents were good suggested that they could be presented in a more accessible way. FM also noted the importance of the report and discussion but wondered what staff morale was. If the finance, performance and people report were considered as a whole it was clear that staff were facing a lot of pressure and there was insufficient staff due to high turnover. The volume of patients was increasing which meant that the staff that the Trust did have, had to work harder and longer with pay that was not great and a cost-of-living crisis to deal with. This must have an impact on staff morale and was there also an impact on patient care? SH noted that morale was challenged which was recognised in the executive updates. The Trust undertook a quarterly staff survey alongside the current national annual staff survey and those results have been included within the report. The recent results discussed motivation, engagement and advocacy in Page 10 the organisation and UHS scores were still consistently in the top 10 of the NHS. However, the entirety of that engagement score was deteriorating. Morale was challenged and how that impacted on care was discussed in other forums. GB chaired the Quality Governance Steering Group (QGSG) which fed into the Quality Committee and focused on quality whether that be from the engagement of our staff or other challenges. GB suggested that it was a mixed picture. People enjoyed working as a team and we can see them pull together and work as a team through the challenges. There were a number of different pockets in the organisation who believed that they were in a worst situation following the pandemic and it was important to move out of that space and recognise this as a whole. In terms of quality, it was important to retain a close focus on quality and in some other Trusts they were starting to experience a significant challenge with regards to their quality indicators. At UHS there were some potential early indications that were being closely monitored. Without a doubt staffing levels, and the way in which we looked at the wards, impacted on patient experience and outcome. JD-T noted that one of the proposals was for staff to be able to sell back annual leave and being able to easily access the bank but if this was considered in the wider context, we had staff who were tired and not able to take leave as they had sold it, and were looking to work extra hours on the bank. How did the Trust manage and balance this? How should we look at the overarching risks for the workforce, and consequently patient care and performance, and what were the things that we needed to do to balance that. It would be helpful if the report could address some of those challenges to help the Board’s understanding. In addition JD-T asked NEDs to feedback what they would want to see within the report to enable an effective discussion. Action: SH and All NEDs JH asked about exit surveys and wondered if there was any information from them that could support our approach. SH advised that approximately 30% of staff completed exit surveys which needed to be increased. Pay for the lower paid staff had become an issue. SH reminded members that he chaired the ICS people officers group and that group had been looking at how collectively they could support retention and were looking to purchase better exit surveys for the system pulling together their collective buying power. Decision: The Board noted the report. 5.4 Integrated Performance Report for Month 5 (part two) Having noted the previous discussions under items 5.5 and 5.6 JD-T suggested that a discussion on the remaining of the IPR would be helpful and the following questions and comments were made: • JB noted that on pages 31 and 35, F1 – F5 this suggested that in terms of digital we believed that this was going to transform our efficiencies but it was not clear what the metrics indicated nor were some of them very high. PG suggested that there was an amazing resource in my medical record which we were not really making the most of. Work was needed to raise awareness with both patients and clinicians. Having used it as a patient it had been really helpful and enabled him to go paperless. JT noted that there was a business case that was overdue Page 11 for my medical record around how we industrialised it across the Trust which should provide some huge benefits and would bring a timeline back as to when this would happen. Action: JT JT noted that there was some big digital change happening with the rolling out of speech recognition and some E tools. In addition it would be helpful to look at the indicators to understand whether they were the right ones and review them as part of the digital updates which could be discussed at F&I. Action: JT The Board discussed the importance of giving people an overwhelming reason to access my medical record noting that the NHS App had initially been used for COVID vaccinations but could now enable people to order prescriptions and book appointments. JD-T noted the Serious Incident reports and the number of harm falls which looked higher than previously and wondered in terms of the pressures we were seeing and the issues around workforce should the Board be concerned about this? GB advised that it had recently been falls awareness week. There had been a number of successful programmes in the Trust including bay watch, but with reduced staffing numbers that had became a challenge and some more deliberate high impact actions were needed to reduce those falls. A deep dive into this would be brought to a future meeting. Action: GB GB confirmed that COVID numbers were rising. There were 66 patients with COVID some of whom were both asymptomatic and symptomatic. 5.7 Break The break took place prior to the Safeguarding Annual Report. 5.8 Safeguarding Annual Report 2021-22 and Strategy 2022-25 JDT suggested that the strategy should be discussed first noting that both had been discussed at the Quality Committee. KMcG presented the strategy which had previously been presented to the Trust Board two years ago before Covid. The strategy had been reviewed and updated in line with new legislation and aligned to UHS values and now included maternity services. Some of the strategy linked to children and adult reviews and making safeguarding personal together with our partners and developing stronger links within maternity, the emergency department and the wider hospital. Joining this up with the domestic abuse strategy and ensuring that we were always improving particularly around training and education including level 3 requirements. In terms of the Annual Report from a children’s perspective there were three main highlights: Page 12 • A significant increase, from 3700 to 6004, in the number of information sharing forms (ICF) which come through the ED where a child may possibly be at risk. In particular numbers had increased in the number of children presenting with mental health problems, particularly the 0 – 4 age group. This had been discussed at the Health Safeguarding Looked After Children Partnership who were looking at the 0 – 19 service provision which had changed significantly with COVID and a possible pattern of children of parents accessing through ED rather than going via their GP. • In terms of mental health, for any child who presented in the ED with a mental health condition an ICF would be completed. The number of presentations remained high. Alongside this the number of deliberate harm incidents had risen from 676 to 898, drugs and alcohol referrals had risen as had assaults over the preceding year. • Level 3 safeguarding training was at about 61%. There were two main reasons for this which was capacity and demand for the service and also a change of reporting requirements impacting just over 2000 staff. Training was on the Integrated Care Board (ICB) Risk Register as it was a wider system issue. In terms of the Annual Report for adults CM highlighted the following: • A 31% increase in safeguarding activity from the previous year with a 162% increase in Section 42 inquiries. This was due to a number of reasons including the impact of COVID including the removal of social distancing rules. • A 35% increase in the number of allegations made against people in a position of trust which was something that was being seen across other local provider organisations. These were highly sensitive cases and required significant safeguarding oversight and management alongside collaboration with HR colleagues and the relevant clinical areas, which had a significant impact on the team. • The creation of a new Mental Capacity Act (MCA), Deprivation of Liberty (DoL) and Liberty Protection Safeguards (LPS) team who supported people over the age of 16. Both locally and nationally this was one of the first teams that had been established. The team had worked to embed MCA as every day business which was key to the preparation for when LPS become law later next year or early the following year. • In terms of Learning Disability and Autism there was a lack of local provision which had been acknowledged by the ICS and work was underway in relation to service review and what this needed to look like going forward. GB thanked the team noting how hard they worked to safeguard vulnerable adults and children. GB referenced the Panorama programme that had aired the previous night in terms of a number of safeguarding issues against a Mental Health Trust. Whilst often allegations against staff were not grounded they were taken very seriously and investigated thoroughly. JB noted the 35% increase against staff and wanted to understand what the outcomes of the investigations were and whether they were justified and whether allegations were being made against different groups. CM advised that one of the key areas of allegations focused on restraint and that the level Page 13 of restraint applied was disproportionate. These would always be reviewed. Security staff worked in pairs and wore body cameras which would always be reviewed. There had not been any cases recently where that had proved to be an issue. Although there had been a big increase the total number of cases was 38 so not large numbers. The previous year there had been 23 cases. CC questioned what element of this sat within the Trust and what sat with the ICS? SH noted the importance of remembering the broader picture. Nationally there had been a rise of safeguarding incidents, but it was important to remember that our workforce formed part of that population and had struggled with lockdown and were experiencing hardship. JD-T noted the need for a system approach to manage the increased mental health demand. However, safeguarding was a key focus for the Care Quality Commission (CQC) inspections post COVID, and a local provider had recently been deemed to be inadequate due to safeguarding issues and was an issue for UHS to pay particular attention to. KMcG noted that through legislation children had the Local Area Designated Officer (LADO) which was lacking in adults, which provided a really strong link with that external partner. TP noted that there had been a detailed presentation on this in the Quality Committee. This was a national trend in increased safeguarding problems. Whatever pressure we are put under it was important not to let our safeguarding procedures slip and it needed to be protected to ensure that it worked well. Decision: The Board received the report. 5.9 Medical Appraisal and Revalidation Annual Report including Board Statement of Compliance PG presented the report which was a statement of compliance with the medical regulations and had a robust and strong process in place. PG noted that a new appraisal system had been introduced which had been well received and enabled the ability for medical staff to collect all of their appraisal information within one system instead of the previous three systems. This was beneficial for not only staff but also for those managing the process as it provided real time feedback and information both from a quality assurance perspective but also would enable better management of the process and improve appraisal rates in the future. JD-T asked whether the doctor appraisal information was included within the IPR information that the Board received and SH confirmed that it was reported separately but included in the report and currently stood at 76.7%. CC suggested that the system was good but asked whether everyone was using it. PG confirmed that the system was a mandatory one and would be the only system going forward in the future. In terms of how many staff had undertaken the process this was a little ahead of the rest of the staff. However, the system enabled us to keep better track as people would need to have completed four appraisals within the previous five years to go forward with revalidation which provided a good incentive to keep on top of this. Page 14 JD-T asked for Board members to confirm that they approved the statement of compliance. Decision: The Board noted the report and approved the statement of compliance. 5.10 Clinical Outcomes Summary PG introduced the comprehensive summary noting that the clinical lead who had ran the service for a number of years, had now left UHS and a process of recruitment was currently underway which would provide an opportunity to refresh and review. DW presented the paper and focused on the outcome programme which was unique to UHS, with 64 services out of 86 reporting their outcomes. A total of 484 outcomes had been reported all of which had been reviewed by TP via the Quality Committee. There was a thriving clinical audit programme in place. The outcomes reported per care group covered a large proportion of patients and dealt with both national and international work. In particular DW highlighted: • The Research and Development (R&D) team and the work that they had undertaken internationally on the COVID booster trial. • The Bone Marrow Transparent unit. • Maternity and the nest support teams who focused on women who may need additional support because of serious mental illness, or they were from socially challenging situations, or were non-English speaking, addiction, were homeless or were suffering from domestic abuse and other difficult situations. 12% of patients that were being seen in maternity required nest care. KE asked why 18 services were not reported and DW advised that it was because they did not have the mechanisms in place to know what their outcomes were and work was underway to support them to develop those processes. KE asked whether any of the reds within the report were really poor and JD-T noted that the data used was for 2020 and did not understand why it was so out of date. TP advised that data was provided from national audits was often two years behind, because there was a year of collection, a year of analysis and then it would be published. Within his experience he had never come across a hospital that had measured nearly 500 clinical outcomes let alone p
Url: /Media/UHS-website-2019/Docs/About-the-Trust/Trust-governance-and-corporate-docs/2022-Trust-documents/Papers-Trust-Board-29-November-2022.pdf

UHS AR 22-23-6

Description: 2022/23 Incorporating the quality account University Hospital Southampton NHS Foundation Trust Annual Report and Accounts 2022/23 Presented to Parliament pursuant to Schedule 7, paragraph 25(4)(a) of the National Health Service Act 2006 © 2023 University Hospital Southampton NHS Foundation Trust Contents Welcome from our chair and chief executive 6 Overview and performance 8 Performance report 9 Overview 10 Accountability report 33 Directors’ report 34 Remuneration report 57 Staff report 71 Annual governance statement 91 Quality account 106 Statement on quality from the chief executive 107 Priorities for improvement and statements of assurance from the board 110 Other information 188 Annual accounts 222 Statement from the chief financial officer 223 Auditor’s report 224 Foreword to the accounts 230 Statement of Comprehensive Income 231 Statement of Financial Position 232 Statement of Changes in Taxpayers’ Equity 233 Statement of Cash Flows 234 Notes to the accounts 235 5 Welcome from the Chair and Chief Executive Officer University Hospital Southampton NHS Foundation Trust (‘UHS’ or the ‘Trust’) experienced another challenging year during 2022/23. Nonetheless, the Trust and its staff have continued to deliver for patients and the wider system in which it operates. Trust highlights from 2022/23 include: • Delivering an 8% increase in activity (compared to 2019/20) under the elective recovery programme, which places us as one of the top performing trusts in England. • Being recognised in the NHS staff survey as the seventh highest trust for recommendation as a place to work nationally and the best performing trust in opportunities for career development. • Celebrating 50 years as a medical school with the University of Southampton and continuing to pioneer UK and world-first research studies. • Enhancing the reputation of our specialist care – for example our bone marrow transplant team at UHS have the best patient outcomes in Europe. However, as was the picture across the country, UHS had an extremely challenging winter with attendances at our emergency department often in excess of 400 a day. This was driven in part by high prevalence of streptococcus A (strep A) in the community along with other seasonal illnesses such as influenza and high incidences of COVID-19 at times. Moreover, the lack of availability of care home beds and other care packages in the community has resulted in challenges in discharging patients who are ready to leave hospital and therefore we have been operating at or near to capacity throughout the year. At the time of writing, there continues to be operational pressures due to industrial action by the Royal College of Nursing and British Medical Association. Throughout the disputes, we have attempted to balance the right of our staff to strike with the need to minimise the impact on the Trust’s operations and patients and ensure that safety was not compromised. Our leadership team has engaged proactively with the unions to agree, where possible, derogations (i.e. services that will continue to be staffed during strikes) to ensure that the running of our hospitals can continue and that patients remain safe. We would like to express our thanks to all staff who have gone over and above during these periods of industrial action by being willing to do different work to usual, often at anti-social times of the day. While we cannot influence national negotiations, we are focusing on what we can control within UHS. Our people strategy published last year sets out how we will grow and deploy our workforce of today and the future as part of a thriving community to deliver world-class patient care. Building on this, we have recently launched our inclusion and belonging strategy so that as a leadership team we can deliver what is required for all our workforce to feel they can belong and thrive at UHS. The Trust achieved its Cost Improvement Plan (CIP) target of £45.6m for 2022/23, the highest in our history but despite this, ended the year with a deficit of £11m. The deficit was driven by a combination of factors including a substantial increase in energy prices, higher costs of medicines and equipment and temporary staffing costs as well as changes in recent years in respect of the NHS funding infrastructure, which adversely impacted the Trust relative to others during the year. In terms of the broader context, the Hampshire and Isle of Wight Integrated Care System, in which the Trust operates, reported an overall deficit for 2022/23 driven in part by a significant increase in staffing numbers when compared to 2019/20 as well as structural factors. 6 We have continued to make progress on our estates strategy, building new theatres and carrying out improvements to existing facilities, as well as opening a new park and ride for staff at Adanac Park and progressing plans for a new innovation campus there. During 2022/23 we invested over £88m of capital expenditure to meet our ambition of increasing capacity and improving services in order to manage the increasing demand. All development is underpinned by our green plan, which sets out areas of focus for decarbonising UHS and achieving the net zero target set by the NHS. The Trust has continued to support the Hampshire and Isle of Wight Integrated Care System, which was formed on 1 July 2022 to facilitate integration and collaboration across health and social care partners in the region. In particular, UHS has worked closely with the Integrated Care Board and other providers in the development of the operating plan for 2023/24. We have also continued to work with other partners in the region, including local authorities and the University of Southampton. The 13,000 staff of UHS are our greatest asset and we would like to express our gratitude to them for continuing to go above and beyond to put patients first under very challenging circumstances. Without our staff, we would be unable to fulfil our ambition to be a world-class organisation with world-class people delivering world-class care. Jenni Douglas-Todd Chair 26 June 2023 David French Chief Executive Officer 26 June 2023 7 PERFORMANCE REPORT Performance report Introduction from the Chief Executive Officer The Trust experienced another challenging year with the need to balance the delivery of quality patient care with a significant increase in demand for the Trust’s resources and the need to do so whilst maintaining a sustainable financial position. The Trust saw the number of patients on a waiting list under the 18-week referral to treatment pathway increase to just over 55,000 patients at the end of the year. Despite this, however, the Trust was successful in reducing the number of patients waiting more than 104 weeks to nil and in reducing the number of patients waiting more than 78 weeks to 14 by the end of the year. In addition, the Trust’s performance under the elective recovery programme placed it as one of the topperforming trusts in the country. Demand for non-elective care also significantly increased during the year with the emergency department seeing more than 400 attendances per day at some points, especially during the winter months. The industrial action seen in the latter part of 2022/23 placed further pressure on the Trust and resulted in a need to cancel elective procedures and outpatients appointments. However, on balance, the Trust was able to manage these events through effective planning and the engagement and support of its staff. Although the Trust was successful in recruiting to substantive roles, especially in terms of reducing the number of Health Care Assistant vacancies, the anticipated reduction in use of bank and agency staff was not seen. This, among other factors, such as the substantial increase in energy costs and the rate of inflation, posed a significant challenge in terms of the Trust’s financial position. Despite achieving savings of £45.6m, the Trust reported a deficit of £11m for 2022/23. 9 Overview About the Trust Our services University Hospital Southampton NHS Foundation Trust is one of the largest acute teaching trusts in England with a turnover of more than £1 billion in 2022/23. It is based on the coast in southeast England and provides services to over 1.9 million people living in Southampton and south Hampshire and specialist services, including neurosciences, respiratory medicine, cancer care, cardiovascular, obstetrics and specialist children’s services, to more than 3.7 million people in central southern England and the Channel Islands. The Trust is also a designated major trauma centre, one of only two places in the south of England to offer adults and children full major trauma care provision. As a leading centre for teaching and research, the Trust has close working relationships with the University of Southampton, the Medical Research Council, National Institute for Health and Care Research (NIHR), Wellcome Trust and Cancer Research UK. The Trust is consistently one of the UK’s highest recruiting trusts of patients to clinical trials and one of the top nationally for research study volumes as ranked by the NIHR Clinical Research Network. Every year the Trust: treats around 160,000 inpatients and day patients, including about 75,000 emergency admissions sees over 650,000 people at outpatient appointments deals with around 150,000 cases in our emergency department delivers more than 100 outpatient clinics across the south of England, keeping services local for patients The Trust provides most of its services from the following locations: • Southampton General Hospital – the Trust’s largest location, where a great number of specialist services are based alongside emergency and critical care and which includes Southampton Children’s Hospital. • Princess Anne Hospital – located across the road from Southampton General Hospital and providing maternity care and specialist care for women with medical problems during pregnancy and babies who need extra care around birth across the region. • Royal South Hants Hospital – although the Trust does not operate this site near the centre of Southampton it provides a smaller number of services from this location. • New Forest Birth Centre – located at Ashurst on the edge of the New Forest and run by experienced midwives and support staff it acts as a community midwifery hub. The services provided by the Trust are commissioned and paid for by the Hampshire and Isle of Wight Integrated Care System (ICS) and, in the case of more specialised services (such as treatments for rare conditions), by NHS England. Trust services are supported by clinical income, of which 55% is paid for by NHS England and 43% by the Hampshire and Isle of Wight Integrated Care Board. These are provided under a standard NHS contract, which incorporates ongoing monitoring of the Trust and the quality of the services provided. 10 Our structure UHS gained foundation trust status on 1 October 2011. A foundation trust is a public benefit corporation providing NHS services in line with the core NHS principles: that care should be universal, comprehensive and free at the point of need. The Trust is licensed as a foundation trust to provide these services by NHS England and the healthcare services we provide are regulated by the Care Quality Commission. Since 1 July 2022, the Trust has been part of the Hampshire and Isle of Wight Integrated Care System (ICS) when this was established through the Health and Social Care Act 2022. Each ICS has two statutory elements: an integrated care partnership (ICP) and an integrated care board (ICB). The ICP is a statutory committee jointly formed between the NHS integrated care board and all uppertier local authorities that fall within the ICS area. The ICP will bring together a broad alliance of partners concerned with improving the care, health and wellbeing of the population, with membership determined locally. The ICP is responsible for producing an integrated care strategy on how to meet the health and wellbeing needs of the population in the ICS area. The ICB is a statutory NHS organisation responsible for developing a plan for meeting the health needs of the population, managing the NHS budget and arranging for the provision of health services in the ICS area. The establishment of ICBs resulted in clinical commissioning groups (CCGs) being closed down. The Trust has been a university teaching hospital since 1971. The diagram below provides an overview of the overall organisational structure of the Trust. Division A Surgery Critical Care Opthalmology Theatres and Anaesthetics Public and foundation trust members Council of Governors Board of Directors Executive Directors Division B Division C Division D Cancer Care Emergency Medicine Helicopter Emergency Medical Services Medicine and Medicine for Older People Pathology Specialist Medicine Women and Newborn Maternity Child Health Clinical Support Cardiovascular and Thoracic Neurosciences Trauma and Orthopaedics Radiology Trust Headquarters Division 11 Our values Our values describe how we do things at UHS and act as a guide to all staff working with colleagues to deliver high quality patient care and a great patient experience every day. Our values are: Patients, their families and carers are at the heart of what we do. Their experience of our services will be our measure of success. Partnership between clinicians, patients and carers is critical to achieving our vision, both within hospital teams and extending across organisational boundaries in the NHS, social care and the third sector. We will ensure we are always improving services for patients through research, education, clinical effectiveness and quality improvement. We will continue to incorporate new ideas, technologies and create greater efficiencies in the services we provide. 12 Our strategy 2021-25 The Trust’s strategy was updated during 2020/21 to take account of everything our staff had experienced during the COVID-19 pandemic and what we had learnt from this. The vision for UHS is to become an organisation of world class people delivering world class care. Our strategy is organised around five themes and for each of these it describes a number of ambitions we aim to achieve by 2025. Theme Ambitions Outstanding patient outcomes, • We will monitor clinical outcomes, safety and experience of our experience and safety patients regularly to ensure they are amongst the best in the UK By 2025 we will strengthen our and the world. national reputation for outstanding • We will reduce harm, learning from all incidents through our patient outcomes, experience and proactive patient safety culture. safety, providing high quality care • We will ensure all patients and relatives have a positive experience and treatment across an extensive of our care, as a result of the environment created by our people range of services from foetal and our facilities. medicine, through all life stages and conditions, to end-of-life care Pioneering research • We will recruit and enable people to deliver pioneering research in and innovation Southampton. We will continue to be a leading teaching hospital with a growing, reputable and innovative research and development portfolio • We will optimise access to clinical research studies for our patients. • We will enable innovation in everything we do, and ensure that ‘cutting edge’ investigations and treatments are delivered in Southampton. that attracts the best staff and efficiently delivers the best possible treatments and care for our patients. World class people • We will recruit and develop enough people with the right Supporting and nurturing our knowledge and skills to meet the needs of our patients. people through a culture that values • We will provide satisfying and fulfilling roles, growing our talent diversity and builds knowledge and through development and opportunity for progression. skills to ensure everyone reaches • We will empower our people, embracing diversity and embedding their full potential. We must provide compassion, inclusion and equity of opportunity. rewarding career paths within empowered, compassionate, and motivated teams. Integrated networks and collaboration We will deliver our services with partners through clinical networks, collaboration and integration across geographical and organisational boundaries. • We will work in partnership with key stakeholders across the Hampshire and Isle of Wight integrated care system. • We will strengthen our acute clinical networks across the region, centralising when necessary and supporting local care when appropriate. • We will foster local integration with primary and community care as well as mental health and social care services for seamless delivery across boundaries. • We will build on our successful partnership with University of Southampton (UoS), growing our reputation as a national leading university teaching hospital. 13 Theme Foundations for the future Making our enabling infrastructure (finance, digital, estate) fit for the future to support a leading university teaching hospital in the 21st century and recognising our responsibility as a major employer in the community of Southampton and our role in broader environmental sustainability. Ambitions • We will deliver best value to the taxpayer as a financially efficient and sustainable organisation. • We will support patient self-management and seamless care across organisational boundaries through our ambitious digital programme, including real time data reporting, to inform our care. • We will expand and improve our estate, increasing capacity where needed and providing modern facilities for our patients and our people. • We will strengthen our role in the community as an employer of choice, a partner in delivery of services to our population and by leading the Greener NHS agenda locally. During each year of the strategy the Trust sets out a more detailed series of objectives to achieve and progress towards the delivery of its ambitions. In 2022/23 these objectives included: Outstanding patient outcomes, experience and safety Pioneering research and innovation World class people Integrated networks and collaboration Foundations for the future • Recovery, restoration and improvement of clinical services • Introducing a robust and proactive safety culture • Empowering and developing staff to improve services for patients • Always Improving strategy • Delivering a high-quality experience of care for all • Delivery of year two of the research and innovation investment plan • Strategy and partnership working • Growing, developing and innovating our workforce • A great place to work, develop and achieve • Compassionate and inclusive workplace for all • We Work in partnership with Integrated Care System and Primary Care Networks • Integrated Networks and Collaborations • Establishing Southern Counties Pathology Network • Establishing the Wessex Imaging Network • Develop Collaborations strategy • Creating a sustainable financial infrastructure • Making our corporate infrastructure fit for the future to support a leading university teaching hospital in the 21st century • Recognising our responsibility as a major employer in the community of Southampton and our role in delivering a greener NHS Performance against these objectives will be monitored and reported to the Trust’s Board on a quarterly basis. 14 Principal risks to our strategy and objectives The Board has identified and manages the principal risks to the delivery of its strategy and objectives through its board assurance framework. The principal risks to the delivery of its strategy and objectives identified by the Trust during 2022/23 were that: • There would be a lack of capacity to appropriately respond to emergency demand, manage the increasing waiting lists for elective demand, and provide timely diagnostics, that results in avoidable harm to patients. • Due to the current challenges, the Trust fails to provide patients and their families with a high-quality experience of care and positive patient outcomes. • The Trust would not effectively plan for and implement infection prevention and control measures that reduce the number of hospital-acquired infections and limit the number of nosocomial outbreaks of infection. • The Trust is unable to meet current and planned service requirements due to unavailability of qualified staff to fulfil key roles. • The Trust fails to develop a diverse, compassionate and inclusive workforce, providing a more positive experience for all staff. • The Trust fails to create a sustainable and innovative education and development response to meet the current and future workforce needs identified in the Trust’s longer-term workforce plan. • The Trust does not implement effective models to deliver integrated and networked care, resulting in sub-optimal patient experience and outcomes, increased numbers of admissions and increases in patients’ length of stay. • The Trust is unable to deliver a financial breakeven position and support prioritised investment as identified in the Trust’s capital plan within locally available limits (capital departmental expenditure limit (CDEL)). • The Trust does not adequately maintain, improve and develop its estate to deliver its clinical services and increase capacity. • The Trust fails to introduce and implement new technology and expand the use of existing technology to transform its delivery of care through the funding and delivery of the digital strategy. • The Trust fails to prioritise green initiatives to deliver a trajectory that will reduce its direct and indirect carbon footprint by 80% by 2028-2032 (compared with a 1990 baseline) and reach net zero direct carbon emissions by 2040 and net zero indirect carbon emissions by 2045. During 2022/23, the Trust continued to experience the impact of the COVID-19 pandemic. The need to ensure a safe environment for patients through stringent infection control processes impacted the Trust’s capacity due to the need to isolate patients with COVID-19 in separate areas of the hospital. In addition, outbreaks of norovirus during the winter months placed further pressure on hospital capacity. The impact of the pandemic continued to be felt in terms of staff absence due to becoming infected with COVID-19 as well as the significant impact on staff mental health. The higher than normal (i.e. pre-COVID) levels of staff absence placed additional strain on the Trust’s operations and led to increased expenditure due to the requirement to enlist bank and/or agency staff to maintain safe staffing levels. 15 Performance overview The Trust monitors a broad range of key performance indicators within its departments, divisions, directorates and through Trust executive committees. On a monthly basis, the Board and executive committee receives a performance report containing a variety of indicators intended to provide assurance in respect of the Trust’s strategy and that the care provided is safe, caring, effective, responsive and well-led. This report also includes the Trust’s performance against the national targets set by NHS England. The performance reports include a ‘spotlight’ section, which provides more detailed analysis of a particular area. Typically, this is one of either the national targets or the Trust’s performance against the expectations set out in the NHS Constitution. The monthly performance report is also published on the Trust’s website. The Chief Executive Officer provides a regular report on performance to the Council of Governors, which includes a range of non-financial and financial performance information. Capacity The pressures of the COVID-19 pandemic led to increases in the waiting times for patients and the number of patients waiting for more than a year increased significantly. During the year, the Trust achieved its goal of no patients waiting more than 104 weeks by July 2022 and finished the year with only 14 patients waiting for more than 78 weeks. However, the length of time patients are waiting for treatment remains one of the key risks for the Trust. This situation was compounded by the sustained demand for non-elective activity, which saw attendances at the emergency department rise to over 400 patients per day during some periods of 2022/23 and was consistently higher than previously was the case. The significant increase in referrals, often requiring more complex treatment, has seen the number of patients on a waiting list under the 18-week referral to treatment pathway increase to just over 55,000 patients at the end of the year. In addition, the industrial action during the year placed further strain on the Trust’s ability to both provide urgent care and manage its elective recovery programme. Quality and compliance Furthermore, difficulties in obtaining care home beds and other care packages in the community has resulted in challenges in discharging patients who are ready to leave hospital and therefore the Trust has been operating at or near to capacity throughout the year. The Trust continued to monitor the quality of care delivered throughout 2022/23. The Trust continued its focus on infection prevention and control, which had proven successful during the COVID-19 pandemic. The Trust progressed its Always Improving strategy and successfully supported the identification and implementation of 84 quality improvement projects. In addition, the Trust continued to implement the patient safety incident response framework as well as taking other steps to drive a safety culture within the organisation. Furthermore, the Trust conducted further trials of shared decision making between clinicians and patients and is a leading site nationally for shared decision-making principles. Further information can be found in the Quality Account. 16 Partnerships The new arrangements for integrated care systems were implemented in July 2022 with the Trust becoming part of the Hampshire and Isle of Wight Integrated Care System. As such, the Trust’s senior management frequently meets with peers from across the system to consider and agree matters of wider concern across the system. In addition, the Trust worked with the Integrated Care Board in order to develop its financial and capital plans for 2023/24 and beyond. The Trust also attends the Southampton Health and Wellbeing Board at Southampton City Council and in the Hampshire and Isle of Wight Acute Provider Partnership Board. During 2022/23, the Trust continued to progress research activities and opportunities with the University of Southampton and Wessex Health Partners. Workforce In addition, work continued in the development of an elective hub at Winchester with Hampshire Hospitals NHS Foundation Trust, which will provide the Trust with additional capacity to carry out its elective programme. The Trust’s key areas of focus during 2022/23 were in respect of increasing the substantive workforce and reducing staff turnover. Although the Trust was successful in recruiting to substantive posts, the expected reduction in reliance on bank and agency staff did not materialise, which meant that the Trust was 1,068 whole-time equivalents above its plan for 2022/23. Included in this figure is the TUPE transfer of genomics staff from Salisbury. A particular area of focus was the recruitment of Health Care Assistants where the Trust was successful in reducing the number of vacancies from 27% to 18%. Whilst the Trust was successful in reducing staff turnover from 14.9% in 2021/22 to 13.5%, it remained above the 12% target. However, the Trust did experience a reduction in staff absence from 4.7% in April 2022 to 4.3% in March 2023, and initiatives to improve staff wellbeing were an area of focus during the year. Estate Innovation and technology The industrial action in late 2022 and early 2023 posed significant challenges for the Trust, including in terms of the need to engage additional temporary staff to ensure patient safety. The Trust continued to invest in and develop its estate during 2022/23 including successful completion of the Paediatric Intensive Care Unit project, which delivered single rooms and specialist accent lighting alongside delivery of a ‘twin care’ room. There were a number of other significant projects during the year, including refurbishments of wards and work on creating new theatres as well as projects to improve staff wellbeing. These were part of over £88m of capital expenditure in 2022/23 that also included equipment, digital and the backlog maintenance programme. The Trust continued to promote research and development during 2022/23, including through partnerships with the University of Southampton and Wessex Health Partners. Furthermore, the Trust continued to examine ways to make use of technology to improve its service delivery. In particular, the Trust has promoted the use of MyMedicalRecord, which gives patients the ability to co-manage their healthcare online and through an app. 17 Sustainable financial model The Trust did not achieve breakeven status at the end of 2022/23 and reported a deficit of £11.037m at year-end. This was due to a number of factors, including the Trust’s underlying deficit as well as the increase in energy prices. The Trust was more exposed than most to fluctuations in the wholesale price of gas due to its reliance on a gas-powered energy supply. In addition, the Trust’s 8% uplift in elective activity when compared to 2019/20 was not fullyfunded, which placed further pressure on the Trust’s existing financial resources, which had been used to ensure a breakeven position in 2021/22. The continued use of bank and agency staff as well as the costs of industrial action in late 2022 and early 2023 further eroded the Trust’s financial position. Notwithstanding the above, the Trust did succeed in obtaining a number of sources of nonrecurrent funding during the year, including a successful bid for £29.4m of funding through the Public Sector De-Carbonisation Fund, which will be used to fund green initiatives as part of the Trust’s capital programme. The financial outlook across the NHS continues to appear very challenging during 2023/24 and the Hampshire and Isle of Wight Integrated Care System is forecasting one of the highest deficits in England. 18 Performance analysis COVID-19 Impacts Although the pandemic has ended and serious cases of COVID-19 have reduced significantly, the Trust continued to be impacted by COVID-19 during 2022/23. Heightened infection prevention control measures in respect of patients with COVID-19 placed additional stress on the Trust’s capacity due to the need to isolate those patients and there was a consequential reduction in the Trust’s ability to make most efficient use of its available spaces. Furthermore, the ongoing impact on the Trust’s staff has led to higher staff absence than was the case prior to the pandemic, particularly due anxiety, infectious diseases and colds and flu. • The Trust experienced an average number of 98.7 patients per day who tested positive for COVID-19. During the winter months, this number increased substantially to nearly 200. • During the year, an average of 3.6 intensive care/high-dependency beds per day were occupied by COVID-19 patients. However, at times this increased to as much as ten. • Although staff sickness rates remained higher than pre-pandemic, the Trust saw a decrease in the absence rate from 4.7% at the beginning of 2022/23 to 4.3% by the end of the period. COVID-19 Cases UHS average number of confirmed COVID-19 patients in bed (08:00 census) 250 200 150 100 50 0 4/1/20225/1/2022 6/1/20227/1/2022 8/1/2022 9/1/202210/1/202211/1/202212/1/2022 1/1/2023 2/1/20233/1/2023 Intensive care/higher care beds UHS average number of confirmed COVID-19 patients in an ICU/HDU bed (08:00 census) 12 10 8 6 4 2 0 4/1/20225/1/2022 6/1/20227/1/2022 8/1/2022 9/1/202210/1/202211/1/202212/1/2022 1/1/2023 2/1/20233/1/2023 19 Number of patients Emergency access through the emergency department The Trust continued to experience high demand from patients presenting to receive care in the emergency department throughout the year above that seen prior to the COVID-19 pandemic. In particular, during the period between January and March 2023, the Trust averaged 352 attendances per day compared to 301 during the same period in 2019/20, an increase of 17%. The Trust also saw a significant increase in attendances during December due to both seasonal illnesses, but also due to the prevalence of streptococcus A in the community with attendances sometimes over 400 per day. Furthermore, the industrial action during the latter part of 2022 and early 2023 placed further pressure on the Trust’s ability to deliver services. In addition, the difficulties in discharging patients in need of care either at home or in another setting resulted in reduced flow from the emergency department to the relevant ward(s), which placed further strain on the Trust’s performance. During the year, in order to reduce emergency department attendances, the Trust trialled using General Practitioners to triage and see more straightforward patients who would otherwise have presented to the emergency department. Although this trial did result in a slight reduction in terms of number of patients and waiting times in ambulatory majors and majors, the affordability and value for money of this scheme is under review. Number of patients presenting to the emergency department 16,000 14,000 12,000 10,000 8,000 6,000 4,000 2,000 0 Apr-22 May-22 Jun-22 Jul-22 Aug-22 Sep-22 Oct-22 Nov-22 Dec-22 Jan-23 Feb-23 Mar-23 As a result of the increase in demand upon the emergency department, there continued to be a significant adverse impact on timeliness of care. The Trust failed to meet the national target of 95% of main emergency department/type 1 attendances seen within four hours, achieving 64.5% in March 2023, although this performance was above average in England. 20 % standard met Emergency access 4hr standard UHS vs NHSE average Type 1 performance 70% 0 10 60% 20 50% 30 40 40% 50 Apr-22 May-22 Jun-22 Jul-22 Aug-22 Sep-2 2 Oct-22 Nov-22 Dec-22 Jan-23 Feb-2 3 Mar-23 UH S NHSE average UHS rank amongst NHSE trusts Rank Ambulance handovers are an area of focus for NHS England, with a target of all handovers having to take place within 15 minutes and none waiting more than 30 minutes. The Trust performed well in this area with an average handover time of 17 minutes, having made the conscious decision to ensure that patients did not queue in ambulances at the expense of patients being queued within emergency department majors – thus impacting the Trust’s four-hour target, but meaning that ambulances were not queued outside the hospital as was seen in other areas of the country. Elective Waiting times Demand The year saw a continuation of the trend of increasing elective referrals experienced in 2021/22 following the pandemic, and referral rates continued to be above those seen prior to the pandemic. UHS Accepted Referrals 30,000 25,000 20,000 15,000 10,000 5,000 0 Apr-22 May-22 Jun-22 Jul-22 Aug-22 Sep-2 2 Oct-22 Nov-22 Dec-22 Jan-23 Feb-2 3 Mar-23 Number of accepted referrals 21 Activity The Trust experienced significant increases in terms of the number of hospital appointments, diagnostic tests and elective admissions during the year, exceeding levels in previous years. The Trust was one of the top performing trusts in terms of its elective recovery programme, achieving an 8% increase in its elective activity during the year when compared to 2019/20. However, performance in this area and in terms of outpatients appointments was negatively affected by the industrial action by nurses, junior doctors and other members of staff, which took place in late 2022 and early 2023 due to the need to cancel non-urgent procedures and appointments in favour of maintaining safe staffing levels in areas such as the emergency department. In addition, the continued presence of COVID-19 as well as other illnesses such as influenza and norovirus placed significant pressure at times on the Trust’s capacity due to the need to implement appropriate infection prevention control measures. Furthermore, difficulties in discharging patients fit to be discharged, but in need of a care package, placed additional strain on the Trust’s capacity. Elective admissions (including day case) Post-COVID-19 pandemic Elective (including day case) recovery (% of same month compared between March 2019 – February 2020) 105% 100% 95% 90% 85% 80% 75% Apr-22 May-22 Jun-22 Jul-22 Aug-22 Sep-22 Oct-22 Nov-22 Dec-22 Jan-23 Feb-23 % recovery Outpatient attendances Post-COVID-19 pandemic outpatient seen recovery (% of same month compared between March 2019 – February 2020) 140% 0 90% 10 20 40% 30 Apr-22 May-22 Jun-22 Jul-22 Aug-22 Sep-22 Oct-22 Nov-22 Dec-22 Jan-23 Feb-23 UH S UHS rank amongst NHSE trusts % recovery Rank 22 Diagnostics The Trust measures performance on a total of 15 frequently used diagnostic tests. In March 2023, 22% of patients were waiting more than six weeks for diagnostics compared with the national target of less than 1%. Patients waiting for a diagnostic test to be performed (sum of 15 different frequently used tests) UHS diagnostic waiting list volume 12,000 11,500 11,000 10,500 10,000 9,500 Apr-22 May-22 Jun-22 Jul-22 Aug-22 Sep-2 2 Oct-22 Nov-22 Dec-22 Jan-23 Feb-2 3 Mar-23 Diagnostic waiting list volume Percentage of patients waiting over 6 weeks for a diagnostic test to be performed Diagnostic 6 week wait performance UHS vs. NHSE average 35% 30% 25% 20% 15% 10% 5% 0% Apr-22 May-22 Jun-22 Jul-22 Aug-22 Sep-22 Oct-22 Nov-22 Dec-22 Jan-23 Feb-23 Mar-23 UH S NHSE average % standard met 23 Referral to Treatment The Trust continued to see an increase in the number of patients being referred for treatment during 2022/23 with just over 55,000 patients on a waiting list under the 18-week referral to treatment pathway at the end of the year. Averaged across the year, the volume of referrals exceeded the Trust’s theoretical capacity by around 3.5%. Due to this significant demand, the Trust only achieved 63.2% of patients being treated within 18 weeks of referral in March 2023 compared with the monthly target of more than 92%. However, despite this, the Trust remained in the top quartile when compared to other teaching hospitals, reflecting that this growth in demand continues to be a national challenge. During 2022/23, the national target was to ensure that there were no patients waiting over two years for treatment by July 2022, and that there were no patients waiting more than 78 weeks by the end of March 2023. Long-waiting patients were an area of particular focus for the Trust during the year with no reported two-year waits since November 2022 and only two between the period June-November due to patients choosing to delay their treatment. This was a significant improvement compared to the peak of 171 patients reported in December 2021. Similarly, the Trust made progress in reducing the number of patients waiting over 78 weeks for treatment. In February 2023, the Trust reported 84 patients in this category compared to the peak of over 900 patients in September 2021. By the end of March 2023, the Trust had managed to further reduce this number of patients to 14, with those in breach of the target all due to the complexity of the cases. UHS referral to treatment waiting list 56,000 54,000 52,000 50,000 48,000 46,000 44,000 Apr-22 May-22 Jun-22 Jul-22 Aug-22 Sep-22 Oct-22 Nov-22 Dec-22 Jan-23 Feb-23 Mar-23 24 Number on waiting list % standard met Percentage of patients waiting up to 18 weeks between referral and treatment RTT 18 week performance UHS vs. NHSE average 70% 65% 60% 55% 50% Apr-22 May-22 Jun-22 Jul-22 Aug-22 Sep-22 Oct-22 Nov-22 Dec-22 Jan-23 Feb-23 Mar-23 UH S NHSE average Percentage of patients waiting more than 52 weeks between referral and commencement of a treatment for their condition Number of patients Rank UHS Referral to treatment patients waiting more than 52 weeks 3,000 0 2,500 10 2,000 20 1,500 30 1,000 40 500 50 0 60 Apr-22 May-22 Jun-22 Jul-22 Aug-22 Sep-22 Oct-22 Nov-22 Dec-22 Jan-23 Feb-23 Mar-23 UH S UHS rank amongst NHSE trusts % of RTT patients RTT % of patients waiting more than 52 weeks UHS vs. NHSE average 5.0% 0 4.5% 20 40 4.0% 60 3.5% 80 Apr-22 May-22 Jun-22 Jul-22 Aug-22 Sep-22 Oct-22 Nov-22 Dec-22 Jan-23 Feb-23 Mar-23 UH S UHS rank amongst NHSE trusts Rank 25 % standard met Cancer Waiting Times The Trust is one of 12 regional cancer centres in the UK offering treatment for rare and complex cancers as well as cancer in children and brain cancer. The Trust has historically been in the upper quartile, relative to teaching hospital peers. Due to loss of key members of staff and industrial action, the Trust’s performance has slipped over the year with 72.5% of patients seen within two weeks in March 2023 following referral by a General Practitioner for suspected cancer (national target: > 93% per month). Cancer waiting times - 2 week wait performance UHS vs NHSE average 100% 0 80% 50 60% 100 40% 150 Apr-22May-22 Jun-22 Jul-22 Aug-22 Sep-22 Oct-22 Nov-22 Dec-22 Jan-23 Feb-23Mar-23 UH S NHSE average UHS rank amongst NHSE trusts Rank Referrals for January to March 2023 were at the highest for that month for the past five years and overall referral volumes in 2022/23 averaged 2,049 patients per month, 8% higher than in 2021/22 and 28% higher than in 2019/20. The national target was for 96% of patients to commence treatment within 31 days of diagnosis. However, in March 2023, the Trust only achieved 87.9%, but this figure hides considerable variation dependent on the tumour site and type of cancer with a range of 100% for haematology and children’s cancers to 71% for skin. The high rate of referrals led to a significant backlog in terms of patients waiting longer than 62 days for treatment. However, the Trust took steps to reduce this backlog by more than 50% through a dedicated recovery programme. In March 2023, the Trust treated 54.8% of patients within 62 days of referral compared to the target of more than 85%. Treatment for Cancer within 62 days of an urgent GP referral to hospital Cancer waiting times 62 day RTT performance UHS vs. NHSE average 80% 60% 40% 20% 0% Apr-22 May-22 Jun-22 Jul-22 Aug-22 Sep-22 Oct-22 Nov-22 Dec-22 Jan-23 Feb-23 Mar-23 UH S NHSE average % standard met 26 First definitive treatment for cancer within 31 days of a decision to treat % standard met Cancer waiting times 31 day RTT performance UHS vs. NHSE average 95% 90% 85% 80% 75% Apr-22 May-22 Jun-22 Jul-22 Aug-22 Sep-22 Oct-22 Nov-22 Dec-22 Jan-23 Feb-23 Mar-23 UH S NHSE average Quality priorities The Trust set eight quality priorities in 2022/23, which were aimed at ensuring it continued to deliver the highest quality of care. The quality priorities were shaped by a range of national and regional factors as well as local and Trust‐wide considerations. The Trust recognised the overriding issues of significant operational pressures being felt right across the health and social care system, including those associated with the previous two years of the COVID-19 pandemic. The challenge was to deliver the best quality care in the context of these operational pressures, and the Trust set its quality priorities accordingly. Out of the eight priories set, the Trust achieved five and partially achieved three. Priority One: Enhancing capability in Quality Improvement (QI) through our Always Improving strategy The transformation team has grown to over thirty team members including project support officers, project managers, benefit realisation managers. This has allowed the Trust to develop that systematic organisational approach to guide and support its staff in their QI projects. The Trust originally set a target of delivering fifty quality improvement projects but have successfully supported a total of 84 (55 local and 29 flow improvements). These are local change projects which were identified, proposed, led, and delivered by the people who do the work. To date over 1500 people have been trained in the Trust’s improvement approach, which exceeds the original target of 500. The Trust also developed a QI project register and held an Always Improving conference. Priority Two: Developing a culture of kindness and compassion to drive a safety culture The Trust only partially achieved this priority as plans to fully deliver training were affected by operational pressures. However, during the year a variety of communication platforms were used to make sure staff understood the Trust’s vision and were kept up to date with plans and progress. The Trust worked to develop and embed a ‘just culture’ allowing staff to speak up and ask, “what happened and how do we learn?” and developed ‘stop for safety’ staff huddles. Priority Three: We will improve mental health care across the Trust including support for staff delivering care The Trust only partially achieved this priority as several key quality improvement projects have not yet been delivered, and the mental health strategy not yet been finalised. However, a training needs analysis was completed and significant staff training and an education scheme were introduced in response to the findings of the analysis. Mental health champion training has been delivered to 153 staff and IT systems have been improved to help capture vital data to help shape the Trust’s service. 27 Priority Four: Recognising and responding to deterioration in patients During 2021/22 the Trust successfully introduced national Paediatric Early Warning System (nPEWS) into its Southampton Children’s Hospital and UHS is now part of the national test and trial of nPEWS which is assessing the usability of the scoring system. The Trust has also explored how nPEWS can be adapted for children with complex medical conditions requiring interventions (including non-invasive ventilation) as part of their normal care. A daily heat map of escalation times over a 24-hour period was piloted in 2022 and will be rolled out across all adult’s inpatient areas during 2023. The Trust has also performed well with its cardiac arrest audits, and training and education programmes have consistently been delivered. September 2022 saw the implementation of a 24-hour paediatric outreach service. There is a deteriorating patient group and several successful QI projects have been introduced. Priority Five: Improving how the organisation learns from deaths The Trust only partially achieved this priority as it has been unable to establish a learning from deaths steering group. The Trust has introduced a mortality governance coordinator/analyst and grown its bereavement care service. Priority Six: Shared Decision Making (SDM) The shared decision models started at UHS in 2021/22 and have continued to grow with investment in pilot roles to expand these models, which include several advanced nurse practitioner roles, models in paediatrics bringing Shared Decision Making to patients who are transitioning from paediatric to adult services, while in maternity we have introduced SDM in birth planning. When assessing delivery of SDM against NICE guidelines, UHS performs well, especially in targets related to Trust buy-in, governance and practices of pilot areas. This year the Trust has implemented training through key platforms and expanded patient involvement in the project. As a leading site nationally for SDM principles, UHS have worked with NHS England on creating materials for others to learn from. Priority Seven: Working with our local community to expose and address health inequalities During the year the Trust refocused its efforts on making sure that its involvement and participation activities support the health inequalities agenda, while also working to deliver responsive information and advice to patients, carers, and families. Priority Eight: Ensure patients are involved, supported, and appropriately communicated with on discharge During the year the Trust has focused on improved patient, carer and family involvement, and improved communication during the discharge process as well as prompting a more collaborative working between social and health care staff. Strong partnership working with external agencies has been developed to support a system approach to hospital discharge, develop digital solutions, develop the patient hub to support discharge and delivered education to UHS staff. More information can be found about how the Trust delivered and measured its quality priorities, including feedback from patients and staff and improvement aims and quality priorities for 2023/24, in the Trust’s Quality Account for 2022/23. 28 Financial performance The Trust delivered a deficit of £11 million from a revenue position of over £1.2 billion, once items deemed as “below the line” by NHS England, such as the financial position of the Southampton Hospitals Charity, were removed. The Trust was unable to deliver the planned breakeven position. Several material cost pressures were incurred, including unfunded high-cost drugs costs and energy prices. These were unable to be off set in full by a savings programme, despite delivery of £45.6m of efficiencies (2021/22: £15m). Trust operating income rose by £64m from the previous financial year, most notably funding the NHS pay award, as well as additional elective recovery funding. Income reduced from the prior year in relation to ending a nationally funded project regarding testing for COVID-19. The Trust has however been successful in increasing funding for research and development. Trust operating expenditure rose by £78m, incorporating funded inflationary costs as well as the cost pressures outlined above. The Trust has also continued its reinvestment of surplus cash into infrastructure for the Trust, with capital investmen
Url: /Media/UHS-website-2019/Docs/About-the-Trust/Annual-reports-and-quality-accounts/UHS-AR-22-23-6.pdf

UHS AR 23-24 Final

Description: 2023/24 Incorporating the quality account University Hospital Southampton NHS Foundation Trust Annual Report and Accounts 2023/24 Presented to Parliament pursuant to Schedule 7, paragraph 25(4)(a) of the National Health Service Act 2006 © 2024 University Hospital Southampton NHS Foundation Trust Contents Welcome from our chair and chief executive 6 Overview and performance 8 Performance report 9 Overview 10 Accountability report 37 Directors’ report 38 Remuneration report 62 Staff report 75 Annual governance statement 95 Quality account 111 Statement on quality from the chief executive 112 Priorities for improvement and statements of assurance from the board 115 Other information 180 Annual accounts 207 Statement from the chief financial officer 208 Auditor’s report 210 Foreword to the accounts 217 Statement of Comprehensive Income 218 Statement of Financial Position 219 Statement of Changes in Taxpayers’ Equity 220 Statement of Cash Flows 221 Notes to the accounts 222 5 Welcome from the Chair and Chief Executive Officer This has been another busy and undoubtedly challenging year across the NHS and UK health and social care system, and much of what has impacted the national picture has been reflected in the operational focuses and patient and people priorities for University Hospital Southampton NHS Foundation Trust (‘UHS’ or the ‘Trust’) over the last year. Meeting and continuing to overcome the challenges we have faced has required an organisation-wide team effort, and looking back at the successes we feel incredibly proud of the achievements of our 13,000 staff. Particular highlights include: • In the top ten in the country (7th) against government targets for elective recovery performance with 118% of activity compared with 2019. • Top-quartile performance against most performance metrics compared to similar sized teaching hospitals, including Emergency Department access, long-waiting patients on Referral to Treatment pathways, Diagnostics and Cancer performance. • Significant investment in new capacity through building new wards and theatres and refurbishing existing areas of the hospital. • Delivery of our highest ever Cost Improvement Programme saving. These achievements place us among the best performing trusts in England in several areas and are even more remarkable against a backdrop of continued periods of industrial action and increasing demand for our services, with many people coming to us with higher levels of acuity than ever before. The Trust’s performance in terms of elective recovery places it as one of the best-performing trusts in England and demonstrates the impact of the Trust’s decision to invest in additional capacity in prior years by building new wards and theatres. The Trust’s Emergency Department performance in respect of its four-hour waiting target at the end of March 2024 has attracted additional capital funding as part of an incentive scheme. Some of this funding will be used to increase the department’s same-day emergency care capacity during 2024/25. From a financial perspective, balancing the complexities of today’s challenges alongside the need to protect and ensure the long-term stability and quality of our service provision, has required the Board to take a number of considered and crucial efficiency improvement actions this year. Whilst challenging, the Trust has seen significant progress in delivering on both its forecasted finance position for 2023/24 and productivity targets. Achieving long-term financial stability is key to us continuing to invest in much needed upgrades and improvements to the parts of our estate that are ageing, and to developing new state-of-the-art facilities and infrastructure that increases our capabilities and capacity into the future. In the last year parts of the hospital have been transformed, with the opening of new wards, theatres and a skybridge to link the estate. Construction of a sterile services and aseptics facility has begun at Adanac Park and the expansion of our neonatal department, where we treat and care for some of our most vulnerable babies and their families, is underway. The development of a new aseptic facility at Adanac Park will have capacity to serve other hospitals within the region and is a significant opportunity for improved system-wide working. 6 We have also worked with our people to design spaces where they can rest, relax and recharge - including a new wellbeing hub and rooftop garden on the Princess Anne Hospital site. In addition, 40 staff rooms across the site have been refurbished thanks to funding from Southampton Hospitals Charity. During the year, the Trust worked to establish the Southampton Hospitals Charity as a separate charitable company to improve its ability to both raise and spend funds. This process completed on 1 April 2024. Work was carried out to refurbish a children’s ward during the year in partnership with the charity. Our people are our greatest asset, and we are pleased to see improvements from the annual staff survey in several areas - such as how people can work more flexibly, access to learning and development and improved satisfaction in support from line managers. We recognise the pressures and demands that come with working in this environment and will continue to ensure everyone working here feels heard, encouraged and supported when raising concerns. At UHS, every opportunity is taken to recognise and celebrate the incredible things our people do here every day, including the return of our in-person annual awards ceremony, monthly staff recognition events and the first ever ‘We Are UHS Week’. These occasions are an important reminder that, even when faced with challenges, there is so much to be proud of and celebrate across the whole Trust. Working together, both within the Trust and across organisational boundaries, remains one of our core values. The partnership between UHS and the University of Southampton is as strong as it has ever been, with more than 250,000 individuals having now taken part in research studies in Southampton. As the lead partner member for Acute Hospital Services on the Hampshire and Isle of Wight Integrated Care Board, we are proactively working with other trusts and healthcare providers in the region to improve the health of the community we serve. In addition, the Trust has continued to work in partnership with other providers across the system to build a shared elective orthopaedic hub in Winchester. It is anticipated that the health and social care system will continue to be a challenging environment in 2024/25. We recognise that many of the big challenges we face can only be solved in partnership with wider local partners, and we are committed to actively playing our part in delivering system-wide solutions. Equally, we will continue to focus on improving whatever is within our internal control, and to work collaboratively with our people to ensure our patients’ experience, safety and outcomes remain central to our decision-making and the actions of everyone at UHS. Jenni Douglas-Todd Chair 19 July 2024 David French Chief Executive Officer 19 July 2024 7 PERFORMANCE REPORT Performance report Introduction from the Chief Executive Officer As with 2022/23, this was another challenging year with continued increasing demand for the Trust’s resources and the need to balance this with the need to deliver quality patient care and at the same time maintain a sustainable financial position. Demand for non-elective care continued to increase with an average of 375 attendances per day to our main Emergency Department. In addition, the number of patients on the 18-week Referral to Treatment pathway rose to 58,000. Patients having no clinical criteria to reside in hospital, but unable to be discharged due to the lack of funded care in a more suitable location, posed and continues to pose a significant challenge for the Trust. The number of patients within this category was as high as 270 at times and was consistently higher throughout the year when compared to 2022/23. Despite this the Trust continued to perform well when compared to other comparable organisations, achieving some of the best Emergency Department and elective recovery fund performance in England. The Trust’s financial position continued to be difficult, which required some difficult decisions in respect of spending controls and controls on recruitment. The Trust focused in particular on controlling spending on temporary and agency staff, but in view of the overall workforce numbers compared to the 2023/24 plan, further controls were implemented in respect of substantive recruitment. Due to the additional controls and the Trust’s best delivery to date on its Cost Improvement Programme (£63.4m), the Trust achieved an end of year deficit of £4.5m, compared to the deficit of £26m anticipated in its 2023/24 plan. 9 Overview About the Trust Our services University Hospital Southampton NHS Foundation Trust is one of the largest acute teaching trusts in England with a turnover of more than £1.3 billion in 2023/24. It is based on the coast in south east England and provides services to over 1.9 million people living in Southampton and south Hampshire and specialist services, including neurosciences, respiratory medicine, cancer care, cardiovascular, obstetrics and specialist children’s services, to nearly four million people in central southern England and the Channel Islands. The Trust is also a designated major trauma centre, one of only two places in the south of England to offer adults and children full major trauma care provision. As a leading centre for teaching and research, the Trust has close working relationships with the University of Southampton, the Medical Research Council, National Institute for Health and Care Research (NIHR), Wellcome Trust and Cancer Research UK. The Trust is consistently one of the UK’s highest recruiting trusts of patients to clinical trials and one of the top nationally for research study volumes as ranked by the NIHR Clinical Research Network. Every year the Trust: treats around 155,000 inpatients and day patients, including about 70,000 emergency admissions sees over 750,000 people at outpatient appointments deals with around 150,000 cases in our emergency department The Trust provides most of its services from the following locations: • Southampton General Hospital – the Trust’s largest location, where a great number of specialist services are based alongside emergency and critical care and which includes Southampton Children’s Hospital. • Princess Anne Hospital – located across the road from Southampton General Hospital and providing maternity care and specialist care for women with medical problems during pregnancy and babies who need extra care around birth across the region. • Royal South Hants Hospital – although the Trust does not operate this site near the centre of Southampton it provides a smaller number of services from this location. • New Forest Birth Centre – located at Ashurst on the edge of the New Forest and run by experienced midwives and support staff it acts as a community midwifery hub. The services provided by the Trust are commissioned and paid for by the Hampshire and Isle of Wight Integrated Care System (ICS) and, in the case of more specialised services (such as treatments for rare conditions), by NHS England. Trust services are supported by clinical income, of which 54% is paid for by NHS England and 43% by integrated care boards, predominantly the Hampshire and Isle of Wight Integrated Care Board (ICB). These are provided under a standard NHS contract, which incorporates ongoing monitoring of the Trust and the quality of the services provided. 10 Our structure UHS gained foundation trust status on 1 October 2011. A foundation trust is a public benefit corporation providing NHS services in line with the core NHS principles: that care should be universal, comprehensive and free at the point of need. The Trust is licensed as a foundation trust to provide these services by NHS England and the healthcare services we provide are regulated by the Care Quality Commission. Since 1 July 2022, the Trust has been part of the Hampshire and Isle of Wight Integrated Care System when this was established through the Health and Social Care Act 2022. Each ICS has two statutory elements: an integrated care partnership (ICP) and an integrated care board. The ICP is a statutory committee jointly formed between the NHS integrated care board and all upper-tier local authorities that fall within the ICS area. The ICP brings together a broad alliance of partners concerned with improving the care, health and wellbeing of the population, with membership determined locally. The ICP is responsible for producing an integrated care strategy on how to meet the health and wellbeing needs of the population in the ICS area. The ICB is a statutory NHS organisation responsible for developing a plan for meeting the health needs of the population, managing the NHS budget and arranging for the provision of health services in the ICS area. The Trust has been a university teaching hospital since 1971. The diagram below provides an overview of the overall organisational structure of the Trust. Public and foundation trust members Council of Governors Board of Directors Executive Directors Division A Division B Division C Division D Surgery Critical Care Opthalmology Theatres and Anaesthetics Cancer Care Emergency Medicine Helicopter Emergency Medical Services Medicine and Medicine for Older People Pathology Specialist Medicine Women and Newborn Maternity Child Health Clinical Support Cardiovascular and Thoracic Neurosciences Trauma and Orthopaedics Radiology Trust Headquarters Division 11 Our values The Trust’s values describe how things are done at UHS and act as a guide to all staff working with colleagues to deliver high quality patient care and a great patient experience every day. These values are: Patients, their families and carers are at the heart of what we do. Their experience of our services will be our measure of success. Partnership between clinicians, patients and carers is critical to achieving our vision, both within hospital teams and extending across organisational boundaries in the NHS, social care and the third sector. We will ensure we are always improving services for patients through research, education, clinical effectiveness and quality improvement. We will continue to incorporate new ideas, technologies and create greater efficiencies in the services we provide. 12 Our strategy 2021-25 The Trust’s strategy was updated during 2020/21 to take account of everything its staff had experienced during the COVID-19 pandemic and what had been learnt from this. The vision for UHS is to become an organisation of world class people delivering world class care. The Trust’s strategy is organised around five themes and for each of these it describes a number of ambitions UHS aims to achieve by 2025. Theme Ambitions Outstanding patient outcomes, • We will monitor clinical outcomes, safety and experience of our experience and safety patients regularly to ensure they are amongst the best in the UK By 2025 we will strengthen our and the world. national reputation for outstanding • We will reduce harm, learning from all incidents through our patient outcomes, experience and proactive patient safety culture. safety, providing high quality care • We will ensure all patients and relatives have a positive experience and treatment across an extensive of our care, as a result of the environment created by our people range of services from foetal and our facilities. medicine, through all life stages and conditions, to end-of-life care. Pioneering research • We will recruit and enable people to deliver pioneering research in and innovation Southampton. We will continue to be a leading teaching hospital with a growing, reputable and innovative research and development portfolio • We will optimise access to clinical research studies for our patients. • We will enable innovation in everything we do, and ensure that ‘cutting edge’ investigations and treatments are delivered in Southampton. that attracts the best staff and efficiently delivers the best possible treatments and care for our patients. World class people • We will recruit and develop enough people with the right Supporting and nurturing our knowledge and skills to meet the needs of our patients. people through a culture that values • We will provide satisfying and fulfilling roles, growing our talent diversity and builds knowledge and through development and opportunity for progression. skills to ensure everyone reaches • We will empower our people, embracing diversity and embedding their full potential. We must provide compassion, inclusion and equity of opportunity. rewarding career paths within empowered, compassionate, and motivated teams. Integrated networks and collaboration We will deliver our services with partners through clinical networks, collaboration and integration across geographical and organisational boundaries. • We will work in partnership with key stakeholders across the Hampshire and Isle of Wight integrated care system. • We will strengthen our acute clinical networks across the region, centralising when necessary and supporting local care when appropriate. • We will foster local integration with primary and community care as well as mental health and social care services for seamless delivery across boundaries. • We will build on our successful partnership with University of Southampton (UoS), growing our reputation as a national leading university teaching hospital. 13 Theme Foundations for the future Making our enabling infrastructure (finance, digital, estate) fit for the future to support a leading university teaching hospital in the 21st century and recognising our responsibility as a major employer in the community of Southampton and our role in broader environmental sustainability. Ambitions • We will deliver best value to the taxpayer as a financially efficient and sustainable organisation. • We will support patient self-management and seamless care across organisational boundaries through our ambitious digital programme, including real time data reporting, to inform our care. • We will expand and improve our estate, increasing capacity where needed and providing modern facilities for our patients and our people. • We will strengthen our role in the community as an employer of choice, a partner in delivery of services to our population and by leading the Greener NHS agenda locally. During each year of the strategy the Trust sets out a more detailed series of objectives to achieve and progress towards the delivery of its ambitions. In 2023/24 these objectives included: Outstanding patient outcomes, experience and safety Pioneering research and innovation World class people Integrated networks and collaboration Foundations for the future • Increasing the number of reported Shared Decision-Making conversations. • Increasing the number of specialities reporting outcomes that matter to patients. • Rolling out the Patient Safety Incident Reporting Framework across the Trust. • Working with patients as partners to improve patient satisfaction. • Treating patients according to need but aiming for no patient to wait, other than through patient choice, more than 65 weeks for treatment. • Delivering national metrics for site set-up time to target for clinical research studies. • Improving the Trust’s position against peers. • Delivering year three of the Trust’s research and innovation investment plan. • Developing the five-year research and development strategy implementation plan and delivery of the first year. • Strengthening and broadening the partnership between the Trust and the University of Southampton. • Supporting delivery of the Trust’s workforce plan for 2023/24. • Reducing turnover and sickness absence rates. • Increasing overall participation in the NHS staff survey and maintaining overall staff engagement score. • Increasing the proportion of appraisals completed. • Delivering the first year objectives of the Inclusion and Belonging strategy. • Working in partnership with acute trusts to agree and implement the acute services strategy. • Producing and embedding an internal framework for network development. • Working with the local delivery system on vertical integration to reduce the number of patients without criteria to reside. • Working with system partners to open a surgical elective hub. • For the Trust to be seen as an ‘anchor institution’ in the local area. • Delivering the Trust’s financial plan for 2023/24. • Engaging the organisation in the challenge to manage demand so that capacity and demand are in equilibrium. • Delivery of the Always Improving strategy priorities. • Delivering the Trust’s capital programme in full. • Entering into a new energy performance contract and delivering the first year of the Public Sector Decarbonisation Scheme. Performance against these objectives was monitored and reported to the Trust’s Board on a quarterly basis. 14 At the end of 2023/24, the Trust had met the objectives set as follows: Corporate Ambition Outstanding patient outcomes, safety and experience Pioneering research and innovation World class people Integrated networks and collaboration Foundations for the future Totals Number of Objectives 5 5 5 5 5 25 Achieved in full 4 3 2 3 2 14 Partially achieved 1 2 2 1 3 9 Not achieved 0 0 1 1 0 2 Particular areas to highlight where the Trust has achieved strong delivery during the year include: • Delivery of quality priorities in Shared Decision-Making and the roll out of the Patient Safety Incident Response Framework. • Achieving the Trust’s 65-week waiter glide path. • Successful delivery of a number of research and development priorities, including work with the University of Southampton. • Maintaining sickness absence and turnover well below the targets set at the beginning of the year, and successfully delivering the first year of the Trust’s Inclusion and Belonging strategy. • Delivery of the Trust’s full available capital budget and completion of the first year of the Trust’s decarbonisation scheme. 15 Principal risks to our strategy and objectives The Board has identified and manages the principal risks to the delivery of its strategy and objectives through its board assurance framework. The principal risks to the delivery of its strategy and objectives identified by the Trust during 2023/24 were that: • There would be a lack of capacity to appropriately respond to emergency demand, manage the increasing waiting lists for elective demand, and provide timely diagnostics, that results in avoidable harm to patients. • Due to the current challenges, the Trust fails to provide patients and their families or carers with a highquality experience of care and positive patient outcomes. • The Trust would not effectively plan for and implement infection prevention and control measures that reduce the number of hospital-acquired infections and limit the number of nosocomial outbreaks of infection. • The Trust does not take full advantage of its position as a leading university teaching hospital with a growing, reputable and innovative research and development portfolio, attracting the best staff and efficiently delivering the best possible treatments and care for its patients. • The Trust is unable to meet current and planned service requirements due to unavailability of qualified staff to fulfil key roles. • The Trust fails to develop a diverse, compassionate and inclusive workforce, providing a more positive experience for all staff. • The Trust fails to create a sustainable and innovative education and development response to meet the current and future workforce needs identified in the Trust’s longer-term workforce plan. • The Trust does not implement effective models to deliver integrated and networked care, resulting in sub-optimal patient experience and outcomes, increased numbers of admissions and increases in patients’ length of stay. • The Trust is unable to deliver a financial breakeven position, resulting in: inability to move out of the NHS England Recovery Support Programme; NHS England imposing additional controls/undertakings; and a reducing cash balance, impacting the Trust’s ability to invest in line with its capital plan, estates and digital strategies and in transformation initiatives. • The Trust does not adequately maintain, improve and develop its estate to deliver its clinical services and increase capacity. • The Trust fails to introduce and implement new technology and expand the use of existing technology to transform its delivery of care through the funding and delivery of the digital strategy. • The Trust fails to prioritise green initiatives to deliver a trajectory that will reduce its direct and indirect carbon footprint by 80% by 2028-2032 (compared with a 1990 baseline) and reach net zero direct carbon emissions by 2040 and net zero indirect carbon emissions by 2045. During 2023/24, the Trust saw continued increased demand for its services, particularly in the Emergency Department In addition, the number of patients having no clinical criteria to reside in hospital, but unable to be discharged due to a lack of appropriate care packages was higher than anticipated and spiked during winter, which significantly impacted patient flow through the hospital and required the Trust to engage additional temporary staff. The number of patients in this category peaked at 270 during the winter. There were particular challenges in respect of those patients with a primary mental health care need who would be better cared for in a more suitable alternative setting. 16 Performance overview The Trust monitors a broad range of key performance indicators within its departments, divisions, directorates and through Trust executive committees. On a monthly basis, the Board and executive committee receives a performance report containing a variety of indicators intended to provide assurance in respect of the Trust’s strategy and that the care provided is safe, caring, effective, responsive and well-led. This report also includes the Trust’s performance against the national targets set by NHS England. The performance reports include a ‘spotlight’ section, which provides more detailed analysis of a particular area. Typically, this is one of either the national targets or the Trust’s performance against the expectations set out in the NHS Constitution. The monthly performance report is also published on the Trust’s website. The Chief Executive Officer provides a regular report on performance to the Council of Governors, which includes a range of non-financial and financial performance information. Capacity The Trust continued to experience high demand for its services, especially in the Emergency Department, with average demand during the year being around 375 patients presenting per day in the main adult and children’s emergency department. In addition, the Trust experienced a significant impact on flow within the hospital due to a high number of patients having no clinical criteria to reside in hospital but unable to be discharged. This number was as high as 270 at times during winter: an increase of around 50 patients when compared to the prior year. The Trust also saw an increase in the number of referrals with the number of patients on a waiting list under the 18-week Referral to Treatment pathway rising from approximately 55,000 to 58,000 by the end of the year. In common with other trusts, the ongoing industrial action also impacted the Trust’s ability to provide urgent care and deliver on its elective recovery programme. Quality and compliance Despite the challenges, the Trust’s Emergency Department performance was one of the highest in England in March 2024, which resulted in additional capital funding being awarded. In addition, the Trust’s elective recovery performance was one of the best in England at 118% compared to 2019. The Trust continued to monitor the quality of care delivered throughout 2023/24 through a number of established quality assurance programmes. Clinical leaders monitored key quality, safety and patient experience indicators such as falls, pressure ulcers and venous thromboembolisms. Quality peer reviews were carried out, most significantly through Matron-led Quality Walkabouts every week in and out of hours focusing on the five key CQC questions – safe, effective, responsive, caring, and well-led. The Trust’s Clinical Accreditation Scheme builds on this intelligence, with clinical areas completing self-assessments of performance and review teams completing onsite visits. Patient representatives were included in these review teams. Learning was shared at the Clinical Leaders’ Group and via quarterly reports. The Trust was an active partner in a South-East accreditation network, offering advice and a steer to providers who are just setting up or looking to develop their own scheme, and extended that advice and support to other providers in England. 17 On 15 May 2023, the CQC inspected the maternity and midwifery service at Princess Anne Hospital as part of their national maternity inspection programme. The inspection report was published 11 August 2023, and the Trust retained its overall rating of ‘good’. This year UHS introduced its Fundamentals of Care (FOC) initiative. Whilst this is not a new concept, there were concerns that missed fundamental care had been amplified during the COVID- 19 pandemic. This initiative aims to empower and educate staff at all levels to ensure fundamental care is at the heart of what the Trust does. The Trust completed its transition to the Patient Safety Incident Response Framework (PSIRF) and collaborated with the ICB to develop a PSIRF plan and policy to underpin the change. The Trust implemented the requirements in respect of ‘Martha’s Rule’ where patients, relatives and carers have a legal right to a rapid review by a critical care outreach team during an acute deterioration episode in and out of hours. The Trust continued its focus on infection prevention and control, responding rapidly to rises in infection over the winter, and successfully flexing initiatives and innovations to achieve successful management in a responsive manner. The Trust progressed its Always Improving strategy and successfully supported the identification and implementation of further quality improvement projects. This included improvements across theatres, inpatient flow and outpatient programmes. During the year, average length of stay was reduced by 1.64%, day theatre cancellations were reduced by 200, and 42,350 patients were placed onto Patient Initiated Follow Up (PIFU) pathways. Further information can be found in the Quality Account. Partnerships The Trust works within the Hampshire and Isle of Wight Integrated Care System, and is an active member of a number of partner groups including the Acute Provider Collaborative Board and the Health and Wellbeing Board. The Trust develops and agrees its annual financial plans with the Integrated Care Board. The Trust is a member of a number of specific partnership groups for particular services, including the Central and South Genomics Medicine Service, the Children’s Hospital Alliance and the Southern Counties Pathology Network. The Trust works actively as a partner with other provider organisations around clinical networks, particularly with acute Trusts within the Integrated Care System and others closely located geographically. The Trust also links closely with the University of Southampton on a number of topics including research, commercial development and education and has a developed meeting structure to oversee this. 18 Workforce The Trust’s key areas of focus during 2023/24 were in respect of increasing the substantive workforce whilst also reducing reliance on bank and agency usage, and reducing staff turnover and sickness. Although the Trust was successful in recruiting to substantive posts, the expected reduction in reliance on bank and agency staff did not materialise, which meant that the Trust was 331 whole-time equivalents above its plan for 2023/24. The Trust was successful in reducing staff turnover from 13.5% in 2022/23 to 11.4%, achieving the local target of . Cancer Waiting Times - 2 Week Wait Performance Cancer Waiting Times - 2 Week Wait Performance 100% 90% 80% 70% 60% 50% 40% Apr-23 May-23 Jun-23 Jul-23 Aug-23 Sep-23 Oct-23 Nov-23 Dec-23 Jan-24 Feb-24 Mar-24 Performance % standard met The national target was for 96% of patients to commence treatment within 31 days of diagnosis. In March 2024, the Trust achieved 92% and performed in the range of 86%-94% throughout the year. The Trust has continued to make progress against the target for treatment of cancer within 62 days of an urgent GP referral, improving performance from 64% in April 2023 to 76% in March 2024 (NHS average: 69%). First definitive treatment for cancer within 31 days of a decision to treat % standard met Cancer waiting times 31 day RTT performanceUHS vs. NHSE average Cancer waiting times 31 day RTT performance UHS vs. NHSE average 96% 94% 92% 90% 88% 86% 84% 82% 80% 78% 76% Apr-23 May-23 Jun-2 3 Jul-2 3 Aug-23 Sep-2 3 Oct-23 Nov-2 3 Dec-23 Jan-24 Feb-2 4 Mar-24 Performance NHS Average 27 Treatment for Cancer within 62 days of an urgent GP referral to hospital Cancer Waiting Times 62 Day RTT Performance UHS vs NHSE Average Cancer Waiting Times 62 Day RTT Performance UHS vs NHSE Average % standard met 1 00% 80% 60% 40% 20% 0% Apr-23 May-23 Jun-23 Jul-23 Aug-23 Sep-23 Oct-23 Nov-23 Dec-23 Jan-24 Feb-24 Mar-24 Performance NHS Average 28 Quality priorities Priorities for improvement 2023/24 Last year the Trust continued its ambition to deliver the highest quality care shaped by a range of national, regional, local, and Trust-wide factors. During the year the Trust continued to experience unprecedented demand on its services, with flow, capacity, infection prevention and safety all presenting challenges. However, the Trust was confident in its ability to keep a focus on its quality priorities, and its teams worked hard to achieve their goals even in these difficult circumstances. Priorities are aligned to the three core dimensions of quality: • Patient experience – how patients experience the care they receive. • Patient safety – keeping patients safe from harm. • Clinical effectiveness – how successful is the care provided? Out of the six priories set, the Trust achieved five and partially achieved one. Overview of success Quality Priority One Improving care for people with learning disabilities and autistic (LDA) people across the Trust. Supporting staff delivering this care. Outcome against goals: achieved Key achievements: • LDA working group reestablished. • Development of an improvement plan using the NHS Learning Disability Improvement standards. • The LDA team has moved to the virtual enhanced care group in Division B where operational and governance support, leadership, and peer support/learning opportunities has been strengthened. • Sensory Boxes have been introduced for all clinical areas, funded by the Hampshire and Isle of Wight (HIOW) Integrated care board (ICB). These boxes include noise cancelling headphones, fidget toys, communication books and visual cards to support patients and wards. • Recruited additional Learning Disability Champions. • Established links with the parent carer forum (PCF) for the local area and are now attending regular events. A representative from the PCF sits on the LDA working group. The LDA team are working with the Trust lead for patient experience to develop this aspect of the LDA workplan over the next year. Quality Priority Two Supporting patients, service users and staff to overcome their tobacco dependence via a smoking cessation programme. Outcome against goals: achieved Key achievements: • Package of support available to patients who may be smokers and who need to be supported not to smoke during their treatment. • Fully trained team of tobacco advisors working in the hospital and an advisor working in the outpatient setting supporting the patients once they have returned home. • Devised the IT changes the Trust would like to implement to improve its service and referral process. • Recruited 30 smoke-free champions. • Successfully supported 1,131 patients with a self-confirmed quit rate of 45.6% at 28 days. • Supported 109 outpatients who have successfully achieved a 60% quit rate. • On track to achieve the goal to go smoke-free by April 2024 including the removal of smoking shelters. 29 Quality Priority Three Ensure carers are fully supported, involved, and valued across all our services by developing the carers support service across the Trust in partnership with Southampton Hospitals. Outcome against goals: partially achieved Key achievements: • Carers now have a more comprehensive package of concessions and vouchers to help support their cared-for person (e.g. free parking available onsite for blue badge owners is now available). • Listening events were held to put patients at the centre of transforming the way we deliver care is delivered, enabling their voices to improve the quality of care and outcomes for all. • Developed joint working with local partners (e.g. Children’s Society and No Limits to support young carers). Not yet achieved: • The ‘pathway to support, has not yet been developed. Work is ongoing to develop a new strategy. • A charity-funded carers’ support worker has not yet been appointed. • The carers’ training package has not yet been relaunched. Quality Priority Four Put patients at the centre of transforming the way care is delivered, enabling their voices to improve the quality of care and outcomes for all. Outcome against goals: achieved Key achievements: • Work has continued to work across corporate and divisional services to embed patients and carers into quality and service improvement, creating new patient groups (e.g. Mesh Support Group). • Successfully developed our engagement with various local communities, working to ensure that a range of care experiences are considered ( e.g. there is now a Gypsy, Roma, and Irish Traveller community health liaison officer to ensure that these communities are engaged with and brought into work to improve the inclusivity of our services). • Attending multiple public engagement opportunities (Young Carers’ Festival, Mela, University Freshers’ Fayres, Carers’ Listening Lunch, Hoglands Park Play Day, visits to local temples and ‘Love Where You Live’). • Youth and Young Adult Ambassador involvement has increased, including attendance toat meetings of the Council of Governors, and supporting hospital projects. • A Celebration of Carers Week and Volunteers Week were run. • The Trust has analysed its reported outcome measures to identify health inequalities in its services. This information has been used to set a new quality priority for 2024/25. • An SMS friends and family test text survey has been introduced to improve the response rate on patient feedback from the Emergency Department. In the first three months following the survey launch, responses increased from 24 to 424. 30 Quality Priority Five To develop the Trust’s clinical effectiveness process, connecting to the Trust’s Always Improving approach to measuring, understanding, and using outcomes to improve patient care. Outcome against goals: achieved Key achievements: • The Trust has developed its clinical effectiveness process across the Trust with involvement of informatics, governance and management teams, clinical effectiveness leads as well as reporting committees. • Patient representation onhas been included in the clinical assurance meeting for effectiveness and outcomes (CAMEO) to ensure conversations focus on what matters to patients. • The CAMEO template has been changed to focus discussions on areas the specialty is proud of (strong or improving outcomes), areas for improvement (poorly benchmarked or worsening outcomes) and planned actions. • The Trust encourages the use of run and/or statistical process control charts along with benchmarking where available. • Details of NICE and quality standards and national and regional reviews are included to cover breadth of clinical effectiveness. • How the clinical effectiveness team works has been reorganised, aligning each of them to each division giving a named link which helps to deepen understanding and improve links with governance and improvement activities locally. • Working with informatics to establish a core set of clinical outcome measures which are meaningful to patients, which can be reported centrally (starting with surgical specialities). • Starting to develop an education strategy and platform to support staff with a number of tools used in clinical effectiveness as well as clarity on where and how to record and evidence audit and service improvement. • A revised strategy has been drafted. Quality Priority Six Developing a culture where all clinical staff have a basic knowledge of diabetes. Outcome against goals: achieved Key achievements: • Launch of the ‘Start with the Diabasics’ Initiative, designed to help give diabetes visibility across UHS. • Delivered an extensive education programme to clinical staff across the professions and bands, including the introduction of some e-learning and a Diabasics introductory video has been shown at all trust staff inductions since July 2023. • Supported the development of 45 diabetes link nurses, resulting in all ward areas now having a named diabetes link nurse. • Improved triage for referrals. • Established processes for ‘lessons learned’. • Developed IT solutions to improvingimprove alerts and guidance. • A ‘Ketone Wednesdays’ initiative has been created in response to overuse of blood ketone testing (estimated waste cost of £100,000 per year). • The Trust’s lead diabetes specialist nurse and the Diabasics Initiative were both shortlisted for National Quality in the Care Diabetes Awards (October 2023). • The Diabasics Initiative was mentioned as a case study on the Diabetes UK charity website as an example of good practice that could be reproduced elsewhere. More information can be found about how the Trust delivered and measured its quality priorities, including feedback from patients and staff and improvement aims and quality priorities for 2024/25, in the Trust’s Quality Account for 2023/24. 31 Financial performance The Trust delivered a deficit of £4.5m from a revenue position of over £1.3bn, following receipt of £24.6m one-off cash support from NHS England. UHS started the year with an underlying deficit as a result of a number of cost pressures, notably demand for services being above block contract levels and the cost of national pay awards being above funded levels. The Trust has also continued to face a number of pressures, including high numbers of patients who no longer meet the criteria to reside in the hospital, and high demand for patients with a primary mental health need. In 2023/24, the Trust delivered a record savings level of £63.4m (5%) across a range of programmes. Trust operating income rose by £107m from the previous financial year, most notably funding the NHS pay award, as well as additional elective recovery funding. Trust operating expenses rose by £89m, incorporating funded inflationary costs as well as costs relating to the cost pressures outlined above. The Trust has also continued its reinvestment of surplus cash into infrastructure for the Trust, with capital investment of over £75m, including investment in new wards, theatres, decarbonisation, digital infrastructure, neonatal expansion and backlog maintenance. Trust cash and cash equivalents finished the year at £79m, a reduction of £24m from the previous year due to the operating loss and capital investment outlined above. Whilst liquidity remained strong in 2023/24 supported by NHS England cash support, the underlying financial deficit means it is likely to decline further in 2024/25. The Trust is continuing to monitor its cash position closely and is considering whether additional cash support may be required in 2024/25. Sustainability The Trust recognises that everyone has a part to play in responding to the climate crisis. In March 2022, the Trust agreed its own green plan in response to the challenge of the NHS becoming the world’s first health service to reach carbon net zero. Now in its third year, the plan identifies the Trust’s key areas of focus and its ambitions and has seen progress across all areas of the plan. The plan sets out the scale of the challenge, the Trust’s commitment to reducing the impact on the environment and the steps to be taken across the following categories: • Estates and facilities • Clinical and medicines • Digital transformation • Supply chain and procurement • Travel and transport • Waste and resources • Food and nutrition • Adaptation • Biodiversity • Wider sustainability The Trust continues to progress through its green plan and has completed the ‘Greener NHS’ reporting tool for several quarters, which has demonstrated good progress. In addition, the Trust is planning to launch its ‘Our Sustainable UHS’ app for staff, which will give tips on sustainability and create personalised travel plans, including identifying potential contacts for car sharing. In addition, the Trust is considering proposals to implement additional solar power, smart metering and expanding the use of LED lighting. 32 In 2022/23, the Trust was successful in bidding for £29.4m of funding through the Public Sector DeCarbonisation Fund, which will be used to fund green initiatives as part of the Trust’s capital programme. During the year the Trust successfully bid for £823k in National Energy Efficiency Funding which has been used to upgrade the lighting at Princess Anne Hospital. Social, community, anti-bribery and human rights issues The Trust recognises its responsibilities under the European Convention on Human Rights (included in the Human Rights Act 1998 in the UK). These rights include: • right to life • right not to be subjected to inhuman or degrading treatment or punishment • right to liberty and freedom • right to respect for privacy and family life. These are reflected in the duty, set out in the NHS Constitution, to each and every individual that the NHS serves, to respect their human rights and the individual’s right to be treated with dignity and respect. The Trust is committed to ensuring it fully takes into account all aspects of human rights in its work. An equality impact assessment is completed for each Trust policy. For patients, the Trust’s safeguarding policies protect and support the right to live in safety, free from abuse and neglect and other policies and standards are designed to optimise privacy and dignity in all aspects of patient care. Feedback from patients and the review of complaints, concerns, claims, incidents and audit help to monitor how the Trust is achieving these objectives. The Trust’s green plan, approved by the board of directors in March 2022, recognises the Trust’s broader role and responsibility to address the issues of climate change, air pollution, waste and environmental decline present to the city of Southampton and the impact that these issues have on the health and wellbeing of the local population served. Although the Modern Slavery Act 2015 does not apply to the Trust, its green plan sets out an ambition to stop modern slavery. The Trust is also committed to maintaining an honest and open culture within the Trust; ensuring all concerns involving potential fraud, bribery and corruption are identified and rigorously investigated. The Trust has a Fraud, Bribery and Corruption Policy, a Standards of Business Conduct Policy and a Raising Concerns (Whistleblowing) Policy. These apply to all staff and to individuals and organisations who act on behalf of UHS. Anti-bribery is part of the Trust’s work to counter fraud. This work is overseen by the Audit and Risk Committee, which receives regular reports from the local counter fraud specialist on the effectiveness of these policies through its monitoring and reviews, providing recommendations for improvement, as well as an annual report from the freedom to speak up guardian. You can read more about the work of the Audit and Risk Committee and the Trust’s approach to counter fraud in the Accountability Report. Events since the end of the financial year There have been no important events since the end of the financial year affecting the Trust. Overseas operations The Trust does not have any overseas operations. 33 Equality in service delivery NHS trusts have an essential role in tackling health inequalities, both as part of the services they provide, but also through work with the wider system. By working with those in integrated care systems, local authorities and third sector organisations, the Trust can have a significant impact on the health of the local population. The national focus on health inequalities is growing. This comes with new legal duties around reporting information and expectations to report on improvement programmes. In September 2023, a health inequalities steering group was initiated, under the leadership of the Chief Medical Officer, with representation from clinical, operational, transformation, patient experience, research, organisational development and culture, informatics, public health and the Integrated Care Board. The group focused on scoping future priorities aligned to national guidelines, contractual obligations and priorities, regional priorities, feedback from clinical teams and patients, understanding where action is already being taken, and what the data is showing. Overall, the group
Url: /Media/UHS-website-2019/Docs/About-the-Trust/Annual-reports-and-quality-accounts/UHS-AR-23-24-Final.pdf

Quality account 24-25 final

Description: QUALITY ACCOUNT 2024/25 QUALITY ACCOUNT Contents Part 1: Statement on quality from the chief executive 1.1 Chief executive’s statement and welcome 3 Part 2: Priorities for improvement and statements of assurance from the Board 2. Introduction 5 2.1 Priorities for improvement 6 2.1.1 Progress against 2024/25 priorities 6 2.1.2 Quality Improvement Priorities - 2024/25: Final Reports 8 2.2 Priorities for improvement for 2025/26 28 2.3 Statements of assurance from the Board 47 2.3.1 Review of services 47 2.3.2 Participation in national clinical audits and confidential enquiries 47 2.3.3 Recruiting to research 52 2.3.4 Commissioning for Quality and Innovation (CQUIN) payment framework 52 2.3.5 Statements from the Care Quality Commission (CQC) 52 2.3.6 Payment by results 53 2.3.7 Data quality 54 2.3.8 Data Security and Protection Toolkit (DSPT) 54 2.4 Overview of Quality Performance 55 2.4.1 Single Oversight Framework 55 2.4.2 Reporting against core indicators for 2024/25 55 2.4.3 Learning from deaths 67 2.4.4 Seven-day hospital services 70 2.4.5 Freedom to Speak Up 72 2.4.6 Rota gaps 74 2.4.7 Duty of Candour 76 Part 3: Other information 3.1 Our commitment to safety 77 3.2 Our commitment to improving the experience of the people who use our services 81 3.3 Our commitment to improve the quality of our patients’ environment 83 3.4 Our commitment to sustainability and the environment 85 3.5 Our commitment to staff 89 3.6 Our commitment to education and training 91 3.7 Our commitment to clinical research 98 3.8 Our commitment to technology 102 3.9 Conclusion 103 Part 4: Appendices 104 2 QUALITY ACCOUNT Part 1: Statement on quality from the Chief Executive 1.1 Chief Executive’s statement and welcome I am pleased to present this year’s quality account, which reflects our ongoing commitment to delivering safe, effective and compassionate care for our patients. 2024/25 has been a challenging year for UHS and the wider NHS and social care system. We have navigated operational pressures, with increasing numbers of patients who are medically fit but do not have an onward care package in place to be discharged, alongside a rise in winter infections and a record number of attendances to our emergency department. In the face of these challenges, our teams have worked tirelessly to enhance patient outcomes, improve service accessibility and ensure that the care patients receive meets the highest standards. I want to recognise the hard work of our staff in ensuring safety, driving innovation, and adapting to changes. This report highlights successful initiatives that have improved patient care over the past year. It also provides an overview of our quality priorities for 2024/25 and sets out our quality improvement priorities for 2025/26. We are proud to have maintained our focus on quality and achieved most of our objectives, enhancing the experience for those who use our services. Patient experience is an important priority for UHS. In 2024/25 we have successfully recruited approximately 2,000 ‘involved patients’, which will ensure that we co-design our services with those who use them, keeping our focus on our Trust values of patients first, working together and always improving. 2025/26 promises to be an exciting year for patient experience, with the development of the Patient and Family Support Hub, which will integrate voluntary services and ensure equitable access to support services for all. Our long-standing commitment to delivering safe, high-quality care is underpinned by the Fundamentals of Care programme - eight care commitments that patients, families and carers can expect from their care at UHS and these statements have been written in conjunction with patients, relatives and staff. In 2024/25 the programme has made significant progress in embedding Fundamentals of Care into our organisational culture. This has been achieved through developing understanding with newly registered professionals in our preceptorship programme, support worker development opportunities and the ongoing empowerment of staff through leadership development. In 2024/25, we have continued to strengthen our internal quality assurance programmes by aligning the clinical accreditation scheme with the CQC single assessment methodology. We are collaborating with other internal programmes - such as infection control, Patient-Led Assessments of the Care 3 QUALITY ACCOUNT Environment (PLACE) and friends and family feedback - to triangulate data and enhance oversight of key quality metrics, including patient safety, effectiveness, patient experience, and outcomes. This approach provides us with valuable intelligence to help us uphold our Trust values. 2024/25 marked one year of Patient Safety Incident Response Framework (PSIRF) implementation at UHS which has helped develop ‘just and learning’ culture across the organisation. Safety awareness has increased through our education programmes that have achieved good attendance and feedback. This coming year we will continue to build on the work that has been undertaken as part of implementation of the national safety standards for invasive procedures (NATSSIPS) 2. We continue to collaborate with our partners and develop our work as an integral organisation in the integrated health and social care system, building on trusted relationships across organisational boundaries are essential in improving health outcomes for our whole population. I want to recognise the amazing dedication of our staff in maintaining the safety of both colleagues and patients, fostering innovation, and adapting to evolving circumstances. Throughout this year, our teams across all services have strengthened their collaboration with our partners. As we continue to advance towards an integrated health and social care system, these trusted relationships are proving essential in our ability to respond effectively. To the best of my knowledge, the information contained in this document accurately reflects our performance, provides a true account of the quality of the health care services we provide, and where we have succeeded and exceed in delivery on our plans. David French Chief Executive Officer 26 June 2025 4 QUALITY ACCOUNT Part 2: Priorities for improvement and statements of assurance from the Board 2. Introduction Despite it being an extremely challenging year and unprecedented demand in the emergency department during 2024/25, the Trust maintained a strong focus on quality assurance. This was undertaken through established programmes and clinical leadership oversight of key safety and patient experience indicators, including falls, pressure ulcers, and venous thromboembolisms. The Fundamentals of Care initiative continued to be embedded, supported by high-quality peer reviews and weekly matron-led quality walkabouts aligned with CQC domains. The clinical accreditation scheme (CAS) was enhanced with updated documentation reflecting learning from themed walkabouts and aligned with national frameworks. A new governance framework for mortality and morbidity meetings was introduced to improve learning dissemination and escalation. The Trust also opened a Patient and Family Support Hub (P&FSH), advanced volunteer recruitment through a system-wide passporting approach, and began implementing NatSSIPs 2. In response to rising violence against staff, de-escalation training was rolled out, leading to a reduction in physical restraint and violence incidents. The Trust’s commitment to continuous improvement was demonstrated through training over 1,000 staff, outperforming NHS averages in improvement metrics, and achieving measurable service enhancements, including a 5.25% reduction in average length of stay, increased theatre throughput, and expanded use of patient initiated follow up pathways. Every year all NHS hospitals in England must prepare and publish an annual report for the public about the quality of their services. This is called the quality account and makes us at UHS more accountable to our patients and the public which helps drive improvement in the quality of our services. Quality in healthcare is made up of three core dimensions: Patient experience - how patients experience the care they receive Patient safety - keeping patients safe from harm Clinical effectiveness - how successful is the care we provide? 5 QUALITY ACCOUNT The quality account incorporates all the requirements of The National Health Service (Quality Accounts) Regulations 2010 (as amended) as well as additional reporting requirements. This includes: • How well we did against the quality priorities and goals we set ourselves for 2024/25 (last year). • It sets out the priorities we have agreed for 2025/26 (next year), and how we plan to achieve them. • The information we are required by law to provide so that people can see how the quality of our services compares to those provided by other NHS trusts. Additional information about our progress and achievements in key areas of quality delivery. Stakeholder and external assurance statements, including statements from our Council of Governors, Hampshire and Isle of Wight Integrated Care Board and Southampton County Council’s Health Overview and Scrutiny Committee. 2.1 Priorities for improvement This section reflects on the 2024/25 quality improvement priorities at UHS and outlines our quality improvement priorities for 2025/26. 2.1.1 Progress against 2024/25 priorities Last year, we upheld our commitment to delivering the highest standard of care, influenced by various national, regional, local, and trust-wide factors. Throughout the year, we encountered unprecedented demand on our services, contending with challenges related to operational, capacity, patient flow, infection prevention, and safety. Despite these difficulties, we were confident in our ability to maintain our focus on quality priorities. Our teams worked diligently to achieve their goals under these challenging circumstances. We are proud to present our accomplishments and how our successes have continued to enhance the quality of services we provide to those who rely on us. 6 QUALITY ACCOUNT Overview of success Core dimension Patient experience Patient safety Clinical effectiveness Quality priority Progress Exploring the provision of a support centre for people using our services. Creating a behaviour framework behind our values, bringing them to life to improve our patient and staff experience. Volunteering - a new focus. Achieved On hold Achieved Acuity and deteriorating patients: continuing to improve how we keep patients safe from harm. We will ensure that Fundamentals of Care (FoC) are provided to all our patients in collaboration with our patients, their family, and their carers. Improving our morbidity and mortality (M&M) meetings. Achieved Achieved Achieved Develop the Trust’s approach to reducing the impact of health inequalities (HIs). Help develop a UHS quality management system approach. Achieved Achieved 7 QUALITY ACCOUNT 2.1.2 Quality Improvement Priorities - 2024/25: Final Reports Quality Improvement Priority One: Exploring the provision of a support centre for people using our services (year one) Why was this a priority? UHS is a regional centre for many disease types, but we recognise there is inequality in provision of support facilities in the Trust for all our patients and their friends and families regardless of their clinical conditions. While cancer patients have access to designated centres such as The Maggie’s Centre and Macmillan facilities, other disease types have no comparable options despite often having enhanced needs. Patients who are nearing the end of their life are frequently spending their final days in bays with other patients as side rooms are prioritised for isolation purposes, and there are few areas available that can accommodate a hospital bed for patients to have time with their family away from their clinical setting. Apart from the UHS Patient Support Hub, there are no designated spaces that are accessible for patients, families, or carers, often resulting in staff offices and education rooms being inappropriately repurposed to meet their needs. Growing feedback from complaints and Friends and Family Test (FFT) responses emphasis our inability to provide patients, carers and their families access to spaces for respite and support. In addition, a recent UHS carers survey indicated that while we recognise that being a carer can sometimes be demanding both physically and emotionally, there are no designated areas for them to have their own personal needs met. Creating a bespoke support facility at UHS would help to address these needs and would be the first facility of its kind in an acute trust in England. What have we achieved? Estate has been identified. Work has started to repurpose the underutilised Macmillan Centre into a generic non-disease specific Patient and Family Support Hub. This agreement made through the Trust Investment Group was to end the current agreement with the Macmillan charity and to approach Southampton Hospitals Charity to support a refurbishment and further investment into the hub (for example funding a carers shower provision). Key areas identified for further development • Major grant request submitted to Southampton Hospitals Charity due to go to Charity Trustee Board in March 2025. • Recruitment of a band 7 mnager role (appointed in January 2025 and starting 31 March 2025); • Rebranding and merging (of current Patient Support Hub) started in February 2025. 8 QUALITY ACCOUNT How will ongoing improvements be measured and monitored? Once the Patient and Family Support Hub is launched there will be a constant drive for patient and service user involvement, co-designing the space, there will be surveys on before and after, end of life quality of care will improve Progress metrics • Reduction in adverse event reporting that a patient died in an open bay. • Carers survey improvement. • P&FSH FFT results. Quality Improvement Two: Creating a behavior framework behind our values, bringing them to life to improve our staff and patient experience Creating a behaviour framework behind our Trust Values to bring them to life in our everyday work and interactions is still very much a priority. However, the work has been paused to ensure it aligns to the development of the new Trust strategy, both these pieces of work need to be produced side by side. It is anticipated the work on the behaviour framework will commence alongside the development of the overall Trust strategy and timelines for launch and embedding will move to 2025/26. 9 QUALITY ACCOUNT Quality Improvement Priority Three: Volunteering Why was this a priority? To value the contribution our volunteers make to our organisation, we wanted to improve the onboarding process to provide more guidance and support for our volunteer colleagues, and to work with them more closely to build in flexibility and be more creative in the kind of roles and support they could offer. What have we achieved? • We worked with our systems partners to complete a successful bid through Volunteering for Health (VfH) and have plans to develop a unified and standardised approach of volunteer recruitment using a passporting system. • Our key relationship is with the Hampshire and Isle of Wight Voluntary Community and Social Enterprise (VCSE) sector Health and Care Alliance (HIVCA) and it has allowed us to further explore a more system-wide approach, with a view to sharing resources, ideas, and opportunities both internally and outside the organisation on a regular basis. • We have worked with HIVCA and fostered a collaborative learning environment, aiming to streamline and standardise the volunteer onboarding processes over the coming year. • We have built upon current onboarding and training processes and are particularly developing the enhanced care training for our volunteers to support their awareness of working alongside patients who have mental health issues, dementia, delirium, learning disabilities and autism. • We are working with information governance leads to consider how the Trust’s internal policies can create equitable opportunities for a range of volunteers, to support them in accessing limited patient records, to allow them to document the interactions that they have with patients in support of the provision of collaborative holistic care. • We have begun to develop a new “ABC” approach to offering our volunteering roles, codesigning new roles for volunteers, and providing a flexible ‘responsive volunteering’ process that can support the organisational pressures as they arise and dovetailing the offer from our experience of care teams. • We have started to build relationships with the NHS care responder volunteer’s service looking at how they can enhance our existing offering provided by our responder volunteers. Key areas identified for further development • We have more scope to develop a more robust support process for volunteers during their placements through building better relationships between the volunteers and their clinical teams. • We will grow our volunteering hub space in spring 2025, to offer a more effective space for volunteers to access practical and welfare support from voluntary services, giving them a clear base and point of contact. • Working with HIVCA in the system-wide partnership, we will continue to explore the VfH funding and how it can develop the ‘passporting’ system for the volunteers across the network. • As our new Patient and Family Support Hub becomes established, we will work with the NHS responders and our existing responder volunteers to ensure a more extensive five to seven day/ week service (including evenings). 10 QUALITY ACCOUNT How will ongoing improvements be measured and monitored? The key metrics for measuring these outcomes will come from: • Our responder volunteer statistics through the Patient and Family Support Hub. • Our outcomes associated with the HIVCA partnership and the VfH bid i.e. progress with a passporting system including potential recruitment of a post to develop and establish this new system. Progress metrics • Year one funding from the VfH bid was received by the partnership to develop the partnership with the HIVCA support meetings every six to eight weeks. • The system-wide volunteer onboarding and passporting system has not yet been established but will continue to progress with the partnership. • We will have developed a responsive volunteer network, available five days a week with an established support system in place. • We are an open and inclusive recruiter of volunteers and monitor the equality, diversity and inclusivity of the volunteers we recruit, seeing a more diverse range of volunteers that begins to more accurately represent our local community. What our patients/relatives/carers tell us 11 QUALITY ACCOUNT 12 QUALITY ACCOUNT Quality Improvement Priority Four: Acuity and deteriorating patients: continuing to improve how we keep patients safe from harm ADULTS AND PAEDIATRICS Why was this a priority? The recognition, assessment, and escalation of a deteriorating patient either adult or child are a key element of our trust-wide patient safety and quality strategy with the aim of improving clinical outcomes for acutely ill patients. How rapidly we respond to patient deterioration both in and out of hours is a key determinant of patient and quality outcomes. What have we achieved? Five new starters have successfully completed their supernumerary period. The critical care outreach team (CCOT) resumed its 24/7 service on 16 December 2024. Recruitment for the final vacancies was completed in December 2024, with both new recruits scheduled to commence their roles by 31 March 2025. An education task and finish group has been established, which has conducted a gap analysis with all education leads and reviewed both internal and external training resources. Standards are currently under revision. The medical education and simulation team is testing the Acute Life-threatening Events-Recognition and Treatment (ALERT) course, which includes resident doctors and junior nurses. Initial feedback was presented to the deteriorating patient group on 25 September 2024. The Trust’s acute deterioration education day continues to review feedback and evaluations for study days. The acuity surveillance pilot was successful, and the CCOT is now formally implementing this initiative. Monthly acuity reports are generated at the Trust, division, care group, and ward levels, or through bespoke reporting. These reports incorporate various metrics, including National Early Warning Score 2 (NEWS2) and National Paediatric Early Warning Score (NPEWS) activations, Call 4 Concern activations, a 24-hour overview of NEWS2 activations, cardiac arrest calls, CCOT activations and reasons for referral, and unplanned admissions to the intensive care unit (ICU). Quarterly data on cardiac arrests, Treatment Escalation Plans (TEP), and Do Not Attempt Cardiopulmonary Resuscitation (DNACPR) are presented to the resuscitation committee and the deteriorating patient group (DPG). Challenges persist in collecting robust sepsis data. UHS is participating in the national Martha’s Rule pilot programme, with Call 4 Concern implemented in March 2024 and all activations reported on Ulysses. A task and finish group has been established to explore patient wellness questions, which is a fixed agenda item at the DPG. The bi-monthly DPG has been established, with increasing medical engagement, and regular reports are submitted to the patient safety and quality committee (PSSG). Key areas identified for further development • Further roll out of Martha’s rule UHS-wide including Call 4 Concern. • Gain feedback from divisional governance teams regarding incidents to ensure learning is identified and appropriate action plans are devised and implemented. Collaboration with maternity and neonatal services. • Development of acuity dashboard. • Medium- and long-term service development commenced including workforce planning. 13 QUALITY ACCOUNT How will ongoing improvements be measured and monitored? • Bimonthly deteriorating patient group meetings to review current trends and themes, implementation of appropriate actions and evaluation of actions. • Biannual review of deteriorating patient group terms of reference. • Quarterly report to patient safety steering group. • Yearly assurance report – Trust quality committee. Progress metrics • Patient observation compliance data. • NEWS2 and NPEWS activations and data analysis. • Analysis of all unplanned admwissions to ICU from ward areas – adult and paediatric for themes to inform education and practice. • Adult and paediatric ICU stepdown data. • Adult critical care outreach team activity and outcome data. • Adult and paediatric cardiac arrest and outcomes data. • Adult TEP & DNACPR data. • Complaints and adverse event reports related to failure to rescue and failure to escalate. • Percentage of patients diagnosed with sepsis within the emergency department receiving appropriate antibiotics within one hour of sepsis diagnosis. • Analysis of adult and paediatric Call 4 Concern data, action plan developed, implemented, and adjusted in response to themes. • Analysis of patient/service user feedback on Call 4 Concern service. • Analysis of staff feedback on Call 4 Concern service. Volunteers and quality patient safety partners helped to promote the Call 4 Concern work 14 QUALITY ACCOUNT Quality Improvement Priority Five: Fundamentals of Care Why was this a priority? Patient Experience - Fundamentals of Care (FoC) was established as a priority in 2024/25 due to evidence that post COVID we had not yet returned to a less task-focussed and more patientfocussed level of care. The priority was developed to create a foundation and structure to tackle these care standards of care and to challenge practices, in response to patient and relative feedback. What have we achieved? Since commencing in late 2023 the following has been achieved: • We have established the FoC project board and this group continues to meet every three months to provide an overall project view, share successes and opportunities for learning, discuss the workstreams continuing under the eight standards and to escalate challenges through a formal governance structure (through quality committee and QGSG). • We have had one quality patient safety partner (QPSP) on the project board since conception. Subsequent events have involved two other QPSPs and have broadened the ‘patient voice’. • Each of the standards has a lead who oversees a multi-professional working group with clinical team representation. Some groups have chosen to pair due to links in their primary and secondary project drivers and actions. Matron involvement is driving the patient facing team involvement. • The project board is minuted, with an action tracker. The board is attended by the corporate nursing team and is supported by our deputy chief nurse, chaired by our head of patient experience. It is also supported by our chief nursing informatics officer, members of the transformation team and communications. • There is a FoC project manager in place who has worked with the transformation team to create a project plan in collaboration with workstream leads, a communications plan and drive forward key initiatives including business intelligence and the development of a clinical quality dashboard so we can measure the impact of the FoC. • Enhancing leadership and role modelling of the FoC has been a key focus through leadership in practice study days. These sessions, held three times annually, target leaders across the organisation to address and challenge behaviours related to the FoC. Incorporating the patient voice, these study days are grounded in real patient stories and involve the practical application of skills using simulated patients. 15 QUALITY ACCOUNT • As part of the patient hygiene working group, we have undertaken surveys using volunteer support, of patients and staff in the clinical decision unit (CDU), acute medical unit (AMU3), trauma assessment unit (TAU) and Macmillan acute oncology service (MAOS) in relation to their experiences of patient hygiene care and the impact of the trial patient hygiene packs. • Existing surveys, PALS interactions, complaints, adverse event reports (AER), Friends and Family Test (FFT) are followed up and reviewed by senior managers accordingly. These inform the FoC workstream through the head of patient experience. • Since conception, sharing the patient perspective and reflecting what patients would like to hear from us has been key. The posters around the organisation on our care commitments and resources on staffnet and the virtual learning environment (VLE) for staff, support this. These resources include: o Resources developed by each group to share during the monthly focussed trolley dashes. o Videos developed by staff for staff, to improve awareness of some key facts about each of the eight standards. Staff on Bassett ward engaging patients with dementia in crafting activities • Strong presence of the FoC throughout education as it has been mapped to the health care support worker (HCSW) induction, is included on preceptorship for all staff groups, has been presented to some university students at the University of Portsmouth and is embedded in lots of local training and development initiatives. The head of patient experience delivers many sessions across the organisation and beyond. Head of patient experience engaging with clinical staff in cardiovascular and thoracics on how to assess the FoC in their area 16 QUALITY ACCOUNT • The What Matters To Me (WMTM) project was trialled in some clinical areas from October 2024 (F7 and G7). Due to challenges in engaging the volunteer support to maintain this project it has temporarily been halted. The boards have an agreed template, agreed by a QPSP, and based upon feedback from staff and patients. The values of this project are echoed in local projects we have seen. • The FoC is being reviewed in conjunction with matron walkabout and the clinical accreditation scheme (CAS). Starting in February 2025, a new monthly focus is being established, with five core questions associated with a FoC standard and five specialist questions associated with that topic. This is forming past of ward benchmarking with a new self-assessment tool being implemented. Key areas identified for further development • Clinical representation in these working groups is to be re-established/built upon to support further engagement in the clinical areas/teams. • Continuing to establish links and support in child health, maternity and outpatients to ensure a bespoke but collaborative roll out of FoC. • To continue strong patient engagement and involvement, linking with involved patients where required with the support of our existing FFT results, the national inpatient and urgent and emergency (U&E) care surveys. • Resources to continue to grow to create a repository of information for staff and develop their knowledge around the FoC and to support each other in challenging behaviours and practices. • Employ interim project manager to maintain the project and support new ones whilst the current project manager is on maternity leave, focusing on establishing the dataset to evidence the FoC. • Strengthen the recruitment of volunteers for WMTM through the successful bid to Volunteering for Health (VfH) through the recruitment and investment in a volunteer coordinator, as part of a partnership with other organisations in Hampshire and Isle Of Wight (HIOW), including the charity sectors. • Successful implementation and evaluation of WMTM boards across key areas in organisation, with full volunteer support for the obtaining of photographs of the patients from themselves/ families to maintain that person-centred focus. How will ongoing improvements be measured and monitored? Improvements will be measured and monitored through FFT feedback, feedback from selfassessment tools and ongoing surveillance of the clinical quality dashboard. Progress metrics Reduction in clinical Iincidents: We’ve seen a decrease in the number and severity of incidents related to the FoC across inpatient settings. A key theme in early 2024 involved patients reporting being asked to urinate in incontinence pads. Six adverse event reports (AERs) were recorded in Q1, with none reported in Q3, indicating improvement. Reduction in complaints: While we don’t yet tag complaints specifically to FoC, we’ve observed a decline in ‘patient care’ complaints - from 14.67% in Q1 to 13.91% in Q3. We’re also exploring refinements in complaint categorisation to better align with FoC themes. 17 QUALITY ACCOUNT Increase in compliments: Patient and family feedback is gathered through various channels. For example, our urgent and emergency care survey showed an overall satisfaction score of 7.68/10. Improved oerformance against metrics: Throughout 2024, we’ve redesigned our improvement metrics in collaboration with clinical teams. These are now reflected in the clinical quality dashboard, supported by a comprehensive data dictionary developed by our project manager. 18 QUALITY ACCOUNT Quality Improvement Priority Six: Improving our morbidity and mortality (M&M) meetings Why was this a priority? The Patient Safety Incident Response Framework (PSIRF) sets out the NHS’s approach to developing and maintaining effective systems and processes for responding to patient safety incidents. It supports our processes for learning and improving patient safety and clinical effectiveness and replaces the old serious incident framework. An important element of the PSIRF is the focus on strengthening the processes for local learning through M&M meetings. M&M meetings (or clinical review meetings) have a central function in supporting our services to achieve and maintain high standards of care. They allow us to review the quality of the care that is being provided to our patients and learn lessons from outcomes. They are multi-disciplinary meetings which provide a safe place for learning, for supporting comprehensive conversations and ensuring governance standards are met. They allow us to identify any opportunities for improvement and are an important opportunity for education. They also provide opportunities for senior staff to model appropriate professional behaviour and engage the significant expertise of clinicians at the point of care. There is also a growing trend in M&M meetings to identify how resilience within complex systems enables good outcomes in the face of the kind of challenges and uncertainties which we are experiencing, and which are inherent within healthcare delivery. What have we achieved? The medical advisor for patient safety is leading efforts on morbidity and mortality (M&M) meetings. A comprehensive framework for M&M meetings at UHS has been developed, establishing expectations for a safe learning environment that is multiprofessional and multi-disciplinary, with a systematic meeting structure and agenda focused on learning, governance integration, and patient-centred care. This framework is supported by a handbook, resources, and education for M&M leads. A dedicated Teams channel has been created to provide resources for M&M leads. An M&M workshop was held as part of the WHO Patient Safety Day on 12 September 2024, focusing on creating strong learning environments, maintaining patient centrality, and learning from palliative care. The workshop was attended by 20 M&M leads and governance representatives. Additionally, 20 M&M leads attended a study day on 23 January 2025, covering topics such as human factors and systems thinking, PSIRF, keeping the patient central, appreciative inquiry in M&M, creating strong learning environments, managing difficult behaviour, and expanding the scope of M&M beyond mortality. The study day was well received, and another is planned for early April. Regular meetings are held with M&M leads and the medical patient safety advisor to provide support and identify areas needing assistance. An electronic M&M recording system was developed and trialed to capture and evidence outcomes, but it is no longer supported by the Trust, prompting the investigation of alternatives. A clear escalation process from M&M meetings to the existing governance structure has been established, with actions recorded. M&M meeting outcomes are now a standing agenda item in governance meetings. 19 QUALITY ACCOUNT UHS - 6 key principles of M&M Safety A safe space for learning. A meeting atmosphere that is conductive to open discussion with a focus on ‘Just and Learning Culture’ and an emphasis on understanding the systems factors, not focusing on individuals. Multiprofessional and Multi-disciplinary Ensuring active participation across staff groups and different disciplines. Meeting Framework Systematic agenda selection process, structured meeting format and objective analysis of data, including consideration of systems factors, and human factors and ergonomics. Learning Focus Comprehesive discussions to generate actionable learning and system improvement. Using an appreciative inquiry approach to emphasise and learn from the every day, as well as where things can go wrong. Governance Hospital-wide system to record outcomes, lessons learned, and dissemination of recommendations to ensure action and learning. Supporting our integrated approach to quality across the organisation. Folow up to ensure actions are completed. Clear pathways for central reporting and escalation of concerns. Patient Centred Keeping the patient and the family central to the learning. Ensuring that the patient voice is heard when learning from events. Completing feedback and duty of candour to help build trust. Training as part of the WHO World Patient Safety Day: Discussing how to create psychological safety in meetings 20 QUALITY ACCOUNT Key areas identified for further development • Development of electronic recording process that can be used for all M&M meetings. • Need to develop stronger links and greater support from local governance. How will ongoing improvements be measured and monitored? Regular review of M&M meetings with the M&M leads to ensure that: • M&M meetings are represented by the multi-disciplinary. • Terms of reference are in place. • Incorporating mortality data. • Using a recording app (when available). • Outcomes are linked to actions and governance processes. Progress metrics The electronic recording system is not currently supported so we cannot measure this (and it makes it hard to audit actions and escalations as these would be audited via this). Survey of clinical staff (163 replies) and their view on M&M. Key findings: • 73% staff feel UHS views the meetings as important. • 75% that their department views these as important. • 60% that they are fit for purpose. • 75% that they make a difference to patient safety. • 80% agree that systems factors are considered. • 35% felt they were well supported by local governance. 21 QUALITY ACCOUNT Quality Improvement Priority Seven: Develop the Trust’s approach to reducing the impact of health inequalities (HIs) (year one) Why was this a priority? The causes of health inequalities are complex, but research has shown that the main drivers of health inequalities are social determinants; the environments people live in, access to employment and the kind of start they had in life. Inequalities are also driven by the ways in which health services are designed and delivered, and by the quality of clinical care received. The NHS plays an important role in both mitigating against the wider determinants and in reducing healthcare-based inequalities. As well as a moral and social responsibility, NHS trusts have a legal duty to consider health inequalities. A new requirement from NHS England asks that trusts describe the extent to which they have exercised its functions consistently with NHS England’s views set out in the statement on information on inequalities. Addressing health and care inequalities is a core focus of the CQC’s 2021 strategy. To reinforce this commitment, the CQC has outlined five equality objectives aimed at tackling disparities in health outcomes. They have made it clear that action will be taken where care falls short for particular groups. Providers are expected to proactively identify, engage with, and respond to individuals who face barriers to accessing care or experience poorer outcomes. These efforts will be reflected in the CQC’s assessment frameworks. Failure to address health inequalities also carries a significant financial burden for NHS trusts. Estimates suggest these disparities cost the NHS around £5.5 billion each year. Eliminating health inequalities could potentially reduce the volume of treatments provided by the NHS by up to 15%, easing pressure on services and resources. What have we achieved? Governance A health inequalities board has been convened, chaired by the chief medical officer and attended by representation across UHS, patient partners, public health teams from the local councils and the population health team within the integrated care board. The board has set some initial objectives. These will be delivered through five areas of focus, each with a dedicated sponsoring director and a detailed delivery plan. These areas of focus are: • Clinical priorities. • Data and measurement. • Enabling the organisation. • Communications and engagement. • Strategy and approach. Clinical priorities Three clinical priorities have been set, based on national guidance on services where there is greatest health inequalities impact. The public health leadership from the local councils and integrated care board were involved in this prioritisation to ensure that we chose areas with high prevalence locally, and where it was felt an acute trust can have greatest impact. Priorities set are tobacco dependency, hypertension and obesity. 22 QUALITY ACCOUNT Tobacco dependency In Southampton, smoking rates are higher than the national average. It is estimated that one in six Southampton deaths are attributable to smoking (JSNA, 2021). 70% of our lung cancer patients and 86% of our COPD patient deaths are directly attributable to smoking. People who smoke are 36% more likely to be admitted to hospital than non-smokers and have poorer treatment outcomes including reduced response to treatments, prolonged recovery and increased risk of complications, across many areas including surgery, cancer and cardiovascular disease (Royal College of Physicians, 2020). This leads to increased length of stay, higher rates of emergency department attendance and greater pressure upon outpatient clinics due to smoking-related comorbidities. We have been focusing on improving identification of those who have been admitted who smoke, increasing the delivery of very brief advice to all patients who smoke and increasing referral to tobacco dependency services on the ward for those who do not opt out. We’ve been reviewing our data to understand how we are supporting those most at risk of being impacted by health inequalities. Obesity In 2022 to 2023, 29.5% of adults in Southampton were estimated to be living with obesity, above the national average. Southampton has one of the highest childhood obesity rates in the county. There are a large number of conditions linked with obesity, including cardiovascular disease, hypertension and liver disease. There is a multi-disciplinary service provided at UHS for children which provides excellent outcomes, reversing clinical impacts such as hypertension and type two diabetes. This programme seeks to identify opportunities to collaborate with our system to prevent the increasing levels of childhood obesity, reflecting the national focus on left shift and prevention. Adult obesity services are in review across our system. Hypertension Hypertension is amongst the leading causes of death in Southampton and Hampshire. High blood pressure causes threat to life expectancy linked with stroke, vision loss, heart failure, heart attack, kidney disease/failure. Hypertension identification and control have both been a challenge across Hampshire and Isle of Wight. Although hypertension treatment is delivered in primary care, there are actions we are taking as a trust to support this important priority. This includes: • As the largest employer in the city we have the opportunity to improve health by supporting our staff. We are developing materials to support our staff to understand the importance of blood pressure monitoring and approach to accessing help with high blood pressure. We hope this knowledge will extend to families, communities and how we support our patients. • Support people to ‘wait well’ whilst on our waiting list, with improved guidance on controlling and monitoring blood pressure while waiting for surgery, reducing the number of cancelled procedures due to high blood pressure. • Consider how improved data sharing on blood pressure readings between UHS and GPs can support onward support for hypertension. 23 QUALITY ACCOUNT w Data and measurement Several positive steps have been taken in measuring and understanding health inequalities within our services. These have been: • Building new dashboard that enables us to assess whether access to our services in equitable related to IMD decile, age, gender and ethnicity. • Assessment of equitable delivery of smoking cessation services. • Assessing the acute impact of hypertension control. • Collaborating with the Integrated care board on producing the data required for national reporting guidelines. Enabling the organisation We wish to support staff across our organisation to understand health inequalities, to recognise them within services, to access to tools to enable service change and to have routes to escalate issues. We have appointed a health inequalities officer who will be a key link to support services to achieve this. We have begun developing training that will be available across the organisation. We have also established escalation routes for raising concerns related to health inequalities. Communications and engagement There have been a number of excellent case studies communicated during this year through existing communications channels such as the Connect magazine. HELIXR, a pioneering programme that supports vulnerable patients with chronic liver disease through the introduction of peer support workers, attracted news coverage and was featured on the BBC and ITV Meridian in March. We have been attending events across Southampton including Pride and the Black Business and Arts Festival to show our support and to connect with our communities. We’ve been reaching out to grow the number and diversity of our involved patients, aiming to reflect the diversity of our population in our feedback and helping us to better serve the needs of our community. Strategy and approach We have worked on establishing this approach to delivering health inequalities over the year, which is now seeing results in progress in all prioritised areas for improvement. We have taken discussions to our Trust Board to establish how we will move this important work forward in years to come. We have also reflected on how population health, prevention and health inequalities will feature in our developing updates to our trust and clinical strategies. Key areas identified for further development There are detailed delivery plans for all of our priority areas over the next year, which will enable us to keep driving towards our aims. Highlights from these plans include: • Designing and publishing health inequalities training for all staff. • Creating an internal staff campaign, recognising the impact of health inequalities within our people and providing advice. • Establishing a health inequalities operational group who receive escalations of health inequalities issues and assess trust-wide implications and support improvements. • Delivery of planned improvements within our three prioritised clinical specialties. • Connecting with our communities and engagement leads across our city, improving our insights into the local drivers of health inequalities and identifying improvement opportunities. • Reviewing our use of QEIAs for change and decision making. 24 QUALITY ACCOUNT • Development of Trust and clinical strategies with making impact on health inequalities included. • Making use of the data sets we have built to drive change within our services and measure our impact. How will ongoing improvements be measured and monitored? We have clear objectives against all priorities with delivery timelines. We will continue to assess our progress in delivering against these. The dashboards that have been built will enable us to measure change over time, demonstrating where we have been able to impact on the equality of access to services. We will continue to work with our patients to gain feedback on how well we have met their needs while under our care. Progress metrics During 2024/25, we significantly advanced data capabilities to measure health inequalities across UHS services. We now track outpatient and inpatient waiting lists, discharges, and emergency department performance by age, gender, ethnicity, and Index of Multiple Deprivation - enabling long-term impact assessment. Staff access to this data will also be monitored. While some planned measures were successfully implemented, others remain in progress and will continue into year two (2025/26) of this quality priority. As part of our hypertension programme, we aimed to reduce theatre cancellations and non-elective admissions. Pathway improvements are underway and will be implemented in 2025/26, supported by expanded data sources. Combined with the Hampshire and Isle of Wight Intergrated Care Board’s (HIOW ICB) cardiovascular disease (CVD)-focused ‘signature move’ in primary care, these efforts are expected to reduce non-elective admissions. HIOW ICB data for 2024/25 shows: • ~95 CVD-related ED attendances/month • ~420 non-elective admitted episodes of care/month • ~2,340 bed days/month Our tobacoo quit rates continue to be better than expected nationally. Throughout the year, the health inequalities board reviewed case studies from eight services, showcasing impactful improvement work. These have been documented to support organisational learning. 25 QUALITY ACCOUNT Quality Improvement Priority Eight: Develop a UHS quality management system approach (year one) Why was this a priority? In April 2023, NHS Improving Patient Care Together (IMPACT) was launched to support all NHS organisations, systems, and providers at every level (including NHS England) to have the skills and techniques to deliver continuous improvement. NHS IMPACT’s five components form the basis of all evidence-based improvement methods and underpin a systematic approach to continuous improvement: • Building a shared purpose and vision. • Investing in people and culture. • Developing leadership behaviours. • Building improvement capability and capacity. • Embedding improvement into management systems and processes. Taking a more integrated quality approach is also a key component of our ‘always improving’, clinical effectiveness and Trust strategies in support of our ‘outstanding patient outcomes, safety and experience’ strategic pillar. To establish our current position, the Trust undertook a self-assessment to gauge its organisational maturity against the IMPACT framework and identified ‘embedding improvement into management systems and processes’ as an area of opportunity to improve and employ best practice. It was also a recommendation from the Thirlwall Inquiry that organisations focus on their ability to triangulate different quality indicators to build
Url: /Media/UHS-website-2019/Docs/About-the-Trust/Annual-reports-and-quality-accounts/quality-account-24-25-final1.pdf

Finance and Performance Reports 2023-24 Month 10 - January 2024

Description: Report to the Trust Board of Directors Title: Agenda item: Sponsor: Author: Date: Purpose: Finance Report 2023-24 Month 10 10.3 Ian Howard – Chief Financial Officer Philip Bunting – Director of Operational Finance David O’Sullivan – Assistant Director of Finance – Financial Performance 29 February 2024 Assurance or reassurance Approval Ratification Information X Issue to be addressed: Response to the issue: The finance report provides a monthly summary of the key financial information for the Trust. It has recently been announced that NHS England is set to give around £650m to some health systems to offset planned financial deficits, and with that ease pressure on cashflow. We have since been informed by the HIOW ICB that a proportion of that money has been allocated to this system, and via that to UHS. The amount has recently been confirmed as £24.6m. We are grateful to be receiving funding which will reduce, but not eliminate, our financial deficit for financial year 23/24. Unfortunately, this still leaves us with, an albeit reduced, deficit going into the next financial year, so our work to restore financial balance for UHS remains key to supporting our recovery and protecting the interests of our patients and staff. Forecast Prior to the above announcement, UHS was forecasting an adjusted deficit of £29.7m. The impact of Industrial Action in December and January has been estimated at £4.8m (increased from £3.8m). Excluding the impact of Industrial Action, UHS was forecasting a deficit of £25m (previously £26m). A further deterioration in forecast is anticipated relating to further Industrial Action in February. UHS M10 Forecast Recovery Original Plan Plan Forecast Financial Position (26.0) (26.0) (29.7) • Note – forecast will change as a result of additional funding and impacts of further industrial action. In line with South East Region reporting guidelines, we expect to formally change our forecast to NHSE in our M10 reporting. M10 Financial Position UHS is reporting a financial position as outlined in the table below: UHS M10 Financial Position Original Plan (1.0) In Month Recovery Plan (2.2) Actual (4.7) Year to Date Original Recovery Plan Plan Actual (25.0) (23.9) (27.6) Page 1 of 4 The in-month position includes £3.2m of non-recurrent industrial action (IA) pressures, which trusts nationally have been advised to report as a variance. This has been offset by additional non recurrent savings of £0.7m resulting in the position being £2.5m adverse to the recovery plan trajectory. Impact of Industrial Action (IA) The impact of industrial action for December 2023 and January 2024 is shown in the table below. IA Impact M9 Cost of Cover (0.4) Impact of reduction on ERF & lost efficiency opportunity (1.2) Total (1.6) M10 Total (0.9) (1.3) (2.3) (3.5) (3.2) (4.8) ERF In month ERF performance was above target at 115% and is 117% YTD. The revised target is now 109% after a further 2% reduction has now been applied (so 4% reduction applied in year). This overperformance has generated c£1.1m of additional ERF income in month with overperformance now £14.5m YTD. Industrial action in the month of January has reduced activity and the scale of overperformance was lower than had been anticipated as part of financial recovery. In addition to IA pressures, significant non elective pressures continue to cause strain on elective delivery. Further industrial action is scheduled in February representing future risk to the delivery of ERF overperformance achievement with a run rate of £2m per month overperformance targeted. Underlying Position The underlying position for January deteriorated when compared to average levels for the YTD to £5.2m. Last months restated underlying deficit was £4m following ERF income being greater than had been first anticipated. The primary drivers of the month on month movement relate to: • Reduced ERF activity – this dropped by £1m following significant non elective pressures in January. Historically there has however been a lag in reported ERF once all activity is counted and coded. • Pay – the underlying rate of pay expenditure has been stable when removing one off costs for industrial action. This has remained flat for the last four months following the introduction of financial recovery plan actions followed by increased recruitment controls. • Non pay costs increased (£0.5m) offset by slightly increased other income (£0.3m). This mainly relates to increased energy costs and clinical supplies. The previous monthly average underlying deficit had been c£4.5m per month once the impact of industrial action and other one offs are removed. This includes ERF of c£1.5m per month overperformance. The target exit run rate for 2023/24 is a deficit of no worse than £4m per month, which could reasonably be delivered by improved ERF performance. Whilst pay costs, in an absolute sense, have increased in January by £0.7m, much of this relates to bank holiday enhancements, and TOIL provisions linked to industrial action. Adjusting for these items, pay costs have stabilised significantly in-month as a result of the additional controls implemented in December. Temporary staffing costs have increased marginally by £0.15m in month, but remain significantly below November levels, with the movement relating to the seasonal decrease seen in the December holiday period. Page 2 of 4 In month, some reduction on HCA agency and bank has been achieved following targeted efforts on the criteria of requests for mental health support staff and additional workforce controls taking effect. Deficit Drivers The underlying deficit continues to be driven by a number of underlying system pressures seen in 22/23, for which we have not been able to recover to date: • Non-pay inflation beyond funded levels • Impact of energy prices (with gas prices impacting UHS particularly hard) • High-cost drugs spend (previously pass-through) • Number of patients not meeting criteria to reside, impacting capacity (opening expensive “surge” capacity / bed capacity restricting elective activity) In 23/24, we are now seeing further pressures, notably: • Unfunded elements of pay awards - £0.4m per month. • Workforce pressures as substantive recruitment is not offset with temporary staffing reductions £0.9m per month. • Mental health nursing pressures - £0.2m per month. • Tariff efficiency reductions not offset by recurrent CIP delivery - £0.7m per month. • Further growth in the number of patients not meeting the criteria to reside. These have been consistently at 200 with some weeks peaking at over 250. This has generated costs in opening surge capacity. Unfunded additional activity is a further pressure for UHS where we are YTD providing activity above block funded level for free in the following areas: • £9.6m of outpatient follow up appointments • £10.0m of non-elective • £4.1m of other treatments This is likely to be between £25m and £30m across 2023/24 and remains a key component of the Trust’s deficit. This will form a key part of contracting discussions for 2024/25 as this is clearly unsustainable in the medium to long term with focused efforts required either to reduce demand or acknowledge costs that require mitigation via other means. Cost Improvement Plans The most-likely risk assessed position of cost improvement delivery sits at £64m (5%). This includes the £5.5m targeted improvement within the financial recovery plan. Whilst we have made good progress with CIP performance, it is heavily supported by non-recurrent delivery that cannot be relied upon for underlying financial improvement. The aim is now to shift this into recurrent delivery. Financial recovery plan actions continue to be monitored and are included within appendix 1. Capital The 2023/24 capital programme is currently £12.0m behind plan YTD (spend of £32.1m compared to planned delivery of £44.1m). Currently there is confidence in forecast delivery of the planned level of expenditure, which totals nearly £60m including externally funded schemes for 2023/24. This does however require spend of c£27m in the remaining two months of the year. A month-on-month trajectory has been developed and is being tracked with project managers particularly in estates to ensure risks are understood at the earliest opportunity and mitigations put in place where possible. Page 3 of 4 Prioritisation for 2024/25 and 2025/26 has been discussed at Trust Investment Group and will be shared with Trust Board in February. This presents significant challenges as demands for capital increase year on year correlating with increased critical infrastructure, equipment and capacity risks. Cash As reported in previous finance report the trusts cash balance remains a significant concern and for the first time has dropped below the internal target minimum threshold of £30m, being £25m as at the close of January. The forecast was £28m however timing delays to PDC drawdowns and donated income receipts means this was slightly below planned levels. This now means there are periods in the month when cash levels are below £10m and require day to day management and overview. Short term increases are expected as several significant payments are due from commissioners in addition to £10m of external funding relating to the Neonatal capital project which has already had some costs incurred. The year end forecast therefore is expected to close at £40m. The additional cash support outlined above will improve this position further. Moving into 2024/25 additional vigilance will be applied and early warning systems maintained in order to assess the ongoing viability of the capital programme and also ensure the NHS England draw down process is ready if and when required. Implications: • Financial implications of availability of funding to cover growth, cost pressures and new activity. • Organisational implications of remaining within statutory duties. Risks: (Top 3) of carrying out the change / or not: • Financial risk relating to the underlying run rate and projected potential deficit if the run rate continues. • Investment risk related to the above • Cash risk linked to volatility above • Inability to maximise CDEL (which cannot be carried forward) and the risk of a reducing internal CDEL allocation for 2024/25 due to the forecast deficit for 2023/24. Summary: Trust Board is asked to: Conclusion and/or • Note the finance position. recommendation Page 4 of 4 Report to the Trust Board of Directors Title: Agenda item: Sponsor: Author Date: Purpose Performance KPI Report 2023-24 Month 10 10.1 David French, Chief Executive Officer Sam Dale, Associate Director of Data and Analytics 29 February 2024 Assurance or Approval reassurance Y Ratification Information Issue to be addressed: The report aims to provide assurance: • Regarding the successful implementation of our strategy • That the care we provide is safe, caring, effective, responsive, and well led Response to the issue: The Performance KPI Report reflects the current operating environment and is aligned with our strategy. Implications: This report covers a broad range of trust performance metrics. It is (Clinical, intended to assist the Board in assuring that the Trust meets Organisational, regulatory requirements and corporate objectives. Governance, Legal?) Risks: (Top 3) of carrying out the change / or not: This report is provided for the purpose of assurance. Summary: Conclusion and/or recommendation This report is provided for the purpose of assurance. Page 1 of 24 Report to Trust Board in February 2024 Performance KPI Board Report Covering up to January 2023 Sponsor – David French, Chief Executive Officer Author – Sam Dale, Associate Director of Data and Analytics Page 2 of 24 Report to Trust Board in February 2024 Report guide Chart type Example Cumulative Column Cumulative Column Year on Year Line Benchmarked Line & bar Benchmarked Control Chart Variance from Target Explanation A cumulative column chart is used to represent a total count of the variable and shows how the total count increases over time. This example shows quarterly updates. A cumulative year on year column chart is used to represent a total count of the variable throughout the year. The variable value is reset to zero at the start of the year because the target for the metric is yearly. The line benchmarked chart shows our performance compared to the average performance of a peer group. The number at the bottom of the chart shows where we are ranked in the group (1 would mean ranked 1st that month). The line shows our performance, and the bar underneath represents the range of performance of benchmarked trusts (bottom = lowest performance, top = highest performance) A control chart shows movement of a variable in relation to its control limits (the 3 lines = Upper control limit, Mean and Lower control limit). When the value shows special variation (not expected) then it is highlighted green (leading to a good outcome) or red (leading to a bad outcome). Values are considered to show special variation if they -Go outside control limits -Have 6 points in a row above or below the mean, -Trend for 6 points, -Have 2 out of 3 points past 2/3 of the control limit, -Show a significant movement (greater than the average moving range). Variance from target charts is used to show how far away a variable is from its target each month. Green bars represent the value the metric is achieving better than target and the red bars represent the distance a metric is away from achieving its target. Page 3 of 24 Report to Trust Board in February 2024 Introduction The Performance KPI Report is presented to the Trust Board each month to provide assurance: • regarding the successful implementation of our strategy; and • that the care we provide is safe, caring, effective, responsive, and well led. The content of the report includes the following: • The ‘Spotlight’ section, to enable more detailed consideration of any topics that are of particular interest or concern. The selection of topics is informed by a rolling schedule, performance concerns, and requests from the Board. • An ‘NHS Constitution Standards’ section, summarising the standards and performance in relation to service waiting times; and • An ‘Appendix,’ with indicators presented monthly, aligned with the five themes within our strategy. Adjustments of note within the report include: • 11 – Medication Errors (severe/moderate) were revalidated for December 2023 and reduced to four from five in the last publication • 54 – Cyber Security: the data labels used on the bar chart required correction to align with the multiplication factor stated in the description Page 4 of 24 Report to Trust Board in February 2024 Summary This month’s spotlight report covers diagnostic performance. It highlights that UHS has consistently reduced the diagnostic waiting list throughout the 2023 calendar year and the hospital’s waiting time performance is now consistently in the second quartile compared to peer teaching hospitals across the country. The paper describes the high level activity and performance trends for the hospital over recent months and explores modality sites in more detail, outlining the specific challenges and actions taken by Care Groups to understand and improve performance. Areas of note in the appendix of performance metrics include: 1. The Emergency Department (ED) four hour performance metric further improved in January 2024 increasing to 63.7% placing UHS as second highest performing trust when compared to twenty teaching hospitals across the country. The January performance is above our H2 recovery target for the month, but we recognise there is significant improvement required for the remainder of the year to reach our March 2024 target. 2. The trust is reporting zero patients waiting over 104 weeks for the first time this financial year as the longest waiting corneal patients have now been issued grafts by the national transplant service and treated. The trust reported 27 patients waiting over 78 weeks which mainly reflects the next cohort of corneal transplant patients waiting for national tissue to be issued. 3. UHS continues to focus on the national target of zero patients waiting over 65 weeks by March 2024. In December 2023, UHS ranked in the top quartile for patients waiting over 65 weeks and also patients waiting over 52 weeks compared to twenty comparative teaching hospitals across the country. 4. Cancer services have maintained strong waiting time performances in December 2023 as the Trust continues to rank as the top teaching hospital for 28 day faster diagnosis (87.2%) and second for 62 day performance (79.5%). Whilst the two week waiting times are no longer a nationally reported metric, the Trust continues to publish the metric and performance is now the highest of the year at 93.6%. 5. The volume of patients not meeting the Criteria to Reside in hospital increased further in January (averaging 234 across the month) continuing to place constraints on patient flow through the hospital. Ambulance response time performance The latest unvalidated weekly data is provided by the South Coast Ambulance Service (SCAS). Due to the significant challenges within the ED department, and the wider challenge with flow experienced in the trust since the New Year, we have seen a concerning increase in handover times. For all weeks commencing in January 2024, we averaged 32 handovers per week taking over 60 minutes and 67 handovers per week taking over 30 minutes. As a comparison, in the same period in 2023, we averaged just 3 handovers taking over 60 minutes per week. The graph below illustrates volumes of handovers reported by time cohort for the last two years. Page 5 of 24 Report to Trust Board in February 2024 The unvalidated aspect of the SCAS handover data is an ongoing concern caused by numerous factors including: • Overcrowding in the department causing delays to entry and exit flows particularly through the pitstop area. • Inaccurate recording of handover delays where multiple patients arrived under the responsibility of one ambulance crew • The impact of improved waiting room triage times (particularly for those self-presenting) which has created a bottle neck with patients waiting on chairs and trolleys within pitstop • General concerns around inaccuracy of handover time stamps captured by ambulance and hospital nursing staff during busy periods. A series of actions are being jointly worked on to address the situation which include the development of a Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) for patient cohorting to be approved and adopted by both NHS bodies. Pitstop processes are being scrutinised with the transformation team to improve efficiency and may include the allocation of an additional nurse within pitstop. The position has also highlighted the need for a renewed focus on recording accuracy from all responsible staff. Page 6 of 24 Report to Trust Board in February 2024 Spotlight – Diagnostic Performance Spotlight: Diagnostic Performance The following report is based on the validated January 2024 submission. Introduction Diagnostics are a critical component of a patient’s pathway, facilitating an accurate and complete diagnosis, personalised treatment plans and the appropriate monitoring of a patient’s condition. Timely access to diagnostic tests is essential for ensuring that patients receive an early diagnosis whilst improving patient experience and delivering an efficient use of NHS resources. The Elective Care guidance from NHS England and Improvement (NHSE/I) states the "ambition is that 95% of patients needing a diagnostic test receive it within six weeks by March 2025". This outcome is aligned with the principle that diagnostic activity levels must support plans to address elective and cancer backlogs as Trusts aim to eliminate waits of over 65 weeks for elective care by March 2024. This diagnostic target applies to 15 different diagnostic tests, although performance is measured at a Trust level. These tests are broadly divided into three categories: • endoscopy (e.g. gastroscopy, cystoscopy); • imaging (e.g. CT, MRI, barium enema); • physiological measurement (e.g. echocardiogram, sleep studies). This spotlight paper highlights the current diagnostic performance position for UHS against the national targets and other hospitals. It also describes the recent volumes of activity delivered and the impact on the waiting list. We explore the key modalities in more depth outlining the challenges faced by services and the mitigating actions being put in place for the remainder of the financial year and beyond. In summary, there has been a consistent reduction in the diagnostic waiting list throughout 2023 as UHS has been able to increase the delivery of diagnostic activity to manage current levels of demand. The diagnostic waiting list reduced to 8052 patients in January 2024. This is a reduction of 45% since the high levels seen in June 2022 (11,671 patients) and is the lowest waiting list size since July 2020. Throughout the 2023 calendar year, the waiting list has decreased by 2,473 patients which is a 31% reduction. Our January 2024 performance position is 85.5%. Page 7 of 24 Report to Trust Board in February 2024 Spotlight – Diagnostic Performance Activity and Waiting List Elective diagnostic activity being delivered at UHS has consistently increased throughout 2023/24 helping to reduce the waiting list despite high referral volumes and the complications caused by industrial action throughout the year. Whilst the consultant and junior doctor strikes have impacted endoscopic services, the impact on radiology activity has been limited. Graph 1 illustrates how recent diagnostic activity being delivered at UHS is approximately 33% higher than the 2019/20 baseline (approximately 18,000 procedures per month vs baseline of 13,500). There is a clear reduction in the diagnostic waiting list throughout the year (graph 2) with some levelling off in winter months attributed to the festive period. The waiting list reached its recent lowest point in December going below 8000 patients for the first time since July 2020. January’s finalised waiting list position was 8052 patients. The care groups developed plans at the start of 2023/24 to increase activity levels and appropriately manage service demand. These have proved successful in several areas particularly where transformation colleagues have supported with opportunity identification and clinician engagement. We have seen a reduction in DNAs in certain services, improved booking processes and served notice to Portsmouth and Salisbury for referrals within Cardiac MRI. Nevertheless certain services are still challenged due to vacancies and recruitment delays and the ongoing demand on services both electively and non electively. Graph 1: Diagnostic Activity Delivered by Month 14,000 12,000 10,000 8,000 6,000 4,000 2,000 0 We explore modality performance positions and service plans in more detail in section four. Graph 2: Waiting List Size by Month Page 8 of 24 Report to Trust Board in February 2024 Spotlight – Diagnostic Performance Performance Position The Trust submitted performance position (Graph 3) demonstrates a continuous and positive, upward trajectory reaching 85.5% in January 2024. This reflects significant progress throughout the year and contradicts the dip in performance seen over the festive period this time last year. When benchmarking our performance against other peer teaching hospitals (graph 4), the Trust has historically been in the third quartile. Our December performance is in the second quartile and UHS has ranked seven out of twenty teaching hospitals for the last three months. It should be noted there is a wide spread of diagnostic performance with some trusts delivering fewer than 50% of tests within the six-week target. Graph 3: Graph Diagnostic Performance % by Month 90% 85% 80% 75% 70% 65% 60% 55% 50% Jan-21 Jul-21 Jan-22 Jul-22 Jan-23 Jan-24, 85.5% Jul-23 Jan-24 Graph 4: UHS Diagnostic Performance compared to peer teaching hospitals Page 9 of 24 Report to Trust Board in February 2024 Spotlight – Diagnostic Performance Modality Focus: Physiological modality This modality includes Audiology, Echocardiography, Neurophysiology and Sleep Studies. Across the modality group, the performance position and waiting list has improved significantly following a decline in the performance position in the first half of the 2023 calendar year. The January 2024 performance position is 74.5% with the waiting list at 1,925 patients. This compares to the position in August 2023, where the reported performance had dipped to 53.7% and the waiting list was 2,395 patients which reflects a 20% reduction. Audiology performance remains consistently at 100%, but overall performance is offset by continued pressures across other key services in particular sleep studies (60%) and neurophysiology (66%). Graph 5: Performance trend and waits for all physiological metrics:- The neurophysiology department has been under service review since June 2023 which is a collaboration between the department and the transformation team this has been instrumental in addressing some long term performance issues including the legacy of a COVID backlog. By fostering open communications and leveraging the team’s own expertise, a series of bottlenecks and inefficient work practices were identified and addressed. The result has seen performance improve from 47% in June 2023 to 66% in January 2023. This will be further enhanced by the introduction of an internally built Apex system that will aid in day to day patient flow management. A decision was made to invest in an insourcing solution at weekends from November 2023 which has reduced the neurophysiology waiting list from 1083 to 723. The focus is now on developing a more sustainable solution with a focus on department capacity versus demand and a review of consultant job plans. The sleep study service has seen referral numbers increase from on average 15 a week to 35 over the last two years. Overall performance is continuing to improve supported by actions again developed by the transformation and operational teams. Within the previous twelve months the highest number of diagnostic breaches reached 215, since September 2023 total breaches average at 136 per month. The project reviewing the DNA rate within sleeps studies is also complete. The DNA rate prior to project completion was 22.5% and this has now reduced to 8%. Root causes were the distance to travel to Lymington, text reminder services not fully established and mutually agreed appointments not being fully implemented. The services have also completed recruitment of a band 6 Physiologist with an expected start date in February, this will supported an upward trajectory for activity and support backlog reduction. The service is also scoping out the purchase of another inpatient testing kit through charitable funding. Page 10 of 24 Report to Trust Board in January 2023 Spotlight Modality Focus: Imaging Services This modality includes include computed tomography (CTs), MRIs, Barium Enema and Non-Obstetric Ultrasounds The Trust has seen an improved performance position across the 2023 calendar year. Performance in January 2024 was 89.9% and recent levels came close to achieving the national target (95%) by reaching 92.4% in November 2023. Activity levels have remained consistent in recent months averaging 13855 per month across all imaging services despite the interruptions caused by the industrial action and winter pressures. The waiting list has reduced by 22% across the last twelve months from 6,898 in February 2023 to 5,405 in January 2024. Graph 6: Performance trend and waits for all imaging services CT performance is extremely positive achieving the national target in the last three months and reporting 98% in January 2024 with a waiting list of 741 compared to 1113 in February 2023. MRI performance has remained at around 85% in recent months and this is predominantly driven down by Cardiac MRI performance (53% in January 2024). Whilst we served notice to Salisbury and Portsmouth to originally prevent Cardiac MRI referrals to UHS from November 2023, we agreed a staggered timescale to ensure both hospitals were in a position to appropriately deliver both stress and non-stress MRIs fully by March 2024. Recent performance has also been impacted by urgent equipment repairs and recruitment delays which were planned to enable a seven day service. General MRI performance is consistently at 96% or above supported by the use of a relocatable MRI scanner seven days a week and additional in-house lists. Despite the positive performance across all imaging services, the recent demand on non elective work alongside current recruitment restrictions and high staff sickness levels may impact the ability to consistently maintain high levels of performance across all services. Page 11 of 24 Report to Trust Board in January 2023 Spotlight Modality Focus: Endoscopy This modality includes colonoscopy, cystoscopy, flexi-sigmoidoscopy and gastroscopy across both adult and paediatric services. Diagnostic performance was 82% in January 2024 and has been in the range of 80-85% over the last six months which is a significant improvement since the first half of the year where performance averaged at 78%. Graph 7: Performance trend and waits for all endoscopy services Historically the cystoscopy service has been the key endoscopic service significantly reducing the overall modality performance. The service reported 49% at the start of this financial year (April 2023) but this has now improved significantly to 76% in December 2023 and 70% in January 2024. During that same period, the waiting list for adult and paediatric cystoscopies reduced from 406 patients (April 2023) to 101 patients (January 2024). The success is attributed to the service embedding a clerk solely dedicated to booking processes for cystoscopy patients. This is alongside additional capacity solely assigned to addressing the concerning back log of patients. The paediatric endoscopy service has continued to face demand and capacity challenges throughout 2023. January 2024 performance stands at 45% which is a significant improvement since June 2023 where performance was as low as 24% due to scope equipment failure and lists taken down for strikes and anaesthetic gaps. The service continues to use waiting list initiatives to maintain the position alongside regular consultant engagement and patient validation to ensure patient prioritisation processes are improving the waiting time position. Further long term demand and capacity modelling is underway and a business case for an additional consultant is also being explored. Page 12 of 24 Report to Trust Board in January 2023 NHS Constitution NHS Constitution - Standards for Access to services within waiting times The NHS Constitution* and the Handbook to the NHS Constitution** together set out a range of rights to which people are entitled, and pledges that the NHS is committed to achieve, including: The right to access certain services commissioned by NHS bodies within maximum waiting times, or for the NHS to take all reasonable steps to offer you a range of suitable alternative providers if this is not possible • Start your consultant-led treatment within a maximum of 18 weeks from referral for non-urgent conditions • Be seen by a cancer specialist within a maximum of 2 weeks from GP referral for urgent referrals where cancer is suspected The NHS pledges to provide convenient, easy access to services within the waiting times set out in the Handbook to the NHS Constitution • All patients should receive high-quality care without any unnecessary delay • Patients can expect to be treated at the right time and according to their clinical priority. Patients with urgent conditions, such as cancer, will be able to be seen and receive treatment more quickly The handbook lists eleven of the government pledges on waiting times that are relevant to UHS services, such pledges are monitored within the organisation and by NHS commissioners and regulators. Performance against the NHS rights, and a range of the pledges, is summarised below. Further information is available within the Appendix to this report. * https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/the-nhs-constitution-for-england/the-nhs-constitution-for-england ** https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/supplements-to-the-nhs-constitution-for-england/the-handbook-to-the-nhs-constitution-for-england Page 13 of 24 Report to Trust Board in February 2024 NHS Constitution Monthly Nov Dec Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec Jan target YTD 75% % Patients on an open 18 week pathway (within 18 weeks ) 31 UHSFT 63.2% 62.5% 5 5 5 5 4 4 4 4 5 4 4 4 4 ≥92% Teaching hospital average (& rank of 20) South East average (& rank of 17) 5 50% 5 5 5 6 6 5 5 6 6 6 5 4 63.0% 100% % Patients following a GP referral for suspected cancer seen by a specialist within 17 14 13 15 17 17 17 16 16 16 13 2 weeks (Most recently externally reported 79.5% 38 data, unless stated otherwise below) UHSFT Teaching hospital average (& rank of 20) 18 10 11 13 16 19 18 16 13 9 10 South East average (& rank of 17) 55% 93.6% ≥93% Cancer waiting times 62 day standard - 100% Urgent referral to first definitive treatment 79.5% (Most recently externally reported data, 39 unless stated otherwise below) 14 17 18 14 14 9 14 13 10 15 6 11 7 6 UHSFT Teaching hospital average (& rank of 19) South East average (& rank of 17) 40% 7 551.62% 11 7 14 5 9 7 3 6 1 3 2 2 ≥85% 100% Patients spending less than 4hrs in ED - (Type 1) 28 UHSFT 6 61.5% 7 6 5 4 9 12 9 8 63.7% 8 12 10 11 8 4 ≥95% Teaching hospital average (& rank of 16) South East average (& rank of 16) 4 4 3 3 3 5 7 5 5 5 7 7 7 5 2 25% 40% 29.6% % of Patients waiting over 6 weeks for diagnostics 37 UHSFT Teaching Hospital average (& rank of 20) 11 12 12 12 12 11 11 11 7 9 7 7 7 6 10 7 8 8 8 7 7 8 10 10 8 7 7 14.5% 7 ≤1% South East Average (& rank of 18) 0% 76.7% 66.7% 61.1% 19.5% Page 14 of 24 Report to Trust Board in February 2024 Outstanding Patient Outcomes,Safety and Experience Outcomes 1 HSMR - UHS HSMR - SGH 2 HSMR - Crude Mortality Rate Nov Dec Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec Jan 89.77 87.52 88.07 86.11 75 3.1% 2.8% 2.7% Monthly target ≤100 <3% 2.5% 15% 3 Percentage non-elective readmissions within 28 days of discharge from hospital 10% 11.4% 12.0% - Cumulative Specialties with 4 Outcome Measures Developed (Quarterly) Q4 22-23 75 71 70 65 Q1 23-24 72 Q2 23-24 72 Q3 23-24 73 Q4 23-24 74 Quarterly target +1 Specialty per quarter Developed Outcomes RAG ratings (Quarterly) 5 Red Amber Green 100% 35 34 37 41 41 81 82 75 67 64 75% 336 340 333 337 338 50% YTD 90.7 2.7% 12.2% Red : below the national standard or 10% lower than the local target Amber : below the national standard or 5% lower than the local target Green : within the national standard or local target YTD target ≤100 <3% Appendix Page 15 of 24 Report to Trust Board in February 2024 Outstanding Patient Outcomes,Safety and Experience Safety Monthly Nov Dec Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec Jan target YTD Cumulative Clostridium difficile 6 Most recent 12 Months vs. Previous 12 Months 90 7177 7484 94 1112 1827 2435 49 28 60 35 66 47 72 55 6581 7391 ≤5 91 0 5 7 MRSA bacteraemia 0 7 01 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 2 1 2 80 YTD target ≤50 0 8 Gram negative bacteraemia ≤18 192 0 24 16 17 14 32 14 19 27 16 21 15 25 18 17 20 Monthly Nov Dec Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec Jan target YTD 1 0.56 9 Pressure ulcers category 2 per 1000 bed days 0.46 <0.3 0.41 0 ≤173 YTD target <0.3 1 Pressure ulcers category 3 and above 10 0.25 per 1000 bed days 0 10 0.52 0.32 <0.3 0.42 <0.3 11 Medication Errors (severe/moderate) 3 3 ≤3 23 30 0 Watch & Reserve antibiotics, usage per 12 1,000 adms Most recent months vs. 2018*95.5% 3,500 1,500 2,7625,769 2,787 2,900 2,787 27,617 25,859 12 - For 2022/23 and forward, a new requirement is applied: Reduction of 4.5% from calendar year 2018 usage in combined WHO/NHSE AWaRE subgroups for “watch” and “reserve” agents. The performance data relate to successive FINANCIAL years, however the comparator denominator remains CALENDAR year 2018 (we are not using 2020 or 2021 due to the disruptive effect of COVID on both usage and admissions). Appendix Page 16 of 24 Report to Trust Board in February 2024 Outstanding Patient Outcomes,Safety and Experience Safety Monthly Nov Dec Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec Jan target YTD Serious Incidents Requiring 40 13 Investigation (SIRI) (based upon month 3 reported as SIRI, excluding Maternity) 0 - 27 0 13 From October 2023, as part of move to PSIRF, reporting of SIRIs was stopped. Patient Safety Incident Investigations (PSII) are reported going forward 5 Serious Incidents Requiring 14 Investigation - Maternity 0 0 0.2 Number of falls investigated per 1000 15 0.12 bed days 0.0 - 4 0 0.11 - 0.09 100% % patients with a nutrition plan in place 93.1% 94.2% 16 (total checks conducted included at ≥90% 95% chart base) 669 711 1624 780 1600 844 871 788 806 798 772 770 894 879 956 80% 100 17 Red Flag staffing incidents 28 26 - 169 Maternity 0 Monthly Nov Dec Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec Jan target YTD 600 Birth rate and Bookings 18 Birth Rate - total number of women birthed Bookings - Total number of women booked - - 483 406 392 428 469 409 446 467 442 400 424 400 382 417 450 418 477 402 449 416 513 387 432 383 453 436 363 440 498 412 300 10 19 Staffing: Birth rate plus reporting / opel status - number of days (or shifts) at Opel 4. 1 5 1 0 2 1 1 4 6 1 3 3 1 4 4 - - 0 100% 39.2% 47.3% 38.6% 49.3% 43.5% 45.2% 43.5% 44.3% 43.0% 43.5% 44.8% 44.8% 43.7% 38.6% 43.3% 43.3% 32.6% 53.0% 40.6% 46.9% 36.7% 48.8% 36.0% 54.8% 37.2% 49.3% 37.5% 48.2% 35.7% 48.5% Mode of delivery 20 % number of normal birthed (women) 50% % number of caesarean sections (women) % other - - 0% YTD target - - ≥90% - YTD target - - - Appendix Page 17 of 24 Report to Trust Board in February 2024 Outstanding Patient Outcomes,Safety and Experience Patient Experience 21 FFT Negative Score - Inpatients Nov Dec Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec Jan 3% 1.0% 0.8% 0% 10% FFT Negative Score - Maternity 22 (postnatal ward) 1.5% 2.7% 0% 50% 23 Total UHS women booked onto a continuity of carer pathway 0% 80% 24 Total BAME women booked onto a continuity of carer pathway 12.9% 85.9% 16.6% 21.9% 5% 100% % Patients reporting being involved in 25 87% 87% decisions about care and treatment 80% % Patients with a disability/ additional needs reporting those 87% 26 needs/adjustments were met (total 86% number questioned included at chart base) 80% 26 - Performance is a scored metric with a "Yes" response scoring 1, "Yes, to some extent" receiving 0.5 score and other responses scoring 0. 200 Overnight ward moves with a reason 78 96 27 marked as non-clinical (excludes moves from admitting wards with LOS<12hrs) 0 Monthly target ≤5% ≤5% ≥35% ≥51% ≥90% ≥90% - YTD 0.6% 2.4% 13.8% 28.6% 87.2% 90.2% 692 YTD target ≤5% ≤5% ≥35% ≥51% ≥90% ≥90% - Appendix Page 18 of 24 Report to Trust Board in February 2024 Outstanding Patient Outcomes,Safety and Experience Access Standards Nov Dec Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec Jan 100% Patients spending less than 4hrs in ED - (Type 1) 28 UHSFT 6 61.75% 5 6 4 9 12 9 8 63.7% 8 12 10 11 8 4 Teaching hospital average (& rank of 20) South East average (& rank of 16) 4 4 3 3 3 5 7 5 5 5 7 7 7 5 2 25% Monthly target ≥95% 05:00 29 Average (Mean) time in Dept - nonadmitted patients 02:00 08:00 30 Average (Mean) time in Dept - admitted patients 03:07 05:50 04:37 ≤04:00 06:39 ≤04:00 01:00 75% % Patients on an open 18 week pathway (within 18 weeks ) 64.0% 62.5% 31 UHSFT 5 5 5 4 4 4 4 5 4 4 4 4 Teaching hospital average (& rank of 20) 5 4 South East average (& rank of 17) 5 50% 5 5 5 6 6 5 5 6 6 6 5 4 4 ≥92% 60,000 Total number of patients on a waiting list 32 (18 week referral to treatment pathway) 54,254 57,725 - 40,000 Patients on an open 18 week pathway (waiting 52 weeks+ ) 8,000 5 5 5 5 4 4 4 4 3 3 3 2 2 2 33 UHSFT 2,156 1,672 ≤2,011 Teaching hospital average (& rank of 20) South East average (& rank of 17) 0 12 12 12 12 11 11 11 9 8 8 8 8 8 9 YTD 61.1% 03:39 06:01 63.0% 57,725 1,672 YTD target ≥95% ≤04:00 ≤04:00 ≥92% - ≤2011 Appendix Page 19 of 24 Report to Trust Board in February 2024 Outstanding Patient Outcomes,Safety and Experience Monthly Nov Dec Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec Jan target 4,000 Patients on an open 18 week pathway (waiting 65 weeks+ ) 6 6 6 5 5 4 4 4 4 5 5 3 3 3 34 UHSFT 827 - Teaching hospital average (& rank of 20) 245 South East average (& rank of 17) 0 13 12 13 12 12 11 11 10 9 9 9 8 8 8 Patients on an open 18 week pathway 1,400 7 7 7 (waiting 78 weeks+ ) 6 35 UHSFT Teaching hospital average (& rank of 20) 271 4 4 5 8 8 7 6 5 6 5 27 0 South East average (& rank of 17) 0 15 15 15 15 12 10 11 12 11 10 9 9 9 9 200 Patients on an open 18 week pathway (waiting 104 weeks+ ) 35a UHSFT 0 Teaching hospital average (& rank of 20) South East average (& rank of 17) 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 8 1 14 4 157 15 2 16 2 12 1 13 1 13 1 0 0 0 11 1 1 1 1 13 13 17 13 14 10 11 9 15,500 36 Patients waiting for diagnostics 11,500 10,634 - 8,052 7,500 % of Patients waiting over 6 weeks for diagnostics 40% 28.7% 12 12 11 12 12 11 11 11 7 9 7 7 6 7 37 UHSFT Teaching hospital average (& rank of 20) 10 7 8 8 8 77 8 10 10 8 7 14.5% 7 7 ≤1% South East average (& rank of 18) 0% YTD 245 27 8,052 19.5% YTD target - 0 0 ≤1% Appendix Page 20 of 24 Report to Trust Board in February 2024 Outstanding Patient Outcomes,Safety and Experience Monthly Nov Dec Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec Jan target % Patients following a GP referral for 100% suspected cancer seen by a specialist within 17 2 weeks (Most recently externally reported 14 13 79.5% 15 17 17 17 16 16 16 13 38 data, unless stated otherwise below) UHSFT Teaching hospital average (& rank of 20) 18 10 11 13 16 19 18 16 13 9 10 93.6% ≥93% South East average (& rank of 17) 55% YTD 76.7% YTD target ≥93% Beginning December 2023, NHSE published Cancer data no longer includes 2 week wait as a cancer standard for benchmarking. Data shown for October 2023 onwards will 38 reflect internally reported UHS position for each month, but will not include Teaching Hospital/South East Hospital data 100% Cancer waiting times 62 day standard - Urgent referral to first definitive treatment 79.5% (Most recently externally reported data, 39 unless stated otherwise below) 14 17 14 18 14 9 14 13 10 15 6 11 7 6 UHSFT Teaching hospital average (& rank of 20) South East average (& rank of 17) 40% 7 551.62% 11 7 14 5 9 7 3 6 1 3 2 2 ≥85% 66.7% ≥85% From October 2023 data onwards, the 62 day standard metric published in NHS england data combines Urgent Suspected Cancer and Breast Symptomatic with previously excluded Screening and 39 Upgrade routes. 100% Cancer 28 day faster diagnosis 87.2% Percentage of patients treated within 40 standard UHSFT Teaching hospital average (& rank of 20) South East average (& rank of 17) 78.6% 3 8 4 7 8 7 7 6 3 1 2 3 3 2 5 5 5 8 7 5 3 2 1 1 1 1 ≥75% 81.5% ≥75% 50% 100% 31 day cancer wait performance - decision to treat to first definitive treatment (Most 16 16 89.5% 16 18 16 15 17 15 13 13 11 15 12 13 recently externally reported data, unless 90.0% 41 stated otherwise below) UHSFT Teaching hospital average (& rank of 20) 13 12 20 12 10 14 11 5 14 9 6 9 15 8 South East average (& rank of 17) 78% ≥96% 88.4% ≥96% 41 From October 2023 data onwards, the 31 day standard metric published in NHS england data combines First Treatment and Subsequent Treatment routes. Appendix Page 21 of 24 Report to Trust Board in February 2024 Pioneering Research and Innovation R&D Performance 43 Comparative CRN Recruitment Performance - non-weighted Monthly Nov Dec Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec Jan target YTD 25 21 19 19 17 14 15 15 13 14 17 17 16 15 15 Top 10 - 7 44 Comparative CRN Recruitment Performance - weighted 0 15 10 10 10 11 9 9 12 14 15 12 11 12 9 6 11 Top 5 - 0 100% Study set up times - 80% target for 45 issuing Capacity & Capability within 40 50% Days of Site Selection 0% 88% 59% 64% 60% 67% 47% 46% 46% 55% 25% - - 200% 166.3% Achievement compared to R+D 150% 85.2% 104.1% 133.3% 133.3% 46 Income Baseline Monthly income increase % 100% 71.4% 79.2% 50% 69.5% 84.7% 65.2% 35.6% 50.7% 45.8% 84.7% 65.2% ≥5% - 6.5% YTD income increase % 0% Appendix YTD target - - - - Page 22 of 24 Report to Trust Board in February 2024 Integrated Networks and Collaboration Appendix Local Integration Nov Dec Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec Jan Monthly target 250 197 Number of inpatients that were 47 medically optimised for discharge (monthly average) 0 234 ≤80 Emergency Department 48 activity - type 1 This year vs. last year 13000 11000 9000 10,116 10,089 11,591 - 10,459 Percentage of virtual appointments as a 49 proportion of all outpatient consultations This year vs. last year 40% 29.8% 29.9% 20% 29.8% 29.4% ≥25% YTD 202 114,095 29.3% YTD target - - ≥25% Page 23 of 24 Report to Trust Board in February 2024 Foundations for the Future Digital Nov Dec Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec Jan My Medical Record - UHS patient 200,000 50 accounts (cumulative number of accounts in place at the end of each 100,000 month) 0 144,668 188,436 40000 My Medical Record - UHS patient 51 logins (number of logins made within 30000 each month) 20000 30,515 34,454 3090 Average age of IT estate 3000 2490 52 Distribution of computers per age 2000 863 1080 1170 in years 1000 0 0 27 39 84 136 375 0 1820 730 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Monthly target - - - YTD 188,436 32,150 - YTD target - - - 99.75% 99.72% 99.73% 99.81% 99.77% 99.82% 99.74% 99.79% 99.80% 99.79% 100% 53 CHARTS system average load times - % of pages loaded under 5s 95% 53 Data only available from April 2023 onwards Q4 22-23 Q1 23-24 Q2 23-24 Q3 23-24 Q4 23-24 Cyber attacks / phishing / incidents blocked 30 Average # Malware attempts blocked 25 per month (10s) 20 25 22 20 54 Average # Phishing emails blocked per 15 10 month (100s) 10 61 Average # Ransomware attempts 5 2 blocked per month 0 71 3 40 1 - 10 26 1 70 - - Inpatient noting progress Left axis: 55 IP Noting data recorded (100s) IP Noting unique user views Right axis: IP pages scanned (1000s) NEU go live 5000 EYE go live CV&T gTo&liOvego live 4000 3000 2000 1000 0 Med go live Sur go live 55 IP Noting went live in Oct-22. CGs going live are marked on green line. Can go live 800 600 - - - 400 200 0 Page 24 of 24 Appendix
Url: /Media/UHS-website-2019/Docs/About-the-Trust/Trust-governance-and-corporate-docs/2024-Trust-documents/Finance-and-Performance-Reports-2023-24-Month-10-January-2024.pdf

1 to 10 of 83

Previous 1 2 3 4 5 … Next

Browse site A to Z

Search results

Papers Trust Board - 11 November 2025

Papers Trust Board - 11 March 2025

Annual report 20-21

Papers Trust Board - 13 January 2026

Annual report 2021-2022

Papers Trust Board - 29 November 2022

UHS AR 22-23-6

UHS AR 23-24 Final

Quality account 24-25 final

Finance and Performance Reports 2023-24 Month 10 - January 2024

Site policies

Contact details

Useful links